Spreadsheet: 401799c9-1339-423e-9b40-d986d1eca135
Sheet: Sheet1

qty. | isbn | cluster | authoreditor1_lastname | authoreditors_affiliation | title | subtitle | series_title | volume_number | edition_number | copyright_year | number_of_arabic_pages | term_cover_type | term_medium | bibliographic_information | springer_reference | price_eur_status | recomm_price_eur | price_eur | price_eur_gross_d | price_eur_gross_a | price_gbp | price_chf | term_language1 | term_main_discipline | [NAME] | subject1 | bic_code1 | term_subject2 | subject2 | bic_code2 | term_bookstore | term_product_category | term_publisher_name | delivery_status_scsc | pub_date_planned | [NAME] | distribution_information | table_of_contents_short | info_text | usp_editorial | term_publication_class | discount_group_scsc | ebook_info_no_e_rights | ebook_package | term_ebook_package
 | 978-94-017-8708-6 | Education | Ahrens | [NAME], University of Hamburg, Hamburg, Germany | Experiment and Exploration: Forms of World-Disclosure | From Epistemology to Bildung | Contemporary Philosophies and Theories in Education | 6 | 1 | 2014 | 237 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 237 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Educational Philosophy | SCO38000 | JNA | Philosophy of Education | SCE25000 | JNA | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- 1. The Subversion of Technology.- 2. The Disclosure of the World.- 3. The Form of the Experimental.- 4. The Subversion of Bildung.- Bibliography. | This book deals with contemporary epistemological questions, connecting Educational Philosophy with the field of Science- and Technology Studies. It can be understood as a draft of a general theory of world-disclosure, which is in its core a distinction between two forms of world-disclosure: experiment and exploration. These two forms have never been clearly distinguished before. The focus lies on the experimental form of world-disclosure, which is described in detail and in contrast to the explorational form along the line of twenty-one characteristics, which are mainly derived from empirical studies of experimental work in the field of natural sciences. It can also be understood as an attempt to integrate elements of the Anglo-Saxon Philosophy of Science with elements of the German tradition of Educational Philosophy. This is also reflected in the style of writing. In accordance to the content-level of the book, the argument for experimental forms of world-disclosure is written in an essayistic, readable style, which can be understood as an experimental form of writing.This book is a translation of the doctoral thesis 'Experiment und Exploration. Bildung als experimentelle Form der Welterschließung' (summa cum laude). The thesis was published in German in 2010 by [NAME] ([NAME]) in the series called '[NAME], edited by Prof. Dr. [NAME], Prof. Dr. [NAME], Prof. Dr. [NAME] and Prof. Dr. [NAME]. | <p>Connects Educational Philosophy with the field of Science- and Technology Studies</p><p>Drafts a general theory of world-disclosure by describing the experimental form of world-disclosure in contrast to the explorational form</p><p>Discloses the German tradition of Educational Philosophy, which has been scarcely available to the international scientific community so far</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04845-1 | Education | Barton | [NAME], Griffith University Mt. [NAME], [NAME], QLD, Australia | Literacy in the Arts | Retheorising Learning and Teaching |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 291 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 291 p. 51 illus., 40 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Arts Education | SCO11000 | JNU | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I – Theorizing the arts and literacy.- 1. Literacy and the arts: Interpretation and expression of symbolic form.- 2. First literacies: Art, creativity, play, constructive meaning-making.- 3. Visual arts education and the formation of literacies: An exploration of visuality.- 4. Interfacing visual and verbal narrative art in paper and digital media: Recontextualising literature and literacies.- 5. Reflective practice in the arts.- Part II – Teaching and learning literacy in the arts. 6. Literacy and knowledge: classroom practice in the arts.- 7. Dance literacy: An embodied phenomena.- 8. Drama literacy: Indefinite articles.- 9. Developing media production skills for literacy in a primary school classroom: Digital materials, embodied knowledge and material contexts.- 10. Music literacies: Teaching diversity.- 11. Connect, transform, learn: Achieving visual literacy in the art classroom.- Part III – Diverse arts-literacy dialogues. 12. Improving literacy through the arts.- 13. Using visualisation and imagery to enhance reading comprehension.- 14. Musicking as literacy: possibilities and pragmatisms for literacies learning.- 15. Storytelling as an art literacy: Use of narrative structure in Aboriginal arts practice and performance.- 16. The arts and literacy, ‘amplified right’: Hearing and reading J.S. Bach.- 17. Encouraging productive arts-literacy dialogues: A call to action. | This book explores the many dialogues that exist between the arts and literacy. It shows how the arts are inherently multimodal and therefore interface regularly with literate practice in learning and teaching contexts. It asks the questions: What does literacy look like in the arts? And what does it mean to be arts literate? It explores what is important to know and do in the arts and also what literacies are engaged in, through the journey to becoming an artist. The arts for the purpose of this volume include five art forms: Dance, Drama, Media Arts, Music and Visual Arts. The book provides a more productive exploration of the arts-literacy relationship. It acknowledges that both the arts and literacy are open-textured concepts and notes how they accommodate each other, learn about, and from each other and can potentially make education ‘better’. It is when the two stretch each other that we see an educationally productive dialogic relationship emerge. | <p>Highlights the unique relationship between the arts and literacy</p><p>Provides examples of what literate practices are evident in arts classroom contexts from early years to higher [NAME] the arts and literacy around key points and concepts such as: creativity, multimodality, reflective practice, visual, aural and performative literacies</p><p>Discusses ways that the arts improve literacy outcomes</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-4359-5 | Education | Bencze | [NAME], OISE, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON, Canada; [NAME], York University, Toronto, ON, Canada | Activist Science and Technology Education |  | Cultural Studies of Science Education | 9 | 1 | 2014 | 596 | Hard cover | Book | XXIII, 596 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- Foreword.- Contributor List.- Preface.-  1. Activism! Toward a more radical science and technology education, [NAME] and [NAME] Bencze.- Part I: Constituting Theories.- Preamble, [NAME] and [NAME] Bencze.- 2. The elephant in the room: Science education, neoliberalism and resistance, [NAME] Carter.- 3. Science education as a site for biopolitical engagement and the reworking of subjectivities, [NAME] Bazzul.- 4. A Critical Pedagogy for STEM Education, [NAME] Rodriguez.- 5. Becoming part of the solution: Learning about activism, learning through activism, learning from activism, [NAME] Hodson.- 6. From promoting the techno-sciences to activism: A variety of stakes involved in the teaching of SSIs, Laurence Simonneaux.- 7. Hopeful practices: [NAME] and enacting the pedagogical and political potential in crisis, Rebecca Houwer.- 8. Using collaborative inquiry to better understand teaching and learning, [NAME] Tobin.- 9. From knowledge to action?: Re-embedding science learning within the planet’s web, [NAME] and Elena Camino.- 10. Education for sustainable contraction as appropriate response to global heating, [NAME] Selby.- 11. Learning to let go of sustainability, [NAME] and [NAME] Newbury.- Part II: The Public Sphere.- Preamble, [NAME] and [NAME] Bencze.- 12. Street medicine as a science education for activists, [NAME] Weinstein.- 13. Why science education mediates the way we eat, [NAME] Mueller.- 14. From-within-the-event: A post-constructivist perspective on activism, ethics, and science education, [NAME] Roth.- 15. #[NAME], [NAME] Milberry.- 16. Trajectories of socio-scientific issues in news media: Looking into the future, [NAME] Bowen.- 17. The perils, politics, and promises of activist science, Bernhard Isopp.- 18. Passive no more, Leo Elshof.- 19.       Joining up and scaling up: analyzing resistance to Canada’s “dirty oil”, [NAME] and [NAME]: Elementary and Secondary Education.- Preamble, [NAME] and [NAME]. We got involved and we got to fix it!: Action-oriented school science, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Bencze.- 21. [NAME] in school science: Telling the story of aluminium, [NAME] Levinson.- 22. Preparing students for self-directed research-informed actions on socioscientific issues, Mirjan Krstovic.- 23. Activism in science and environmental education: Renewing conceptions about science among students when considering socioscientific issues, [NAME] and Yves Laberge.- 24. Utilizing social media to increase  student-led activism on STSE issues, [NAME] and [NAME] Bencze.- 25. Developing an ‘activist mentality’ in an environmental science course, [NAME] Blatt.- 26. Responsible stewards of the earth: Narratives of youth activism in high school (science), [NAME] and Giuliano Reis.- 27. Climate change and citizen science: Early reflections on long-term ecological monitoring projects in Southern Ontario, Ana [NAME] and [NAME] Alsop.- 28. “It changed our lives”: Activism, science, and greening the club/community, [NAME] and Edna Tan.- Part IV: Post-secondary Education.- Preamble, [NAME] and [NAME]. Citizens as concerned but knowledge-poor watchdogs: Attributions of legitimacy to social actors in the management of biotechnology issues, Chantal Pouliot.- 30. Transformative learning in science education: Investigating pedagogy for action, [NAME], [NAME] and Mellita Jones.- 31. Promoting students’ collective socio-scientific activism: Teachers’ perspectives, [NAME] Reis.- 32. Counter cultural hegemony: Student teachers’ experiences implementing STSE-activism, [NAME] and [NAME] Bencze.- 33. Implementing practical pedagogical strategies for the widespread adoption of renewable energy, [NAME] Etcheverry.- [NAME] | This collection examines issues of agency, power, politics and identity as they relate to science and technology and education, within contemporary settings. Social, economic and ecological critique and reform are examined by numerous contributing authors, from a range of international contexts. These chapters examine pressing pedagogical questions within socio-scientific contexts, including petroleum economies, food justice, health, environmentalism, climate change, social media and biotechnologies.  Readers will discover far reaching inquiries into activism as an open question for science and technology education, citizenship and democracy. The authors call on the work of prominent scholars throughout the ages, including Bourdieu, Foucault, Giroux, Jasanoff, [NAME], [NAME], Nietzsche, Rancière and Žižek.  The application of critical theoretical scholarship to mainstream practices in science and technology education distinguishes this book, and this deep, theoretical treatment is complemented by many grounded, more pragmatic exemplars of activist pedagogies. Practical examples are set within the public sphere, within selected new social movements, and also within more formal institutional settings, including elementary and secondary schools, and higher education.  These assembled discussions provide a basis for a more radically reflexive reworking of science and technology education. Educational policy makers, science education scholars, and science and technology educators, amongst others, will find this work thought-provoking, instructive and informative. | Applies critical theoretical scholarship to mainstream practices in science and technology education<br>First volume examining conceptual and empirical issues of activist science and technology education <br>Explores specific pedagogical themes within compulsory schooling (K-12) and non-formal and informal educational contexts <br>Gathers together leading authors, all internationally recognised for their work in the area of activist science education​ | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05388-2 | Education | Bikner-Ahsbahs | [NAME], University of Bremen, Bremen, Germany; [NAME], Technische Universität Dortmund, Dortmund, Germany | Networking of Theories as a Research Practice in Mathematics Education |  | Advances in Mathematics Education |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Education | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-06-09 00:00:00 |  |  | PART A: Introduction.- Chapter 0: Susanne Prediger & Angelika Bikner-Ahsbahs: Preface.- Chapter 1: Angelika Bikner-Ahsbahs, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Ivy Kidron, [NAME], [NAME], & Ingolf Schäfer: Starting points for dealing with the diversity of theory.- Chapter 2: Cristina Sabena: Description of the data: Introducing the session of Ciro, [NAME] and the exponential function.- PART B: Diversity of theories.- Chapter 3: Ferdinando Arzarello & Cristina Sabena: Introduction to the approach of Action, Production and Communication (APC).- Chapter 4: Michèle Artigue & Mariam Haspekian & Agnes Lenfant: Introduction to the Theory of Didactical Situations (TDS).- Chapter 5: Marianna Bosch & [NAME]: Introduction to the Anthropological Theory of the Didactic (ATD).- Chapter 6: Tommy Dreyfus & Ivy Kidron: Introduction to Abstraction in Context (AiC).- Chapter 7: Angelika Bikner-Ahsbahs & [NAME]: Introduction to the Theory of Interest-Dense Situations (IDS).- PART C: Case studies of Networking.- Chapter 8: Susanne Prediger & Angelika Bikner-Ahsbahs: Introduction to networking: Networking strategies and their background.- Chapter 9: [NAME], [NAME], Ivy Kidron, [NAME]: The Epistemic Role of Gestures – A case study on networking of APC and AiC.- Chapter 10: Ivy Kidron, [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME]: Context, milieu and media-milieu dialectic - A case study on networking of AiC, TDS, and ATD.- Chapter 11: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME]: The epistemological gap - A case study on networking of APC and IDS.- CHAPTER 12  [NAME], Michèle Artigue & [NAME]: Topaze Effect - A case study on networking of IDS and TDS.- PART D: Reflections.- Chapter 13: [NAME]: Beyond the official academic stage – Dialogical intermezzo.- Chapter 14: Angelika Bikner-Ahsbahs & Susanne Prediger: Networking as research practices : methodological lessons learnt from the case studies.- Chapter 15: Michèle Artigue & Marianna Bosch: Reflection on Networking through the praxeological lens.- Chapter 16: [NAME]: From networked theories to modular tools?.- Chapter 17: [NAME] Theories and their networking - A Heideggerian commentary.- Appendix.- Index. | This book presents the outcomes arisen from the 2005 CERME Networking Group and connects different theories within mathematics education research. The group has developed strategies for the networking of theories and this book is the outcome of the joined efforts of thoroughly empirical research Radford. Investigating strands and issues of these networking practices. This unique work intent to explain and illustrate what it means to network theories and to present networking as a research practice. At the same time, it shows how the activity of networking generates questions at the theoretical and practical level and how these questions can be treated leading to new insights on a content level and the level networking of theories. The Networking group was initiated and coordinated by Angelika Bikner-Ahsbahs, its founding members were [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Ivy Kidron, [NAME] and [NAME], later joined by [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. Meanwhile, [NAME] changed the role to a critical friend of the group, joined by [NAME]. | <p>First volume to empirically connect various didactical theories through five different theoretical lenses</p><p>Presents networking as a research practice in four comprehensible case studies</p><p>Offers reflection on networking practices from different perspectives</p><p>With critical comments from [NAME] and [NAME] Radford</p><p>Unique collaboration between internationally renowned specialist in the field</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05593-0 | Education | Bray | [NAME], UNESCO International Institute for Educational Planning, Paris, France; [NAME], Hong Kong Institute of Education, [NAME], New Territories, Hong Kong SAR; [NAME], University of Hong Kong Fac. Education, Hong Kong, Hong Kong SAR | Comparative Education Research | Approaches and Methods | CERC Studies in Comparative Education | 32 | 2 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 470 p. | 0 | approx. | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Education | International and Comparative Education | SCO13000 | JN | Methodology of the Social Sciences | SCX17000 | JHBC | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-04-10 00:00:00 |  |  | List of Tables.- List of Figures.- Abbreviations.- Preface.- Introduction: Mark BRAY, Bob ADAMSON & Mark MASON.- I: DIRECTIONS.- 1. Actors and Purposes in Comparative Education: [NAME]. Scholarly Enquiry and the Field of Comparative Education: [NAME]. Quantitative and [NAME] to Comparative Education: Gregory P. FAIRBROTHER.- II: UNITS OF COMPARISON.- 4. Comparing Places: [NAME]. Comparing Systems: Mark BRAY & Kai JIANG.- 6. Comparing Times: [NAME]. Comparing Race, Class and [NAME]: [NAME] 8. [NAME]: [NAME] 9. Comparing Values: Wing On LEE & Maria MANZON.- 10. Comparing Policies: [NAME] 11. Comparing [NAME]: Bob ADAMSON & Paul MORRIS.- 12. Comparing Pedagogical Innovations: Nancy LAW.- 13. Comparing Ways of Learning: [NAME] Jan VAN AALST.- 14. Comparing Educational Achievements: [NAME]: CONCLUSIONS.- 15. Different Models, Different Emphases, [NAME]: [NAME], Bob ADAMSON & Mark MASON.- Contributors.- Index. | Approaches and methods in comparative education are of obvious importance, but do not always receive adequate attention. This second edition of a well-received book, containing thoroughly updated and additional material, contributes new insights within the longstanding traditions of the field.A particular feature is the focus on different units of analysis. Individual chapters compare places, systems, times, cultures, values, policies, curricula and other units. These chapters are contextualised within broader analytical frameworks which identify the purposes and strengths of the field. The book includes a focus on intra-national as well as cross-national comparisons, and highlights the value of approaching themes from different angles. As already demonstrated by the first edition of the book, the work will be of great value not only to producers of comparative education research but also to users who wish to understand more thoroughly the parameters and value of the field. | <p>No other book has focused as systematically on comparative education research methods</p><p>This book considers issues and challenges associated with research involving many different units of comparison: place, systems, time, cultures, etc</p><p>First edition is widely adopted as textbook in the comparative education modules in various universities internationally</p><p>First edition has already been translated into Chinese, [NAME], French, Italian, Japanese and Spanish and Russian and Turkish translations can also be anticipated in 2014</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05016-4 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Massachusetts, Boston, Boston, MA, USA; [NAME], University of Massachusetts, Boston, Boston, MA, USA; [NAME], Weizmann Institute of Science, Rehovot, Israel; [NAME], Michigan State University, East Lansing, MI, USA; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Germany; [NAME], Trinity University, San Antonio, TX, USA; Allison Scheff, University of Massachusetts, Boston, Boston, MA, USA | Teaching and Learning of Energy in K – 12 Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 314 | Hard cover | Book | X, 314 p. 55 illus., 28 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU | Energy Policy, Economics and Management | SC112000 | TH | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- A Physicist’s Musings on Teaching about Energy.- A Space Physicist’s Perspective on Energy Transformations and Implications for Teaching about Energy at All Levels.- Conservation of Energy: An Analytical Tool for Student Accounts of Carbon-Transforming Processes.- Developing Energy Conception of Students in Chemistry: Research on the Learning and Teaching of Energy.- Teaching and Learning the Physics Energy Concept.- Mapping Energy in the Boston Public Schools Curriculum.- Developing and Using Distractor-Driven Multiple-Choice Assessments Aligned to Ideas about Energy Forms, Transformation, Transfer, and Conservations.- Towards a Research-Informed Teaching Sequence for Energy.- Contextual Dimensions of the Energy Concept and Implications for Energy Teaching and Learning.- A Tale of Two Energies: What Do History, Language, and Research Tell Us about Students’ Understanding of Energy?.- Distinctive Features and Underlying Rationale of a Philosophically-Informed Approach for Energy Teaching.- Repairing Engineering Students’ Misconceptions about Energy and Thermodynamics.- Looking through the Energy Lens: A Proposed Learning Progression for Energy in Grades 3-5.- Opportunities for Reasoning about Energy within Elementary School Engineering Experiences.- The Energy Project: Constructing a Sustainable Foundation for Thinking and Learning about Energy in the 21st Century.- Launching the Space Shuttle by Making Water: The Chemists View of Energy.- Several Often-Neglected Perspectives of Energy in Chemical Education.- Energy in Chemical Systems.- Conclusion and Future Directions. | This volume presents current thoughts, research, and findings that were presented at a summit focusing on energy as a cross-cutting concept in education, involving scientists, science education researchers and science educators from across the world. The chapters cover four key questions: what should students know about energy, what can we learn from research on teaching and learning about energy, what are the challenges we are currently facing in teaching students this knowledge, and what needs be done to meet these challenges in the future?  Energy is one of the most important ideas in all of science and it is useful for predicting and explaining phenomena within every scientific discipline. The challenge for teachers is to respond to recent policies requiring them to teach not only about energy as a disciplinary idea but also about energy as an analytical framework that cuts across disciplines. Teaching energy as a crosscutting concept can equip a new generation of scientists and engineers to think about the latest cross-disciplinary problems, and it requires a new approach to the idea of energy. This book examines the latest challenges of K-12 teaching about energy, including how a comprehensive understanding of energy can be developed. The authors present innovative strategies for learning and teaching about energy, revealing overlapping and diverging views from scientists and science educators. The reader will discover investigations into the learning progression of energy, how understanding of energy can be examined, and proposals for future directions for work in this arena. Science teachers and educators, science education researchers and scientists themselves will all find the discussions and research presented in this book engaging and informative. | <p>First volume to discuss teaching energy as a cross-cutting concept across all science disciplines</p><p>Describes new techniques of how to teach energy as an interdisciplinary topic</p><p>Includes perspectives of science educators, scientists and science teachers</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-62-0 | Education | Coates | Hamish Coates, University of Melbourne, Parkville, VIC, Australia; [NAME], Indiana University, Bloomington, IN, USA | Engaging University Students | International Insights from System-Wide Studies |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 213 | Hard cover | Book | I, 213 p. 7 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Higher Education | SCO36000 | JNM | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | ​1) Student engagement as a window into undergraduate education.- 2) Refocusing the quality discourse: The United States National Survey of Student Engagement.- 3) A Canadian perspective on student engagement.- 4) Engaging university students in Australia.- 5) The New Zealand Experience.- 6) Student engagement in South Africa: A key to success, quality and development.- 7) Engaging students in China.- 8)The collaborative development and implementation of the Irish Survey of Student Engagement.- 9) Role-based insights into enhancing student engagement.- 10) Broader strategies for developing student engagement.- 11) Emerging trends and perspectives. | This book provides university teachers, leaders and policymakers with evidence on how researchers in several countries are monitoring and improving student engagement—the extent to which students are exposed to and participate in effective educational practices. It captures insights from international implementations of the National Survey of Student Engagement (NSSE), developed in the United States. In the last half decade NSSE has been adapted and used in several other countries, producing the largest international collaboration yet involving educationally relevant data on students’ engagement in higher education. Leaders of established national collaborations draw on their experiences with hundreds of institutions to contribute their insights. Framed by their cultural and educational contexts, they discuss issues concerning first-year learners, international students, part-time and distance learners, as well as teaching and leadership in support of student learning. Each chapter outlines strategies based on national case studies and presents perspectives supported by concrete examples of how these have played out in diverse settings. The book suggests mechanisms that can be used by institutions, ministries and quality agencies around the world. | <p>Insights from the most systematic national collections of educationally-focused student survey data in seven countries</p><p>Discusses diverse cross-national perspectives on learning that go beyond rankings</p><p>Case studies from seven countries written by leading experts in the field</p><p>Illustrates how survey data can inform university improvement efforts</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8794-9 | Education | Downes | [NAME], Dublin City University, Dublin, Ireland | Access to Education in Europe | A Framework and Agenda for System Change | Lifelong Learning Book Series | 21 | 1 | 2014 | 226 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 226 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Sociology of Education | SCO29000 | JN | Lifelong Learning/Adult Education | SCO42000 | JNP | Education | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.-Foreword by [NAME], President of the European Association for the Education of Adults (2008-2013).-1. Introduction: Developing a Conceptual Framework for Access to Education for Socio-Economically Marginalised Groups - A Systems Focus.-Chapter 1: Summary.- 2. System Blockages for Access to Education in Europe: Paper Commitments and Substantive Gaps.- 2.1 The European Union’s strategic priority on paper of access and lifelong learning as a means of fostering social inclusion: Falling between two stools in the ET2020 targets ? .- 2.2 Access to education for marginalised groups: A neglected focus in university rankings.- Chapter 2: Summary.- 3. [NAME] and [NAME]: [NAME] (1979;1995) to Interrogation of Blocked Systems via Structural Indicators.- 3.1Conceptual Framework: Interrogating Bronfenbrenner’s (1979; 1995) systems framework in educational, developmental and community psychology for access to education.-3.2 The need for focus on system blockage and displacement in moving from inert to inclusive systems: Key limitations to [NAME] (1979; 1995) understanding of systems.- Chapter 3: Summary.- 4. Structural Indicators for System Level Change for Access to Education for Marginalised Groups.- 4.1 An agenda of structural indicators for system level change for access to education for marginalised groups at international, national and institutional levels.- 4.2 Key interpretative principles underpinning a systemic review of structural indicators for access to education derived by analogy from international rights discourse.- 4.3 Structural indicators: A key strategic gap in the OECD (Organisation for Economic Cooperation and Development) international education indicators.-Chapter 4: Summary.- 5. Access to Higher Education for Socio-Economically Marginalized Groups: Indicators at Macro-Exo levels.- 5.1 A central driving committee at State level for access to higher education and lifelong learning for marginalised groups (Structural Indicator) – including clear funding sources.- 5.2 Clarification of the criteria to ascertain socio-economic exclusion (Structural Indicator) given the observed tendency, especially in Central and Eastern European countries, for targeting to occur for more easily identifiable target groups like those with a disability or from an ethnic minority – in contrast with groups experiencing socio-economic exclusion.- Chapter 5: Summary.- 6. Access to Higher Education for Socio-Economically Marginalized Groups: Indicators at Macro-Exo levels.- 6.1 The need for a formal obligation on institutions from the State to improve access and for incentives for third level institutions such as differentiated funding from the State based on implementation of access goals (Structural Indicator).- 6.2 State-led incentives to different faculties and departments within third level institutions to increase access: A faculty and department level focus to increase access (Structural Indicator).- 6.3 An access strategy for the so-called ‘elite’ universities (Structural Indicator).- 6.4 Representation of target groups, including ethnic minorities in the decision making structures and processes at national level regarding access to education  (Structural Indicator).- 6.5 A system of reserved places or equivalent approach to increase participation of underrepresented groups at third level (Structural Indicator).- 6.6 A coherent support strategy for access to third level education for orphans and young people in care (Structural Indicator).- Chapter 6: Summary.- 7.Access to Higher Education for Socio-Economically Marginalized Groups: Indicators at Micro-Meso levels.- 7.1 Education institutional strategies for access for groups experiencing socio-economic exclusion (Structural Indicator).- 7.2 Development of outreach institutional strategies that go beyond mere | This book identifies key elements of an international framework to develop systems-level change to promote access to education, including higher education, for socio-economically marginalized groups. It is based on interviews with senior government officials and senior management in universities, non formal education and prisons across 12 countries in Europe. The book identifies systemic obstacles to and opportunities for promotion of access to education for socio-economically excluded groups that are issues transferable to other countries’ contexts. It adopts a systemic focus on access across a range of domains of education, both formal higher education and non-formal education, as well as prison education. Through a focus on a more dynamic structuralist systems framework it develops an innovative post-Bronfenbrennerian view of system levels in lifespan developmental and educational psychology. It also develops an international agenda for reform in relation to these various system levels for access to education for socio-economically marginalized groups, through extraction of key structural indicators to evaluate reform progress in a transparent, culturally sensitive manner. The book identifies current gaps and strengths in policy, practice and structures that impact upon access to education, including higher education, across a range of countries. These gaps and strengths are illustrative and are to inform a strategic approach to system level change and development for the promotion of access to education for socio-economically marginalized groups in Europe and beyond.“Too many educational practices entrench social exclusion: it is an urgent priority across Europe that social justice policies are implemented for the inclusion of marginalised groups. [NAME] analysis of these issues is timely. His conclusions are considered and practical: this book is a valuable and constructive resource for practitioners, academics and the policy community.” Professor [NAME], [NAME] ad Personam Professor of Citizenship Education in Europe, Emeritus Professor of Education, Institute for Policy Studies in Education, London Metropolitan University | <p>Provides an innovative theoretical development of systems theory to go beyond [NAME] (1979) systems approach in developmental psychology</p><p>Based on a broad cross-national framework of 12 European countries, involving Western, Central and Eastern European countries</p><p>Offers an important step in progression towards a UN rights based approach to implementation of access to education</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02599-5 | Education | Duval | [NAME], KU Leuven, Leuven, Belgium; [NAME], The Open University Inst of Educational Tech, [NAME], UK; [NAME], University of Bristol School of Education, Bristol, UK | Technology Enhanced Learning | A Compendium of Research Literature |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 100 p. 8 illus. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 86.5 | 127.5 | English | Education | Educational Technology | SCO21000 | YQT |  |  |  | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-06-01 00:00:00 |  |  | General [NAME] to the Reader.- Theories of TEL.- Mobile Learning.- Learning Analytics and Educational Data Mining.- Learning Design.- Self-Regulated Learning.- Adaptive Educational Hypermedia, Intelligent Tutoring Systems and AI in Education.- Computer Supported Collaborative Learning.- Mass Collaboration and Social Software in TEL.- Open Educational Resources.- Technical Learning Infrastructure, Inoperability, Technical TEL Standards.- Networked Learning.- Assessment for Learning.- Design and Evaluation Methods for TEL.- Virtual Worlds for Learning.- Micro world and Constructionist Approaches.- Social Justice/Digital Divide.- Tabletops and Novel Interaction Design for TEL.- Representations, Psychology and Cognition. | This book provides an overview of the state-of-the-art in Technology Enhanced Learning (TEL). It is organized as a collection of 21 clusters or research themes, each introduced by leading experts and including references to the most relevant literature on the theme of each cluster. Additionally, four seminal papers on each theme are included with expert commentaries and updates. This volume is of high value to the TEL community, a large and active group of multidisciplinary researchers, to contextualize the field and define it as a distinct research area. | <p>State‐of‐the‐art in Technology-Enhanced Learning (TEL) as reported by the STELLAR Network of Excellence</p><p>Introductions by international leaders in the field of TEL</p><p>The field of TEL is divided into relevant research themes, each introduced by renowned experts in the field</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02501-8 | Education | Ellerton | [NAME], Illinois State University, Normal, IL, USA; M.A. (Ken) Clements, Illinois State University, Normal, IL, USA | [NAME] Cyphering Book and Ten other Extraordinary Cyphering Books |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 370 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 370 p. 152 illus., 122 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | Sociology of Education | SCO29000 | JN | Education | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1.Cyphering Books and the Cyphering Tradition in North America and Great Britain, 1630–18.- 2.Primitive Beginnings, Circa 1667.- 3.“Thomas Prust His Booke Amen 1702”.- 4.Daughters of the Revolution: [NAME] and [NAME] Cyphering Book, Circa 1780.- 5.With a Tinge of Green: [NAME], 1820.- 6.He would be Good: [NAME] Early Mathematics, 1819–1826 (This chapter was authored by Nerida Ellerton, [NAME], and [NAME] ([NAME]: [NAME] Cyphering Book, 1630–1632.- 8.Writing as if [NAME]: [NAME] Cyphering Book, Circa 1740.- 9.Bound for Botany Bay? Circa 1791.- 10.From the Royal Mathematical School: [NAME], 1825.- 11.Fit for a King? [NAME], Circa 1810 and 1835–1836.- 12.Lessons from Extraordinary Cyphering Books.- References.- Index. | This well-illustrated book provides strong qualitative and comparative support for the main arguments developed by Nerida Ellerton and [NAME] in their groundbreaking Rewriting this History of School Mathematics in North America 1607–1861: The Central Role of Cyphering Books. Eleven extraordinary handwritten school mathematics manuscripts are carefully analyzed—six were prepared entirely in Great Britain, four entirely in North America, and 1 partly in Great Britain and partly in North America. The earliest of the 11 cyphering books was prepared around 1630, and the latest in 1835. Seven of the manuscripts were arithmetic cyphering books; three were navigation cyphering books, and one was a mensuration/surveying manuscript.One of the cyphering books examined in this book was prepared, over the period 1819–1826, by a young [NAME], when he was attending small one-teacher schools in remote Spencer County, Indiana. Chapter 6 in this book provides the first detailed analysis of young [NAME]’s cyphering book—which is easily the oldest surviving Lincoln manuscript. Another cyphering book, this one prepared by [NAME] in 1835, could have been prepared as a special gift for the King of England. The analyses make clear the extent of the control which the cyphering tradition had over school mathematics in North America and Great Britain between 1630 and 1840.In their final chapter [NAME] and Clements identify six lessons from their research into the cyphering tradition which relate to present-day circumstances surrounding school mathematics. These lessons are concerned with sharp differences between intended, implemented and attained curricula, the remarkable value that many students placed upon their cyphering books, the ethnomathematical circumstances which surrounded the preparations of the extraordinary cyphering books, and qualitative differences between British and North American school mathematics. | <p>High quality illustrations combine with extensive interpretive text</p><p>The discovery of a "missing" page from [NAME] cyphering book is announced and detailed</p><p>Entirely Unique Content---no book like this has ever been published </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04689-1 | Education | Finnigan | [NAME], University of Rochester, Rochester, NY, USA; [NAME], University of California, La Jolla, CA, USA | Using Research Evidence in Education | From the Schoolhouse Door to Capitol Hill | Policy Implications of Research in Education | 2 | 1 | 2014 | 208 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 208 p. 8 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Administration, Organization and Leadership | SCO17000 | JNK | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.  [NAME] 1.  Beginning the Journey: Research Evidence from the Schoolhouse Door to Capitol Hill:  [NAME] Finnigan.- SECTION I – Using Research Evidence at the School and District Level.- Chapter 2. Introduction to Section I: Using Research Evidence at the School and District Level: Bill Penuel & Cynthia Coburn.- Chapter 3.  The Critical Role of Brokers in the Access and Use of Evidence at the School and District Level:  [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], & Jing Che.- Chapter 4.  Leaders’ Use of Research for Fundamental Change in School District Central Offices:  Processes and [NAME]:  [NAME], [NAME] with [NAME]  Chapter 5. The Research on Education, Deliberation, and Decision-Making (REDD) Project: Rob Asen & Deb Gurke.- Chapter 6. The Intermediary function in evidence production, promotion, and utilization:  The case of educational incentives:  [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], & Huriya Jabbar.- SECTION II – Using Research Evidence at the State and Federal Level .- Chapter 7. Introduction to Section II:  Using Research Evidence at State and Federal Level:  Elliot Weinbaum.-  Chapter 8. How State Education Agencies Acquire and Use Research Knowledge for School Improvement: [NAME], [NAME], & Diane Massell.- Chapter 9. Research Evidence and the Common Core Standards:  Lorraine McDonnell & M. Stephen Weatherford.- Chapter 10.  [NAME]:  Using Evidence to Fight the Nation’s Social Problems:  Ron Haskins & Greg Margolis.- SECTION III:  Defining, Acquiring, and Using Research Evidence – Looking Across and Beyond.- Chapter 11.  Building the Infrastructure to Improve the Use and Usefulness of Research in Education:  Vivian Tseng & Sandra Nutley.- Chapter 12:  Conclusion:  Research Evidence from the Schoolhouse Door to Capitol Hill:  [NAME] [NAME]. | This book includes a set of rigorous and accessible studies on the topic of “research evidence” from a variety of levels and educational vantage points. It also provides the reader with thoughtful commentaries from leading thinkers in the field. The complex process of acquiring, interpreting, and using research evidence makes for a rich and under examined area in educational research, practice and policymaking. Policy makers, practitioners and scholars are in need of additional knowledge and practical steps in terms of the uptake of evidence into practice. In addition, sharpening understanding in terms of the ways in which research evidence is shaped or adapted at different educational levels (school, district, state, federal) as well the factors that support or constrain the acquisition and use of research evidence is of immediate use. While professional support for evidence-based practice in schools has never been stronger, credible research has found only weak large-scale effects. This book provides us with key insights about the nature of this problem and a comprehensive approach to its solution; it is a major step toward realizing the considerable potential for school improvement of reciprocal working relationships among policy, practice and research communities.  [NAME], Emeritus Professor, OISE/University of TorontoThe problem of scant research use at school sites is old, but the federal to classroom level scope of this book is unique. The authors' analysis of the current status leads to despair, but they provide a clear and compelling path forward. [NAME], Professor [NAME], Stanford University; President, California State Board of Education.We have come a long way since the linear 'Research, Dissemination, Utilization' models of knowledge use of  the 1970s and 80s.  Each chapter in this book lays out new directions for understanding how individuals, relationships and systems advance or impede the movement of new ideas into policy/practice. Taken together, they redefine knowledge use as a dynamic process that affects and is affected by specific characteristics of the social structures in which is occurs.  It is a 'must read' both for those interested in educational change and organizational theory. [NAME] Louis, Regents Professor, University of Minnesota | <p>Illustrates how 'evidence' is defined, acquired and used across various levels of educational systems</p><p>Provides practical insight for the uptake of evidence into practice</p><p>Unique scope that reaches from school to district to federal government</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8693-5 | Education | Halttunen | [NAME], University of Turku, Turun Yliopisto, Finland; [NAME], University of Turku, Turun Yliopisto, Finland; [NAME], Griffith University, Brisbane, QLD, Australia | Promoting, Assessing, Recognizing and Certifying Lifelong Learning | International Perspectives and Practices | Lifelong Learning Book Series | 20 | 1 | 2014 | 302 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 302 p. 4 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Lifelong Learning/Adult Education | SCO42000 | JNP | Professional & Vocational Education | [NAME] | JNRV | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Acknowledgements.- Section 1: Promoting and recognising lifelong learning: Key concepts, practices and emerging and perennial problems.- Chapter 1: Promoting and recognising lifelong learning: Introduction; [NAME] and [NAME] (University of Turku, Finland), and [NAME] (Griffith University, Australia).- Chapter 2 : Conceptualising lifelong learning and its recognition in contemporary times; [NAME] (Griffith University, Australia.- Chapter 3: New skills for new jobs: Work agency as a necessary condition for successful lifelong learning; [NAME] and [NAME] (University of Paderborn, Germany).- Section 2: Promoting lifelong learning for economic, social and cultural purposes.- Chapter 4: Evaluating informal learning in the workplace; [NAME] (The University of Georgia, USA), [NAME] (Columbia University, USA) and [NAME] (Autonomous University of Barcelona, Spain).- Chapter 5: Recognising learning and development in the transaction of personal work practices; [NAME] (Griffith University, Australia).- Chapter 6: Understanding work-related learning: The role of job characteristics and the use of different sources of learning; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Bossche (University of Antwerp, Belgium), and Ingrid Ilsbroux and Eva Sammels (University of Leuven, Belgium).- Chapter 7: Experiential learning: A new higher education requiring new pedagogic skills; [NAME] (University of London, UK).- Chapter 8: How expertise is created in emerging professional fields: [NAME] and [NAME] (University of Turku, Finland), and [NAME] (Open Universiteit in the Netherlands).- Chapter 9: Continuing education and training at work; Sarojni Choy, [NAME] and [NAME] (Griffith University, Australia).- Chapter 10: Lifelong learning policies and practices in Singapore: Tensions and challenges; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] (Institute for Adult Learning, Singapore).- Section 3: Recognising and certifying lifelong learning: Policies and practices.- Chapter 11: Professionalisation of supervisors and RPL; [NAME] and [NAME] (University of Turku, Finland).- Chapter 12: Securing assessors’ professionalism: Meeting assessor requirements for the purpose of performing high-quality (RPL) assessments; [NAME] (Amsterdam University of Applied Sciences, the Netherlands).- Chapter 13: Problems and possibilities in recognition of prior learning: A critical social theory perspective; [NAME] (Linköping University, Sweden).- Chapter 14: Changing RPL & HRD discourses: practitioner perspectives; [NAME] (Dublin Institute of Technology, Ireland), [NAME] (Letterkenny Institute of Technology, Ireland), and [NAME] (University [NAME], Ireland).- Chapter 15: French approaches to Accreditation of Prior Learning: practices and research; Vanessa Remery (University of Geneva, Switzerland) and [NAME] (Conservatoire national des arts et métiers, CNAM, France).- Chapter 16: Recognising and certifying workers’ knowledge: Policies, frameworks and practices in prospect: Perspectives from two countries; [NAME] (Griffith University, Australia) and [NAME] and [NAME] (Institute for Adult Learning, Singapore).- Index. | This book offers an international perspective on the growing interest worldwide in lifelong learning, particularly as it relates to learning beyond compulsory education and initial occupational preparation: across working life. Much of this interest is driven by key social and economic imperatives associated with the changing requirements of work and working life, the transformation of many occupations and lengthening working lives. The concerns in lifelong learning are also associated with individuals being able to engage in learning about cultural and social topics and practices that they had not so far. It is important to understand how this learning can be assessed, recognized and certified. Many in workforces across the world learn much of the knowledge that is required to maintain their employability through that work. Yet, that learning and that competency remains without recognition and certification while this could be particularly helpful for individuals seeking to sustain their employability or to extend their work into new occupations or workplaces. The first section of this book sets out the overall project and outlines the key concepts and issues. It illustrates why there is a need for promoting and recognizing lifelong learning and explains some of the terminology, concepts and key considerations. The second section informs about a range of policies and practices that are currently being deployed or have been deployed across a range of countries within Europe, Scandinavia and Asia. The last section comprises of contributions emphasizing the ways in which the assessment of workers learning takes place in different occupational contexts and different cultural contexts. The final chapter outlines how a systemic approach to recognizing lifelong learning might progress for a country which is promoting a continuing education and training system largely outside of tertiary education institutions. | <p>Contributes to the unexplored area of recognition of prior learning in higher education institutions<br>Presents a genuinely international perspective on modernization of higher education by researchers, developers and practitioners<br>Builds links to educational policies such as training university graduates with the 21st Century attributes and increasing the working life relevance of higher education</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8837-3 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], Charles Sturt University, Bathurst, NSW, Australia; [NAME], Charles Sturt University, Bathurst, NSW, Australia | Lived Spaces of Infant-Toddler Education and Care | Exploring Diverse Perspectives on Theory, Research and Practice | International perspectives on early childhood education and development | 11 | 1 | 2014 | 284 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 284 p. 12 illus., 4 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Childhood Education | SCO37000 | [NAME] | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Prologue: Campus-Toddlers: Observations and Reflections from a 'Window Ethnographer'.- 1. Introduction: Exploring Lived Spaces of Infant-Toddler Education and Care.- 2. Lived Spaces in a Toddler Group: Application of Lefebvre’s Spatial Triad.- 3. Making This My Space: Infants’ and Toddlers’ Use of Resources to Make a Day Care Setting Their Own.- 4. Babies in Space.- 5. Spending Time with Others: a Time-Use Diary for Infant-Toddler Child Care.- 6. The Birthday Cake: Social Relations and Professional Practices around Mealtimes with Toddlers in Child Care.- 7. Play spaces: Educators, Parents and Toddlers.- 8. Facilitating Intimate and Thoughtful Attention to Infants and Toddlers in Nursery.- 9. Developing 'Professional Love' in Early Childhood Settings.- 10. Observing Infants’ and Toddlers’ Relationships and Interactions in Group Care.- 11. Guided Participation and Communication Practices in Multilingual Toddler Groups.- 12. Infant Signs Reveal Infant Minds to Early Childhood Professionals.- 13. What Infants Talk About: Comparing Parents' and Educators' Insights.- 14. Expressing, Interpreting and Exchanging Perspectives during Infant-Toddler Social Interactions: The Significance of Acting with Others in Mind.- 15. Infants Initiating Encounters with Peers in Group Care Environments.- 16. A [NAME] in Early Childhood Education: Chronotopic Encounters with People, Places and Things.- 17. Lived Spaces of Infant-Toddler Education and Care: Implications for Policy?.- Appendix. | This book conceptualizes the ‘lived spaces’ of infant and toddler early education and care settings by bringing together international authors researching within diverse theoretical frameworks. It highlights diverse ways of understanding the experiences of very young children by exposing the ways that the authors are grappling with the unknown. The work explores broadly the construct and meanings of ‘lived spaces’ as relational spaces, interactional spaces, transitional spaces, curriculum spaces or pedagogical spaces operating within the social, physical and temporal environment of infant-toddler education settings. The book invites interchange between and among diverse theories and approaches and through this build new understanding of infants’ and toddlers’ experiences and interactions in early education and care settings. It also considers the implications of this work for policy and practice in infant and toddler education and care. | <p>Conceptualizes the “lived spaces” of infant and toddler early education and care settings   </p><p>Highlights diverse ways of understanding the experiences of very young children    </p><p>Considers implications for policy and practice in infant and toddler education and care   </p><p>Presents cutting edge thinking and research in the field of infant and toddler early education and care settings</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8850-2 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], Griffith University, South Brisbane, QLD, Australia; [NAME], Griffith University, South Brisbane, QLD, Australia | Teaching Singing in the 21st Century |  | Landscapes: the Arts, Aesthetics, and Education | 14 | 1 | 2014 | 425 | Hard cover | Book | X, 425 p. 116 illus., 16 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Education | Arts Education | SCO11000 | JNU | Performing Arts | SCV33000 | AS | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Prelude: Positioning Singing Pedagogy in the 21st Century.- PART I: OVERVIEW 2. Singing Pedagogy in the 21st Century: A Look Toward the Future.- 3. Habits of the Mind, Hand and Heart: Approaches to Classical Singing Training.- 4. Teaching Popular Music Styles.- 5. A Brief Overview of Approaches to Teaching the Music Theatre Song.- PART II: SINGING, THE BODY AND THE MIND 6. Vocal Health and Singing Pedagogy: Considerations from Biology and Motor Learning.- 7. The Role of the Speech and Language Therapist - Speech Pathologist - in the Modern Singing Studio.- 8. The Extra-Normal Voice: EVT in Singing.- 9. Registers Defined through Visual Feedback.- 10. [NAME]: Enhancing Voice Performance through Somatic Pedagogy.- 11. Vocal Pedagogy and the Feldenkrais Method.- 12. Perception, Evaluation and Communication of Singing Voices.- 13. The Teacher-Student Relationship in One-to-one Singing Lessons: An Investigation of Personality and [NAME] Attachment.- 14. Negotiating an ‘Opera Singer Identity'.- PART III: APPROACHES TO STYLE 15. Style and Ornamentation in Classical and Bel Canto Arias.- 16. Handel and the Voice Practitioner: Perspectives on Performance Practice and Higher Education Pedagogy.- 17. Contemporary Vocal Artistry in Popular Culture Musics: Perceptions, Observations and Lived Experiences.- 18. Pathways for Teaching Vocal Jazz Improvisation.- 19. Voice in Worship: The Contemporary Worship Singer.- 20. Take my Hand: Teaching the Gospel Singer in the Applied Voice Studio.- PART IV: THE TRAINING GROUND 21. The Conservatorium Environment: Reflections on the Tertiary Vocal Setting Past and Present.- 22. More Than Just Style: A Profile of Professional Contemporary Gig Singers.- 23. Developing a Tertiary Course in Music Theatre.- 24. Training the [NAME] Researcher.- POSTLUDE 25. The Future of Singing Pedagogy. | This volume brings together a group of leading international researchers and practitioners in voice pedagogy alongside emerging academics and practitioners. Encompassing research across voice science and pedagogy, this innovative collection transcends genre boundaries and provides new knowledge about vocal styles and approaches from classical and musical theatre to contemporary commercial music. The work is sure to be valuable in tertiary institutions, schools and community music associations, suitable for use by private studio teachers, and will appeal to choral leaders and music educators interested in vocal pedagogy. “I thoroughly enjoyed reading this book and I am confident it will help bring all aspects of vocal pedagogy firmly into the 21st century.  Refreshingly, many different areas of pedagogy are included in the text so we can all work together to more fully understand the singing voice.  Up to the moment research is included along with an exploration of the evolving contemporary styles of singing.  Further, areas regarding teaching and curriculum in higher education are also reviewed.  All in all, this text a crucial addition to a professional's vocal library.” [NAME], Teachers College, Columbia University, USA. | <p>Offers multiple perspectives on vocal pedagogy across music genres</p><p>Relevant, international, up to date information about the latest research in voice science and pedagogy</p><p>Gathers together the most recent relevant work by leading researchers and practitioners in the field</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-658-03671-3 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], Middle Tennessee State University, , USA | Prospective Mathematics Teachers’ Knowledge of Algebra | A Comparative Study in China and the United States of America | Perspektiven der Mathematikdidaktik |  | 1 | 2014 | 179 | Soft cover | Book | XXII, 179 p. 23 illus. | 0 | final | 65.41 | 65.41 | 69.99 | 71.95 | 58.99 | 87.5 | English | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Education | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Knowledge Needed for Teaching.- Mathematics Teacher Education in China and the U.S.A.-Instrumentation, Data Collection, and Data Analysis.- Comparison of Knowledge of Algebra for Teaching (KAT) between China and the U.S.A.- Relationship among Different.- Components of KAT.- Comparison of KTCF between China and the U.S.A.​ | [NAME] examines teachers’ knowledge of algebra for teaching, with a particular focus on teaching the concept of function and quadratic relations in China and the United States. 376 Chinese and 115 U.S.A. prospective middle and high school mathematics teachers participated in this survey. Based on an extensive quantitative and qualitative data analysis the author comes to the following conclusions: The Chinese participants demonstrate a stronger knowledge of algebra for teaching and the Chinese participants’ structure of knowledge of algebra for teaching is much more interconnected. Chinese participants show flexibility in choosing appropriate perspectives of the function concept and in selecting multiple representations. Finally, the number of college mathematics and mathematics education courses taken impacts the teachers’ knowledge of algebra for teaching. | Publication in the field of natural sciences | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02398-4 | Education | Kroop | [NAME], ZSI Vienna Centre for Social  Innovation, Vienna, Austria; [NAME], Open University UK-UKOU, [NAME], UK; [NAME], Fraunhofer Institute for Applied Informa, Sankt Augustin, Germany | Responsive Open Learning Environments | Outcomes of Research from the ROLE Project |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. 50 illus., 25 illus. in color. | 0 | approx. | 134.99 | 134.99 | 144.44 | 148.49 | 120.5 | 177.5 | English | Education | Educational Technology | SCO21000 | YQT |  |  |  | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ROLE Visions and Concepts.- Psycho-pedagogical [NAME] and Models for Personalised Self-directed Learning.- ROLE Requirement Analyses: Methods and Findings.- ROLE Interoperability framework.- ROLE Services and Showcase Platform on Learning Scenarios and Prototypes.- ROLE [NAME], [NAME]-based Widgets and Enabler Spaces.- ROLE Concepts, Challenges and Community Building to Increase the Number of High Quality Learning Widgets.- ROLE Test-beds Evaluations.- Business Cases and Future Use Case Partners.- Main ROLE Outcomes for Further Discussion, Research and Development. | This book presents the outcomes of four years of educational research in the EU-supported project called ROLE (Responsive Online Learning Environments). Authors of the book are researchers, developers and teachers who have worked in the ROLE project and belong to the ROLE partner consortium consisting of 16 internationally renowned research institutions, including those from 6 EU countries and China. ROLE technology is centered around the concept of self-regulated learning that creates responsible learners, capable of critical thinking and able to plan their own learning processes, independently search for appropriate learning resources and then reflect on their learning process and progress. To accomplish this, ROLE´s main objective is to support the development of open personal learning environments (PLE's). ROLE provides a framework consisting of “[NAME] spaces” on the one hand and tools, content, and services on the other. Utilizing this framework, learners are invited to create their own controlled and preferred learning environments able to trigger and motivate self-regulated learning. Numerous practical tutorials are included to guide the reader in creating innovative and useful learning widgets and best practices for the development of PLE's are presented and fully discussed. | <p>Reports on results of four year EU funded research project, ROLE</p><p>Delivers best practices on how to develop and use PLEs</p><p>Provides tutorials on creating innovative learning widgets</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4614-3304-0 | Education | Larusson | [NAME], Brandeis University, Waltham, MA, USA; [NAME], University of California Berkeley, Berkeley, CA, USA | Learning Analytics | From Research to Practice | Computer-Supported Collaborative Learning Series | 13 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 175 p. 25 illus. in color. | 0 | approx. | 139.95 | 139.95 | 149.75 | 153.94 | 126.5 | 186.5 | English | Education | Educational Technology | SCO21000 | YQT | Computers and Education | SCI24032 | JNV | Education | Handbook | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Designing Learning Analytics Experiences.- Harnessing the Currents of the Digital Ocean.- Educational Data Mining and Learning Analytics.- Analytics through an Institutional Lens: Definition, Theory, Design and Impact.- A Learning Management System-Based Early Warning System for Academic Advising in Undergraduate Engineering.- The Data-Assisted Approach to Building Intelligent Technology Enhanced Learning Environments.- Identifying Points for Pedagogical Intervention Based on Student Writing: Two Case Studies for the 'Point of Originality'. | In education today, technology alone doesn't always lead to immediate success for students or institutions. In order to gauge the efficacy of educational technology, we need ways to measure the efficacy of educational practices in their own right. Through a better understanding of how learning takes place, we may work toward establishing best practices for students, educators, and institutions. These goals can be accomplished with learning analytics.Learning Analytics: From Research to Practice updates this emerging field with the latest in theories, findings, strategies, and tools from across education and technological disciplines. Guiding readers through preparation, design, and examples of implementation, this pioneering reference clarifies LA methods as not mere data collection but sophisticated, systems-based analysis with practical applicability inside the classroom and in the larger world.Case studies illustrate applications of LA throughout academic settings (e.g., intervention, advisement, technology design), and their resulting impact on pedagogy and learning. The goal is to bring greater efficiency and deeper engagement to individual students, learning communities, and educators, as chapters show diverse uses of learning analytics to:Enhance student and faculty performance.Improve student understanding of course material.Assess and attend to the needs of struggling learners.Improve accuracy in grading.Allow instructors to assess and develop their own strengths.Encourage more efficient use of resources at the institutional level.Researchers and practitioners in educational technology, IT, and the learning sciences will hail the information in Learning Analytics: From Research to Practice as a springboard to new levels of student, instructor, and institutional success. | <p>Consolidates current Learning Analytics research into one volume</p><p>Includes numerous examples of Learning Analytics implementations</p><p>Provides strategies for integrating Learning Analytics at the classroom, departmental, and institutional level</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8865-6 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME] [NAME], Hong Kong Institute of Education, Hong Kong, Hong Kong SAR; [NAME], Seattle University, Seattle, WA, USA | Schooling for Sustainable Development Across the Pacific |  | Schooling for Sustainable Development | 5 | 1 | 2014 | 320 | Hard cover | Book | X, 320 p. 20 illus., 11 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Sustainable Development | SCU34000 | RNU | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Series Editors’ Introduction; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Stimpson.- PART I: BROAD THEMES AND ISSUES.- Chapter 1: Introduction: Schooling and Education for Sustainable Development (ESD) across the Pacific; [NAME] and [NAME] 2: It’s not that [NAME]: Engaging the Politics of Culture and Identity within Environmental Education/Education for Sustainable Development (EE/ESD); [NAME] and [NAME] 3: Researching Teachers' Thinking about Education for Sustainable Development; [NAME] and [NAME] Maclean.- Chapter 4: Excellence in Environmental Education for [NAME] and [NAME] in the United States; [NAME] Simmons.- PART II: CASE STUDIES / COUNTRY EXPERIENCES.- Chapter 5: Education for Sustainable Development (ESD) in Chinese Schools: Rural-Urban Difference and Regional Variation in East and West China; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 6: ESD Projects in Japanese Schools and in Non-Formal Education in Japan; Osamu Abe.- Chapter 7: The Development of Environmental Education Policy and Programs in Korea: Promoting Sustainable Development in School Environmental Education; Hye-Eun Chu and Yeon-A Son.- Chapter 8: The Environment, Sustainability and Universities in Indonesia: An Examination of the Nexus; [NAME] and Eko Agus Suyono.- Chapter 9: “Green Universities” in China: Concepts and Actions; [NAME] and [NAME] Lee.- Chapter 10: The Sustainable Development of Indigenous Peoples’ Education in Taiwan; [NAME], [NAME] and Wen-Hui Lin.- Chapter 11: ESD Projects, Initiatives and Research in Hong Kong and Mainland China; [NAME] and [NAME] 12: Education for Sustainable Development in Macao Secondary Schools: Issues and [NAME]; [NAME] and [NAME] Lee.- Chapter 13: Programmatic Implementation of Environmental Education in an Elementary Educator Preparation Program: A Case Study; [NAME], Blanche Desjean-Perrotta and [NAME] Crim.- Chapter 14: Making the Transition to Sustainability: Marshaling the Contributions of the Many; Gregory Smith.- Chapter 15: Closing the Green Gap: Policy and Practice in Chinese Environmental Education; [NAME]. | Environmental education (EE) and education for sustainable development (ESD) are asserting their growing role in curricula around the world, yet how deeply embedded are they in the learning systems of the Pacific nations? Building on an earlier analysis in China and Taiwan, this volume expands its purview to examine the quality and extent of environmental and sustainable development education in a number of countries in the Asia-Pacific region, including China itself, Taiwan, South Korea, Japan and Indonesia. As well as offering detailed national analyses provided by Asian-Pacific academics and professionals, this work includes examples in the US and Canada and an introduction that assesses the contrasting challenges and positive commonalities among diverse education systems.The chapters reflect leading-edge practice, innovation, and depth of experience and at the same time as detailing locally relevant and culturally appropriate strategies they also provide clear models and strategies for expanding the application and influence of education for sustainable development elsewhere. In doing so, they mirror the global nature of environmental issues as well as the local nature of the solutions. | <p>Presents an overview of Environmental education (EE) and education for sustainable development (ESD) in the Asia-Pacific Region </p><p>Presents different approaches to and levels of the formal and non-formal EE/ESD initiatives</p><p>Includes examples on established EE/ESD practices in selected Asia-Pacific areas</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-4977-1 | Education | Lerman | [NAME], South Bank University Centre for Mathematics Education, London, UK | Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 700 | Hard cover | Book | 700 p. In 2 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 399 | 399 | 426.93 | 438.9 | 359.5 | 531.5 | English | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | International and Comparative Education | SCO13000 | JN | Education | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-06-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Ability Grouping in Mathematics Classrooms.- Abstraction in Mathematics Education.- Actions, Processes, Projects, [NAME] (APOS) in Mathematics Education.- Activity Theory in Mathematics Education.- Adults Learning Mathematics.- Affect in Mathematics Education.- Algebra Teaching and Learning.- Algorithmics.- Algorithms.- Anthropological Approaches in Mathematics Education, French Perspective.- Argumentation in Mathematics.- Argumentation in Mathematics Education.- Assessment Frameworks in Mathematics Education.- Assessment of Mathematics Teacher Knowledge.- Authority in Mathematics Education.- Autism, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Behaviorism in Mathematics Education.- Bilingual and Multilingual Issues in Mathematics Education.- Blind Children, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Bloom's Taxonomy in Mathematics Education.- Calculus Teaching and Learning.- Cognitive Acceleration in Mathematics Education.- Collaborative Learning in Mathematics Education.- Communities of Inquiry in Mathematics Teacher Education.- Communities of Practice in Mathematics Education.- Communities of Practice in Mathematics Teacher Education.- Competency Frameworks in Mathematics Education.- Complexity in Mathematics Education.- Concept Development in Mathematics Education.- Concept Maps in Mathematics Education.- Constructivism and Radical Constructivism in Mathematics Education.- Constructivist Teaching Experiment Creativity in Mathematics Education.- Critical Mathematics.- Critical Thinking in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Anthropological Approaches in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Diversity in Mathematics Education.- Cultural influences in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Traditions of Mathematics Teaching.- Curricular Resources and Textbooks.- Data Handling and Statistics Teaching and Learning.- [NAME], Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Deductive Reasoning in Mathematics Education.- Design research in mathematics education.- [NAME] teaching and learning in mathematics education.- Didactic Contract in Mathematics Education.- Didactic engineering in mathematics education.- Didactic Situations in Mathematics Education.- Didactic Transposition in Mathematics Education.- Didactical Phenomenology (Freudenthal).- Discourse Analytic Approaches in Mathematics Education.- Discrete Mathematics Teaching and Learning.- Discursive Approaches to Learning Mathematics.- Down Syndrome, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Dyscalculia.- Early Algebra Teaching and Learning.- Early Childhood Mathematics Education.- Education of Mathematics Teacher Educators.- Elkonin and Davydov Curriculum in Mathematics Education.- Embodied Cognition.- Enactivist Theories.- Epistemological Obstacles in Mathematics Education.- Equity and Access in Mathematics Education.- Ethnicity and Race in Mathematics Education.- Ethno-mathematics.- External Assessment in Mathematics Education.- Fieldwork/ practicum in mathematics education.- Frameworks for Conceptualizing Mathematics Teacher Knowledge.- Gender in Mathematics Education.- Giftedness and high ability in mathematics.- Goals of Mathematics Education.- Heuristics in Mathematics Education.- Historical Overview of Mathematics Teaching Materials.- History of Mathematics and Education.- History of Mathematics Teaching and Learning.- History of Research in Mathematics Education.- Hypothetical Learning Trajectories in Mathematics Education.- Immigrant Students in Mathematics Education.- Immigrant Teachers in Mathematics Education.- Inclusive Mathematics Classrooms.- Indigenous Students in Mathematics Education.- Informal Learning in Mathematics Education.- Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Affordances in Mathematics Education.- Inquiry Based Mathematics Education.- Instrumental and Relational Understanding in Mathematics Education.- Instrumentation in Mathematics Education.- Interactionis | The Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education is a comprehensive reference text, covering every topic in the field with entries ranging from short descriptions to much longer pieces where the topic warrants more elaboration. The entries provide access to theories and to research in the area and refer to the leading publications for further reading. Links will also be made to particular texts in Springer journals and e-books through SpringerReference.com. The [NAME] is aimed at graduate students, researchers, curriculum developers, policy makers, and others with interests in the field of mathematics education. It is planned to be 700 pages in length in its hard copy form but the text will subsequently be up-dated and developed on-line in a way that retains the integrity of the ideas, the responsibility for which will be in the hands of the Editor-in-Chief and the Editorial Board.Editorial Board:Michele ArtigueRuhama EvenMelony GravenEva JablonkaRobyn JorgensenYoshinori ShimizuBharath Sriraman | <p>Provides comprehensive access to theories and to research in the mathematics education field</p><p>Over 500 contributions from leading researchers from around the globe</p><p>Provides a comprehensive reference text, covering the range of methodologies, perspectives, foci and cultures of this field of inquiry</p><p>Ongoing updates of research and new developments in the online version of the encyclopedia </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-4979-5 | Education | Lerman | [NAME], South Bank University Centre for Mathematics Education, London, UK | Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 700 | Hard cover | Book + Online Access | 700 p. Print + eReference. In 2 volumes, not available separately. | 1 | final | 499 | 499 | 533.93 | 548.9 | 449.5 | 664.5 | English | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | International and Comparative Education | SCO13000 | JN | Education | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-06-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Ability Grouping in Mathematics Classrooms.- Abstraction in Mathematics Education.- Actions, Processes, Projects, [NAME] (APOS) in Mathematics Education.- Activity Theory in Mathematics Education.- Adults Learning Mathematics.- Affect in Mathematics Education.- Algebra Teaching and Learning.- Algorithmics.- Algorithms.- Anthropological Approaches in Mathematics Education, French Perspective.- Argumentation in Mathematics.- Argumentation in Mathematics Education.- Assessment Frameworks in Mathematics Education.- Assessment of Mathematics Teacher Knowledge.- Authority in Mathematics Education.- Autism, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Behaviorism in Mathematics Education.- Bilingual and Multilingual Issues in Mathematics Education.- Blind Children, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Bloom's Taxonomy in Mathematics Education.- Calculus Teaching and Learning.- Cognitive Acceleration in Mathematics Education.- Collaborative Learning in Mathematics Education.- Communities of Inquiry in Mathematics Teacher Education.- Communities of Practice in Mathematics Education.- Communities of Practice in Mathematics Teacher Education.- Competency Frameworks in Mathematics Education.- Complexity in Mathematics Education.- Concept Development in Mathematics Education.- Concept Maps in Mathematics Education.- Constructivism and Radical Constructivism in Mathematics Education.- Constructivist Teaching Experiment Creativity in Mathematics Education.- Critical Mathematics.- Critical Thinking in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Anthropological Approaches in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Diversity in Mathematics Education.- Cultural influences in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Traditions of Mathematics Teaching.- Curricular Resources and Textbooks.- Data Handling and Statistics Teaching and Learning.- [NAME], Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Deductive Reasoning in Mathematics Education.- Design research in mathematics education.- [NAME] teaching and learning in mathematics education.- Didactic Contract in Mathematics Education.- Didactic engineering in mathematics education.- Didactic Situations in Mathematics Education.- Didactic Transposition in Mathematics Education.- Didactical Phenomenology (Freudenthal).- Discourse Analytic Approaches in Mathematics Education.- Discrete Mathematics Teaching and Learning.- Discursive Approaches to Learning Mathematics.- Down Syndrome, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Dyscalculia.- Early Algebra Teaching and Learning.- Early Childhood Mathematics Education.- Education of Mathematics Teacher Educators.- Elkonin and Davydov Curriculum in Mathematics Education.- Embodied Cognition.- Enactivist Theories.- Epistemological Obstacles in Mathematics Education.- Equity and Access in Mathematics Education.- Ethnicity and Race in Mathematics Education.- Ethno-mathematics.- External Assessment in Mathematics Education.- Fieldwork/ practicum in mathematics education.- Frameworks for Conceptualizing Mathematics Teacher Knowledge.- Gender in Mathematics Education.- Giftedness and high ability in mathematics.- Goals of Mathematics Education.- Heuristics in Mathematics Education.- Historical Overview of Mathematics Teaching Materials.- History of Mathematics and Education.- History of Mathematics Teaching and Learning.- History of Research in Mathematics Education.- Hypothetical Learning Trajectories in Mathematics Education.- Immigrant Students in Mathematics Education.- Immigrant Teachers in Mathematics Education.- Inclusive Mathematics Classrooms.- Indigenous Students in Mathematics Education.- Informal Learning in Mathematics Education.- Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Affordances in Mathematics Education.- Inquiry Based Mathematics Education.- Instrumental and Relational Understanding in Mathematics Education.- Instrumentation in Mathematics Education.- Interactionis | The Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education is a comprehensive reference text, covering every topic in the field with entries ranging from short descriptions to much longer pieces where the topic warrants more elaboration. The entries provide access to theories and to research in the area and refer to the leading publications for further reading. Links will also be made to particular texts in Springer journals and e-books through SpringerReference.com. The [NAME] is aimed at graduate students, researchers, curriculum developers, policy makers, and others with interests in the field of mathematics education. It is planned to be 700 pages in length in its hard copy form but the text will subsequently be up-dated and developed on-line in a way that retains the integrity of the ideas, the responsibility for which will be in the hands of the Editor-in-Chief and the Editorial Board.Editorial Board:Michele ArtigueRuhama EvenMelony GravenEva JablonkaRobyn JorgensenYoshinori ShimizuBharath Sriraman | <p>Provides comprehensive access to theories and to research in the mathematics education field</p><p>Over 500 contributions from leading researchers from around the globe</p><p>Provides a comprehensive reference text, covering the range of methodologies, perspectives, foci and cultures of this field of inquiry</p><p>Ongoing updates of research and new developments in the online version of the encyclopedia </p> | Science | Reduced (3) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-007-4978-8 | Education | Lerman | [NAME], South Bank University Centre for Mathematics Education, London, UK | Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 700 |  | eReference work | 700 p. eReference. | 1 | final | 399 | 399 | 474.81 | 478.8 | 359.5 | 558.5 | English | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | International and Comparative Education | SCO13000 | JN | Education | Encyclop(a)edia | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-06-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Ability Grouping in Mathematics Classrooms.- Abstraction in Mathematics Education.- Actions, Processes, Projects, [NAME] (APOS) in Mathematics Education.- Activity Theory in Mathematics Education.- Adults Learning Mathematics.- Affect in Mathematics Education.- Algebra Teaching and Learning.- Algorithmics.- Algorithms.- Anthropological Approaches in Mathematics Education, French Perspective.- Argumentation in Mathematics.- Argumentation in Mathematics Education.- Assessment Frameworks in Mathematics Education.- Assessment of Mathematics Teacher Knowledge.- Authority in Mathematics Education.- Autism, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Behaviorism in Mathematics Education.- Bilingual and Multilingual Issues in Mathematics Education.- Blind Children, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Bloom's Taxonomy in Mathematics Education.- Calculus Teaching and Learning.- Cognitive Acceleration in Mathematics Education.- Collaborative Learning in Mathematics Education.- Communities of Inquiry in Mathematics Teacher Education.- Communities of Practice in Mathematics Education.- Communities of Practice in Mathematics Teacher Education.- Competency Frameworks in Mathematics Education.- Complexity in Mathematics Education.- Concept Development in Mathematics Education.- Concept Maps in Mathematics Education.- Constructivism and Radical Constructivism in Mathematics Education.- Constructivist Teaching Experiment Creativity in Mathematics Education.- Critical Mathematics.- Critical Thinking in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Anthropological Approaches in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Diversity in Mathematics Education.- Cultural influences in Mathematics Education.- Cultural Traditions of Mathematics Teaching.- Curricular Resources and Textbooks.- Data Handling and Statistics Teaching and Learning.- [NAME], Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Deductive Reasoning in Mathematics Education.- Design research in mathematics education.- [NAME] teaching and learning in mathematics education.- Didactic Contract in Mathematics Education.- Didactic engineering in mathematics education.- Didactic Situations in Mathematics Education.- Didactic Transposition in Mathematics Education.- Didactical Phenomenology (Freudenthal).- Discourse Analytic Approaches in Mathematics Education.- Discrete Mathematics Teaching and Learning.- Discursive Approaches to Learning Mathematics.- Down Syndrome, Special Needs and Mathematics Learning.- Dyscalculia.- Early Algebra Teaching and Learning.- Early Childhood Mathematics Education.- Education of Mathematics Teacher Educators.- Elkonin and Davydov Curriculum in Mathematics Education.- Embodied Cognition.- Enactivist Theories.- Epistemological Obstacles in Mathematics Education.- Equity and Access in Mathematics Education.- Ethnicity and Race in Mathematics Education.- Ethno-mathematics.- External Assessment in Mathematics Education.- Fieldwork/ practicum in mathematics education.- Frameworks for Conceptualizing Mathematics Teacher Knowledge.- Gender in Mathematics Education.- Giftedness and high ability in mathematics.- Goals of Mathematics Education.- Heuristics in Mathematics Education.- Historical Overview of Mathematics Teaching Materials.- History of Mathematics and Education.- History of Mathematics Teaching and Learning.- History of Research in Mathematics Education.- Hypothetical Learning Trajectories in Mathematics Education.- Immigrant Students in Mathematics Education.- Immigrant Teachers in Mathematics Education.- Inclusive Mathematics Classrooms.- Indigenous Students in Mathematics Education.- Informal Learning in Mathematics Education.- Information and Communication Technology (ICT) Affordances in Mathematics Education.- Inquiry Based Mathematics Education.- Instrumental and Relational Understanding in Mathematics Education.- Instrumentation in Mathematics Education.- Interactionis | The Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education is a comprehensive reference text, covering every topic in the field with entries ranging from short descriptions to much longer pieces where the topic warrants more elaboration. The entries provide access to theories and to research in the area and refer to the leading publications for further reading. Links will also be made to particular texts in Springer journals and e-books through SpringerReference.com. The [NAME] is aimed at graduate students, researchers, curriculum developers, policy makers, and others with interests in the field of mathematics education. It is planned to be 700 pages in length in its hard copy form but the text will subsequently be up-dated and developed on-line in a way that retains the integrity of the ideas, the responsibility for which will be in the hands of the Editor-in-Chief and the Editorial Board.Editorial Board:Michele ArtigueRuhama EvenMelony GravenEva JablonkaRobyn JorgensenYoshinori ShimizuBharath Sriraman | <p>Provides comprehensive access to theories and to research in the mathematics education field</p><p>Over 500 contributions from leading researchers from around the globe</p><p>Provides a comprehensive reference text, covering the range of methodologies, perspectives, foci and cultures of this field of inquiry</p><p>Ongoing updates of research and new developments in the online version of the encyclopedia </p> | Science | E-book | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04992-2 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], Texas A & M University Dept. Teaching, Learning & Culture, College Station, TX, USA; [NAME], University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI, USA; [NAME], East China Normal University, Putuo, People's Republic of China | Transforming Mathematics Instruction | Multiple Approaches and Practices | Advances in Mathematics Education |  | 1 | 2014 | 273 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 273 p. 108 illus., 40 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Education | Mathematics Education | SCO25000 | JNU | Teaching and Teacher Education | SCO31000 | JNMT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-24 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Chapter 1: Transforming mathematics instruction: What do we know and what can we learn from existing approaches and practices? [NAME], Texas A&M University, USA;  [NAME], University of Michigan, USA; [NAME], East China Normal University, China.- Part I: Transforming Mathematics Instruction with a Focus on Changes in Instructional Practice.- Preface: [NAME] Chapter 2:  Modelling in mathematics classroom instruction – an innovative approach for transforming mathematics education: [NAME], University of Hamburg, Germany; Gabriele KAISER, University of Hamburg, Germany;Rita Borromeo FERRI, Kassel University, Germany.- Chapter 3: Guided reinvention: What is it and how do teachers learn this teaching approach? [NAME], University of North Carolina Charlotte, USA; [NAME], Purdue University Calumet, USA; Erna YACKEL, Purdue University Calumet, USA.- Chapter 4: Challenging mathematics with multiple solution tasks and mathematical investigations in geometry: Roza LEIKIN, University of Haifa, Israel.- Chapter 5: Transforming professional practice in numeracy teaching: [NAME], The University of Queensland, Australia; [NAME], Australian Catholic University, Australia; [NAME], The University of Queensland, Australia.- Chapter 6: Exploratory work in the mathematics classroom: [NAME], Instituto de Educação da Universidade de Lisboa, Portugal; [NAME], Instituto de Educação da Universidade de Lisboa, Portugal; [NAME], Instituto de Educação da Universidade de Lisboa, Portugal.- Chapter 7: The affordances of using visibly random groups in a mathematics classroom: [NAME], [NAME], Canada.- Part II: Transforming Mathematics Instruction with School Curriculum Changes.- Preface: [NAME] 8: Transforming mathematics education: The role of textbooks and teachers: [NAME], Eindhoven University of Technology, the Netherlands.- Chapter 9: Opportunities to develop algebraic thinking in elementary grades throughout the school year in the context of mathematics curriculum changes: Hélia OLIVEIRA, University of Lisbon, Portugal; Célia MESTRE, University of Lisbon, Portugal.- Chapter 10: Transformation of Japanese elementary mathematics textbooks: 1958-2012: [NAME], Kennesaw State University, USA.- Chapter 11: Changes in instructional tasks and their influence on classroom discourse in reformed mathematics classrooms of Chinese primary schools: Yu-Jing NI, The Chinese University of Hong Kong, Hong Kong SAR; [NAME], Shen Zhen University, China; [NAME], Hong Kong Shue Yan University, Hong Kong SAR; [NAME], Beijing Normal University, China.- Chapter 12: Improving classroom instruction in mathematics through exemplary lesson development: A Chinese approach: [NAME], Middle Tennessee State University, USA; [NAME], Texas A&M University, USA.- Part III: Transforming Mathematics Instruction with Different Approaches in Teacher Education.- Preface: [NAME] 13: Facilitating video-based professional development: Planning and orchestrating productive discussions: [NAME], Stanford University, USA, [NAME], University of Colorado, Boulder, USA, [NAME], WestEd, USU, Charmaine MANGRAM, Stanford University, USA.- Chapter 14: Professional development for secondary school mathematics teachers using student work: Some challenges and promising possibilities: [NAME], University of Michigan, USA, Heejoo SUH, Michigan State University, USA.- Chapter 15: Cases as a vehicle for developing knowledge needed for teaching: [NAME], University of Pittsburgh, USA. [NAME] University of New Mexico, USA, Fran ARBAUGH, Penns | This book surveys and examines different approaches and practices that contribute to the changes in mathematics instruction, including (1) innovative approaches that bring direct changes in classroom instructional practices, (2) curriculum reforms that introduce changes in content and requirements in classroom instruction, and (3) approaches in mathematics teacher education that aim to improve teachers’ expertise and practices. It also surveys relevant theory and methodology development in studying and assessing mathematics instruction.Classroom instruction is commonly seen as one of the key factors contributing to students’ learning of mathematics, but much remains to be understood about teachers’ instructional practices that lead to the development and enactment of effective classroom instruction, and approaches and practices developed and used to transform classroom instruction in different education systems.Transforming Mathematics Instruction is organized to help readers learn not only from reading individual chapters, but also from reading across chapters and sections to explore broader themes, including:- Identifying what is important in mathematics for teaching and learning emphasized in different approaches;- Exploring how students’ learning is considered and facilitated through different approaches and practices;- Understanding the nature of various approaches that are valued in different systems and cultural contexts;- Probing culturally valued approaches in identifying and evaluating effective instructional practices.The book brings new research and insights into multiple approaches and practices for transforming mathematics instruction to the international community of mathematics education, with 25 chapters and four section prefaces contributed by 56 scholars from 10 different education systems. This rich collection is indispensable reading for mathematics educators, researchers, teacher educators, curriculum developers, and graduate students interested in learning about different instructional practices, approaches for instructional transformation, and research in different education systems.It will help readers to reflect on approaches and practices that are useful for instructional changes in their own education systems, and also inspire them to identify and further explore new areas of research and program development in improving mathematics teaching and learning. | <p>Provides much-needed information about recent instructional research and changes in mathematics education</p><p>Offers a unique international perspective for readers to learn and cross-examine diverse approaches and practices</p><p>Contributes to an important and ongoing discussion about transforming mathematics instruction for improving students’ learning</p><p>Presents new areas of research for improving mathematics teaching and learning</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-34-4 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], The Hong Kong Institute of Education, Hong Kong SAR, People's Republic of China | University Rankings | Implications for Higher Education in Taiwan |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 179 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 179 p. 8 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Assessment, Testing and Evaluation | SCO33000 | JNKD | Education | Monograph | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1 Introduction.- Chapter 2 Taiwan’s Higher Education System in Context.- Chapter 3 Theorising University Rankings.- Chapter 4 Dimension 1: Influences of University Rankings - Changes in Policy, University Governance and Individual Behaviours.- Chapter 5 Dimension 2: Manifestations of the Normative Power of University Rankings - Struggling between Love and Hate.- Chapter 6 Dimension 3: University Rankings and the Global Landscape of Higher Education - Using University Rankings to Promote Local Interests.- Chapter 7 Dimension 4: Antinomy of the Power of University Rankings - World-class [NAME] versus Global Hegemony.- Chapter 8 Conclusion. | This book adopts a qualitative case study approach to provide the readers with a systematic delineation and interpretation of the implications of the university ranking phenomenon for Taiwan’s higher education system. It reviews the literature on different theories concerning the global transformation of higher education and presents basic information on higher education in Taiwan. The author develops a four-dimensional framework for the analysis of the ranking phenomenon in the island-state. First, the technological/ecological dimension aims to look into how the rankings have impacted Taiwan’s higher education based on empirical findings from five Taiwanese public universities. Next, the technological/geographical dimension examines how Taiwan can use rankings to promote its interests in global higher education. The two conceptual dimensions focus on the relationship between the rankings and power in higher education. They show how the phenomenon can be read and explained through theoretical lenses from ecological and geographical perspectives. From an ecological perspective, the empirical evidence suggests that the influence of rankings varies throughout the academic hierarchy in Taiwan. The theoretical analysis then illustrates the relationship between the ranking phenomenon and the power structure in academic hierarchy. Geographically, while the empirical analysis is based on data from Taiwan, the theoretical analysis offers essential insights that help readers to understand the changing global landscape of higher education and its implications in East Asia. | <p>First book on the implications of university rankings for higher education in Taiwan</p><p>Provides a systemic delineation and interpretation of the ranking phenomenon</p><p>Analyses the ranking phenomenon at both local and global levels, including its impacts on academic life and global competition in higher education</p><p>Presents a ground-breaking analysis of the relationship between regionalisation of higher education and university rankings</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8868-7 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Sydney, Sydney, NSW, Australia; [NAME], Indiana State University, Terre Haute, IN, USA | Englishes in Multilingual Contexts | Language Variation and Education | Multilingual Education | 10 | 1 | 2014 | 180 | Hard cover | Book | X, 180 p. 29 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Language Education | SCO23000 | CJ | Applied Linguistics | SCN13000 | CB | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction.- Section 1: Issues of Language Variation in Education. Chapter 2: Integrating Language Variation into TESOL: Challenges from English Globalization.- Chapter 3: Classroom Encounters with Caribbean Creole English: Language, Identities and Pedagogy.- Chapter 4: Global Identities or Local Stigma Markers: How Equal is the 'E' in Englishes in Cameroon?.- Chapter 5: Accent and Ethics: Issues that [NAME] Attention.- Chapter 6: Forensic Linguistics and Pedagogical Implications in Multilingual Contexts.- Chapter 7: Teaching the Expanding Universe of Englishes.- Section 2: Pedagogical applications. Chapter 8: Dynamic Approach to Language Proficiency.- Chapter 9: Modelling and Mentoring: The [NAME] and Yang of Teaching and Learning from Home Through School.- Chapter 10: Supporting Students in the Move from Spoken to Written Language.- Chapter 11: Applying Systemic Functional Linguistics to Build Educators’ Knowledge of Academic English for the Teaching of Writing.- Chapter 12: 'Welcome to the Real World” or English Reloaded: A European Perspective.- Chapter 13: Preparing Linguistically Responsive Teachers in Multilingual Contexts.- Chapter 14: From Model to Practice: Language Variation in Education. | The chapters in this volume allow readers to develop a broad understanding of the issues around language variation and to recognise pedagogical implications of this work in multilingual contexts. The authors explore how variations in Englishes around the world relate to issues in English language teaching and learning. The English language has always existed alongside other languages. However, the last 200 years have shown a dramatic increase in the range, extent and context of contact between English and other languages. As a result of this contact, we find marked variations in Englishes around the world. The first part includes chapters of importance in studying English language variation in the context of education. The second part builds on an understanding of variation and identifies pedagogical possibilities that respect language variation and yet empower English language learners in diverse contexts. | <p>Maintains a clear focus on the position of English within a multi-lingual context education</p><p>Broadly discusses issues of language variation in the context of education</p><p>Includes a range of theoretical positions in the discussion of language variation, multilingualism and education</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-02602-2 | Education | Mitchell | [NAME], University of California Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA; [NAME], University of California Riverside, Riverside, CA, USA | Professional Responsibility in Education and Health Care Reform |  | Advances in Medical Education | 4 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 365 p. 30 illus. | 0 | approx. | 134.99 | 134.99 | 144.44 | 148.49 | 120.5 | 177.5 | English | Education | Medical Education | SCO26000 | JNU | Administration, Organization and Leadership | SCO17000 | JNK | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-06-13 00:00:00 |  |  | A Brief Introduction to the Problem of Professional Responsibility.- Dilemmas of Educational Practice: Global Competition and Achievement Gaps.- Challenges Facing the Medical Profession in the US.- Professional Responsibility: The Problem and Why It Needs Attention.- How Institutional Contexts Shape Professional Responsibility.- Professional Practice in Complex Organizations.- Erecting the Pipeline for Socially Responsible Physicians.- How Linking University Research to School Needs Influences Scholars and Schools.- Cultural Induction: Professionalism’s Life or Death Struggle.- Creating Incentives to Support Professional Responsibility.- Getting Task Structures and Institutional Designs Right.- Educator Professional Responsibility for Family Health.- Professional Ethics and Virtue Ethics in Community Medical Practice.- The Role of Graduate Schools of Education in Training Autism Professionals to Work with Diverse Families.- Preparing Teachers as Momentum Builds for Dual-Language Classrooms.- Policy, Structural, Role and [NAME] to Best Practice in School Psychology.- Whither Collaboration? The Capacity and Will to Integrate Professional Services.- Collaborative Community in Schools.- Summarizing the Lessons, Shaping a Blueprint.​ | At the center of this book is the complex and perplexing question of how to design professional preparation programs, organizational management practices, public policy systems and robust professional associations committed to and capable of, maintaining confidence, trust and the other hallmarks of responsible professionalism. To do this, we need to rebuild our understanding of professional responsibility from the ground up. We describe how individuals might be prepared to engage in responsible professional service delivery, examine promising options for the reform of professional service systems and finally, outline a reform strategy for improving practice in these two essential public services. The nexus of the reform problem in professionalism is establishing a more robust and effective working relationship between teachers and their students; between health care professionals and their patients and between educators and health professionals. Professionalism means acceptance of professional responsibility for student and patient outcomes — not just acceptance of responsibility for technical expertise, but commitment to the social norms of the profession, including trustworthiness and responsibility for client wellbeing. In the past, it may have been sufficient to assume that adequate knowledge can be shaped into standards of professional practice. Today, it is clear that we must take careful account of the ways in which practicing professionals develop, internalize and sustain professionalism during their training, along with the ways in which this commitment to professionalism may be undermined by the regulatory, fiscal, technological, political and emotional incentive systems that impinge on professional workplaces and professional employment systems. | <p>The latest research-based data from the Evolving Professional Responsibility for Diverse Communities Conference</p><p>Gives insights into professionalism in both the education and medical fields</p><p>Rebuilds the understanding of professional responsibility from the ground up</p><p>Provides practical applications of professional responsibility in medicine and education</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11650 | Medicine
 | 978-3-319-05493-3 | Education | Moos | Lejf Moos, Aarhus University, Copenhagen, Denmark; Jan Merok Paulsen, Oslo and Akershus University College of Applied Sciences, Oslo, Norway | School Boards in the Governance Process |  | Educational Governance Research | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 173 | Hard cover | Book | X, 173 p. 7 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Administration, Organization and Leadership | SCO17000 | JNK | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Comparing Nordic Educational Governance; Lejf Moos and Jan Merok Paulsen.- Part 1: Country Reports.- 2. School Boards in Denmark; Lejf Moos, [NAME] and Ulf Brinkkjær.- 3. School Boards in Finland; Mika Risku, [NAME] and Seppo Pulkinen.- 4. School Boards in Norway; Jan Merok Paulsen and [NAME] Strand.- 5. School Boards in Sweden; [NAME], Elisabet Nihlfors and [NAME] Steen.- Part 2: Thematic Chapters.- 6. Educational Governance: Politics, Administration and Professionalism; Lejf Moos (Denmark), Jan Merok Paulsen (Norway), Elisabet Nihlfors (Sweden), [NAME] and [NAME] (Finland).- 7. Control and Trust in Local School Governance; [NAME] and Jan Merok Paulsen (Norway), Elisabet Nihlfors (Sweden), [NAME] (Denmark), [NAME] and [NAME] (Finland).- 8. The School Boards between Power and Influence; [NAME] (Denmark), Jan Merok Paulsen (Norway), [NAME] (Sweden), [NAME] and [NAME] (Finland).- 9. Role and Influence of School Boards on improving Educational Quality; Elisabet Nihlfors (Sweden), [NAME] and Jan Merok Paulsen (Norway), Lejf Moos (Denmark), [NAME] and [NAME] (Finland).- 10. Multi Level Governance; Jan Merok Paulsen and [NAME] (Norway), Elisabet Nihlfors (Sverige), Ulf Brinkkjær (Denmark), [NAME], [NAME] (Finland).- 11. Globalisation, Europeanisation of Nordic Governance; Jan Merok Paulsen and Lejf Moos.- Author Biographies. | This book analyses local school district governance in a comparative, cross-cultural perspective based on national studies of local school boards in the Nordic countries, Denmark, Finland, Norway and Sweden. The overarching research question explored by the national studies contained in this volume is: How are transnational influences of standardization and accountability, alongside national policies, transformed into local policy cultures by the school boards? In all the Nordic countries, the municipalities are equivalent with the school district level, and municipalities, as such, play a role as the interface between state policies and the schools. This book discusses the variation across different national systems in the Nordic countries in the degree of decentralism, as well as the processes through which sources of political autonomy are put into practice by school boards. It explores the interplay between context and policy-making at the local level, and analyses how local discourses expressed by school boards differ from national policies and trans-national influences. The book’s analysis of the country-cases and thematic chapters shows that there are both important similarities and significant differences in governance functions, power relations and understandings of school board chairs and members between the countries studied. Moreover, the book analyses the many ways in which these similarities and differences affect the work context of school leaders and teachers in the Nordic countries. | <p>Analyses contemporary features in educational governance in a range of national contexts </p><p>Presents cross-country and thematic cases that improve the understanding of how transnational and national policies are transformed into local policy cultures   </p><p>Sheds light on educational governance and its potential impact on school professionals</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-77-4 | Education | [NAME] | [NAME], National Institute of Education, Singapore, Singapore; Chew-Leng Poon, Ministry of Education, Singapore, Singapore, Singapore; Shirley S L Lim, National Institute of Education, Singapore, Singapore | Inquiry into the Singapore Science Classroom | Research and Practices | Education Innovation Series |  | 1 | 2014 | 340 | Hard cover | Book | X, 340 p. 27 illus., 13 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Science Education | SCO27000 | JNU | Learning & Instruction | SCO22000 | JNT | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1 Five decades of science education in Singapore.- 2 Design and Implementation of the National Primary Science Curriculum: A Partnership Approach in Singapore.- 3 Transforming science education by expanding teacher and student collaboration.- 4 Teachers’ ideas and concerns with assessment practices in inquiry science.- 5 The development and implementation of a guided-inquiry curriculum for secondary school physics.- 6 From transmission to inquiry: Influence of curriculum demands on in-service teachers’ perception of science as inquiry.- 7 Teaching inquiry: Global influences and local responses.- 8 Transiting into inquiry science practice: Tales from a primary school.- 9 Science education in a straightjacket: The interplay of people, policies, and place in an East-Asian developmental state.- 10 Implementing inquiry science with knowledge creation approaches.- 11 Using inquiry to facilitate meaningful learning in inorganic chemistry qualitative analysis.- 12 Bridging research, policy, and practice of inquiry in Singaporean classrooms.- 13 Knowledge building as a boundary object in formal/informal learning.- 14 Science Centre Singapore as an alternate classroom.- 15 Public education about science in Singapore: The role of science journalism via newspapers.- 16 Learning science through inquiry in informal contexts. | This book offers an insight into the research and practices of science teaching and learning in the Singapore classroom, with particular attention paid to how they map on to science as inquiry. It provides a spectrum of Singapore’s science educational practices through all levels of its education system, detailing both successes and shortcomings.The book features a collection of research and discourse by science educators in Singapore, organized around four themes that are essential components of approaching science as inquiry: teachers’ ideas and their practices, opportunities and constraints from a systemic level, students’ competencies and readiness to learn through inquiry and the need for greater awareness of the role of informal learning avenues in science education. In addition, the discourse within each theme is enriched by commentary from a leading international academic, which helps to consolidate ideas as well as position the issues within a wider theoretical and international context.Overall, the papers set out important contexts for readers to understand the current state of science education in Singapore. They also highlight strengths and gaps in practices of science as inquiry as well as provide suggestions about how the system can be improved. These research findings are therefore helpful as they provide honest and evidence-based feedback as well as tangible and doable ideas that policy makers, teachers, students and school administrators can adopt, adapt and enhance. | <p>Features a comprehensive collection of work on science pedagogy and classroom practices in the Singapore context</p><p>Provides a spectrum of Singapore’s science educational practices through all levels of its education system</p><p>Offers a thoughtful blend of empirically and theoretically grounded discussions of inquiry in science education</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-80-4 | Education | Yamada | [NAME], Doshisha University, Kyoto, Japan | Measuring Quality of Undergraduate Education in Japan | Comparative Perspective in a Knowledge Based Society |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 188 | Hard cover | Book | I, 188 p. 12 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | International and Comparative Education | SCO13000 | JN | Assessment, Testing and Evaluation | SCO33000 | JNKD | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Part I: Trend of Quality Assurance of Higher Education in Comparative Perspective.- Introduction: Giving Dimension and Direction of Measuring Quality of Undergraduate Education in Japan.- Higher Education Policy [NAME] and Quality Assurance in Knowledge Based Society.- Structural Transformation of Japanese Higher Education: Adapting to Meet Challenges Posed by Globalization and Market Economy.- Part II: Measuring Student Learning Outcomes.- Measurement Trend of Learning Outcomes in the United States.- Measurement for the learning Outcomes: The Role of JCIRP for Assessing Student Learning.- Learning Outcomes of College Students in Japan: Comparative Analysis of between and within University.- The Possibility and Challenges of a Large Scale Continuous Student Survey System: Through Analysis of JCIRP data.- Quality Assurance of Teaching and Learning and Institutional Research.- Part III: Quality Assurance of Undergraduate Education: Comparative Analysis between USA and Japan.- What Kind of Issues and Challenges Does Japanese Undergraduate Education Face?: Comparative Analysis between USA and Japan.- Development of first-year Experience in Higher Education: Comparative Study between US and Japan.- Today’s First-year Students and the Institutional Practice in the First College Year: of Japanese Universities.- Issues of Educational Articulation between University and High School: Comparative Analysis between USA and Japan.- Conclusion. | This book explores how the global trend of quality assurance in higher education is related to the boom of measuring learning outcomes in Japan. It also presents a comparative study in higher education policy between Japan and the US, examining how both countries have reacted to the demands of globalization. This comparative view will help readers understand the present issues Japanese higher education faces and grasp the commonalties and differences between American and Japanese higher education.The book first explores the forces of globalization that have resulted in Japanese universities emphasizing student learning outcomes. Next, it examines how Japanese higher education has learned from the experience of the U.S., whose higher education reform has been regarded as a model for Japan. The book explains why quality assurance for teaching and learning has become important for all Japanese higher education institutions.Higher Education on a global basis is now facing a great issue. In order to help students in a competitive global market, universities need to become more teaching-and-learning-centered and develop more internationalized curricula. This book provides comparative views for cultural and structural similarities and differences in higher education in two countries which could explain significant differences in the gains students make in college. It will help readers understand not only how student learning outcomes can be measured, but why universities throughout the world must continually strive to become world-class institutions. | <p>Offers a comparative study of empirical data of Japanese and US college students</p><p>Provides up-to-date information about Japanese higher education policy toward knowledge based society and the globalization movement</p><p>Shares good institutional practices of quality assurance of undergraduate education from Japan</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8821-2 | Education | Yonezawa | [NAME], Tohoku University, Sendai, Japan; [NAME], Sophia University, Tokyo, Japan; [NAME], [NAME]., Fac. of Literature, [NAME], Fukuoka-ken, Japan; [NAME], Waseda University, Tokyo, Japan | Emerging International Dimensions in East Asian Higher Education |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 252 | Hard cover | Book | X, 252 p. 7 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Higher Education | SCO36000 | JNM | International and Comparative Education | SCO13000 | JN | Education | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface: [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Kuroda.-  Chapter 1: The Emergence of International Dimensions in East Asian Higher Education: Pursuing Regional and Global Development:  [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Kazuo Kuroda.- Chapter 2: Higher Education as a Public Good in a Marketized East Asian Environment: [NAME] Marginson.- Chapter 3: Asian Research: The Role of Universities: [NAME] 4: The Institutional Prospects of Cross-Border Higher Education for East Asian Regional Integration: An Analysis of the JICA Survey of Leading Universities in East Asia: [NAME], [NAME] and Kyuwon Kang.- Chapter 5: The Harmonization of Higher Education in Southeast Asia: Supachai Yavaprabhas.- Chapter 6: China-ASEAN Relations in Higher Education: An Analytical Framework: [NAME]: Chapter 7: The Regionalization of Higher Education in Northeast Asia: [NAME] and [NAME] Um.- Chapter 8: Subregional Collaboration in Higher Education: Harmonization and Networking in the Greater Mekong Subregion (GMS): [NAME] Hirosato.- Chapter 9: The Impact of Inter-University Exchange and Cooperation on Doctoral Programs in Southeast Asia: Naoki Umemiya, [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Tsutsumi.- Chapter 10: Tied to the Family and Bound to the Labor Market: Understanding Chinese Student Mobility in Japan: [NAME]: Education for Sustainable Development at Universities in Japan: Yuto Kitamura and Naoko Hoshii.- Chapter 12: Japanese Universities’ Strategic Approach to Internationalization: Accomplishments and Challenges: [NAME] Conclusion.- [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and Kazuo Kuroda.- List of Contributors. | This book discusses emerging roles and functions of higher education and the implications for higher education as a public good in a context of globalization and regionalization. It examines developments in higher education in the different regions of Asia, Europe, North America, Africa, and Latin America. It also presents cases of higher education reforms in previously under-examined regions such as South Asia and Eastern Europe.Increases in the mobility of students, faculty and researchers across national borders and in the number and variety of cross-border linkages among higher education institutions have challenged the understanding of higher education as a public good in a single nation.  At the same time, the increased privatization and marketization brought by globalization have provided new opportunities and vulnerabilities in markets no longer defined solely by national borders and governed only by national policy. The financial crisis of 2008 underscored these vulnerabilities highlighting both the inter-dependence of economies and institutions but also the increasing multi-polarities of influence in higher education.In parallel with increased student mobility globally is an increase in regional mobility of students, who are attracted to new centers of knowledge and research. As institutional quality is increasingly understood in a global context, universities from new regions of the world are moving to the top of world rankings at the same time that competition for students among lower ranking institutions has extended beyond traditional borders. In a variety of ways, individuals and institutions are increasingly looking to regional neighbors, for students, opportunities for study, as well as institutional partnerships and collaboration | <p>One of the first books to discuss the concept of “public goods” in higher [NAME] on case studies covering Europe, North- and South-America, Africa and Asia</p><p>Examines differences and similarities in regional dynamics</p><p>Highlights the increasingly regional nature of global internationalization</p><p>Analyses both global trends and regional uniquenesses of higher education reforms</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54223-7 | Education | Zhao | [NAME], Beijing Normal University, Beijing, People's Republic of China; [NAME], University of Bremen, Bremen, Germany | Areas of Vocational Education Research |  | New Frontiers of Educational Research |  | 1 | 2014 | 268 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 268 p. 8 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Education | Professional & Vocational Education | [NAME] | JNRV | Educational Policy and Politics | SCO19000 | JNF | Education | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | TVET-Research—An Introduction.- [NAME] education research – research on vocational pedagogy, vocational discipline and vocational didactics.- VET Research in Relation to VET Policy, Planning and Practice in 2013.- Occupational Research: Implications for the Development of Research Methods.- TVET System Research.- Relations between TVET System and Employment.- TVET Planning and Development.- The Benefits, Costs and Financing of Technical and Vocational Education and [NAME] (TVET).- Competence research.- Curriculum Research.- Research Methods in Technical Vocational Education and Training.- Organizational Commitment Research: Past, Present and Future. | This book provides an overview of some fundamental topics of international Technical and Vocational Education and [NAME] (TVET), e.g. genesis of TVET research, fields of TVET research, curriculum development, TVET planning and developing, methods of TVET research etc. The International Handbook of Technical and Vocational Education and Training Research (Rauner/Maclean), published in 2009 by Springer, was the first handbook to provide a comprehensive coverage of TVET research in an international context and with a special focus on research and research methods. Building upon the great success of this handbook and replying to the great demand expressed by researchers, (postgraduate) students and decision makers in VET, this new book “Areas of Vocational Education Research” focuses on providing an easier accessible overview of the fundamental topics of international TVET research. | <p>Give an overview of the fundamental and important topics of TVET research</p><p>Offer comprehensive information about the new development of the TVET research</p><p>Provide international perspectives of TVET research</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04761-4 | Humanities | Crome | [NAME], University of Manchester, Manchester, UK | The Restoration of the Jews: Early Modern Hermeneutics, Eschatology, and National Identity in the Works of Thomas Brightman |  | International Archives of the History of Ideas   Archives internationales d'histoire des idées | 213 | 1 | 2014 | 286 | Hard cover | Book | X, 286 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Humanities / Arts | History | SCV22000 | HB | Culture - Religion | SCX22100 | [NAME] | Humanities / History | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-12 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Chapter 1: The Literal Sense, [NAME] and the Jews in History.- Chapter 2: Historicising Allegory: [NAME] and the Historicising Commentary.- Chapter 3: Consistent Literalism and the Restoration of the Jews.- Chapter 4: Tracing Brightman’s Influence: Judeo-Centrism 1610-40.- Chapter 5: Tracing Brightman’s Influence: Judeo-Centrism 1640-60.- Conclusion.- Appendix: Comparison of editions of Brightman’s commentaries.​ | This book offers the first detailed examination of the life and works of biblical commentator [NAME] (1562-1607), analysing his influential eschatological commentaries and their impact on both conservative and radical writers in early modern England. It examines in detail the hermeneutic strategies used by Brightman and argues that his method centred on the dual axes of a Jewish restoration to Palestine and the construction of a strong English national identity.   This book suggests that Brightman’s use of conservative modes of “literal” exegesis led him to new interpretations which had a major impact on early modern English eschatology. A radically historicised mode of exegesis sought to provide interpretations of the Old Testament that would have made sense to their original readers, leading Brightman and those who followed him to argue for the physical restoration of the Jews to the Holy Land. In doing so, the standard Reformed identification of Old Testament Israel with elect Christians was denied. This book traces the evolution of the controversial idea that Israel and the church both had separate unfulfilled scriptural promises in early modern England and shows how early modern exegetes sought to re-construct a distinctly English Christian identity through reading their nation into prophecy. In examining Brightman’s hermeneutic strategies and their influence, this book argues for important links between a “literal” hermeneutic, ideas of Jewish restoration and national identity construction in early modern England. Its central arguments will be of interest to all those researching the history of biblical interpretation, the role of religion in constructing national identity and the background to the later development of Christian Zionism. | <p>Examines [NAME], a figure often cited in secondary works but rarely examined in detail </p><p>Presents important new insights on the development of early modern ideas of Jewish restoration to Palestine</p><p>Provides a detailed analysis of early modern apocalyptic hermeneutics and their links to national identity formation</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04779-9 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Montreal, QC, Canada | Law and Regulation of Aerodromes |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 261 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 261 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Law of the Sea, Air and [NAME] | [NAME] | LBB |  |  |  | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | The Airport and the State.- Certification of Aerodromes.- Airport Planning.- Regulation of Airport Financing and Economics.- The Airport Business.- Aerodrome Security.- Joint Use of Military and Civil Airports.- Conclusion. | This book encapsulates in detail the principles pertaining to legal and regulatory aspects of aerodromes. As the title denotes, it discusses the various aspects of the structure and functioning of an aerodrome and the complexities involved. It focuses on the law and regulation of aerodrome certification and planning, aerodrome services, financial and economic planning, security, management and governance.The airport industry is one of the fastest growing within the aviation industry, requiring innovation and creativity in management. This in turn has called for an increased focus on advanced management programmes for airport managers and lawyers. The Airport Management Professional Accreditation Programme (AMPAP) offered worldwide by the International Civil Aviation Organization and Airports Council International, and the Angkasa Pura II Airport Management Excellence Programme of Indonesia are two such initiatives which give airport professionals a sound grounding on the principles and techniques of management and law. | <p>Provides a comprehensive analysis of key aerodrome-related issues</p><p>Covers key aspects of airport planning, certification, economics and security</p><p>Offers an important reference work for aviation professionals, regulatory authorities and aviation studies educators</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8671-3 | Law | Albers | [NAME], University of Hamburg, Hamburg, Germany; [NAME], [NAME] Magdeburg, Magdeburg, Germany; [NAME], University of Hamburg, Hamburg, Germany | Human Rights and Human Nature |  | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 35 | 1 | 2014 | 274 | Hard cover | Book | VI, 274 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | SCR11011 | LAB | Philosophy of Law | SCE27000 | LAB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Contents.- About the Authors.- Introduction; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Reinhardt.- I The Role of Nature in Human Rights Discourse - Foundations and Limitations.- 1 The Double Foundation of Human Rights in Human Nature; Corinna Mieth.- 2 Human Rights and Human Animals; Bernd Ladwig.- 3 Human Rights, Human Dignity, and the Human Life Form; [NAME] Hoffmann.- 4 Rethinking Human Nature as a Basis for Human Rights; Harun Tepe.- 5 The Relationship between Human Nature and Human Rights. The Confu-cian Example; [NAME] Stępień.- 6 The Natural Faculty of Empathy as a Basis for Human Rights; [NAME] 7 Human Rights and Basic Needs; [NAME] Schaber.- 8 Human Rights Beyond Naturalism; Arnd Pollmann.- 9 Human Rights, Human Nature and the Feasibility Issue; [NAME] Reinhardt.- II Species manipulation and the transformation of human nature Challenges to human rights.- 10 How to Protect “Human Nature” – by Human Dignity, Human Rights or with “Species-Ethics” Argumentations?; Georg Lohmann.- 11 Species, Potentiality and their Manipulation; Markus Rothhaar.- 12 Collection of Human Tissue Samples in Biobanks: Challenges to Human Rights; [NAME] Dörr.- 13 The Body, the [NAME] and the Market: Public Policy Implications in a Liberal State; Ingrid Schneider.- 14 Should Society Guarantee Individuals the Right to Maintain “Normal Functioning”?: A Genetic Minimalist Approach in a Globalized World; Tetsu Sakurai.- 15 Enhancement, Human Nature and Human Rights; [NAME] .- Index. | This book explores both the possibilities and limits of arguments from human nature in the context of human rights. Can the concept of human nature provide a basis for understanding fundamental rights? Is it plausible to justify the claim to universal validity of human rights by reference to human nature? Or does the idea of human rights in its modern, post-1945 manifestation go, in essence, beyond human nature? The essays in this volume introduce naturalistic positions and their concomitant critiques. They address the role that human nature both actually does and potentially may play in forming a foundation for and acting as an exemplification of fundamental rights. Beyond that, they give attention to the challenges caused by Life Sciences. Human nature itself is subject to transformation and transgression in an unprecedented manner. The essays reflect on issues such as reproduction, species manipulation, corporeal autonomy and enhancement. Contributors are jurists, philosophers and political scientists from Germany, Switzerland, Turkey, Poland and Japan. | <p>First volume to provide a comprehensive overview of naturalistic accounts on human rights</p><p>Addresses the role that human nature plays in the foundation of human rights</p><p>Provides clear insights as to how transformations of the human affect the idea of human rights</p><p>Highlights how human rights theory is being informed by current legal, ethical and medical issues</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-6265-001-5 | Law | Boothby | [NAME], [NAME], UK | Conflict Law | The Influence of New Weapons Technology, Human Rights and Emerging Actors |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 464 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 464 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | International Humanitarian Law, Law of Armed Conflict | SCR19030 | LBBS | Human Rights | SCR19020 | JPVH | Law | Monograph | T.M.C. Asser Press | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- The Changing Legal Spectrum of Conflict.- International manuals and international law.- Interacting technologies and legal challenge.- Weapons law and future conflict.- Legal implications of emerging approaches to war.- People and the Legal Spectrum of Conflict.- Detention operations: Legal safeguards for internees.- The law of armed conflict and human rights law.- Making sense of the human rights law/law of armed conflict conundrum - a practical proposal.- War in the spotlight.- Bringing the strands together. | Topics as diverse as the evolving spectrum of conflict, innovations in weaponry, automated and autonomous attack, the depersonalisation of warfare, detention operations, the influence of modern media and the application of human rights law to the conduct of hostilities are examined in this book to see to what extent existing legal norms are challenged. The book takes each topic in turn, explains relevant provisions of contemporary law and analyses exactly where the legal problem lies. The analysis then develops the theme, examining for example the implications of current rules as to deception operations for certain applications of cyber warfare. The text is written in an accessible style, and demonstrates the continuing relevance of established rules and the importance of compliance with them. Useful for academics, military, governments, ministries of defence, ministries of foreign affairs, libraries, diplomats, think tanks, policy units, NGOs, and all others with an interest in law of armed conflict issues such as journalists and students. | <p>Author combines extensive military career with academic rigour</p><p>Takes numerous vital issues currently confronting the law of armed conflict and presents the author's personal assessment of each</p><p>Written in a clear and accessible style</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-6265-010-7 | Law | Bulterman | [NAME], Ministry of Foreign Affairs, The Hague, The Netherlands; [NAME], University of Tilburg Tilburg Law School, Tilburg, The Netherlands | Netherlands Yearbook of International Law 2013 | Crisis and International Law: Decoy or Catalyst? | Netherlands Yearbook of International Law | 44 | 1 | 2014 | 223 | Hard cover | Book | X, 223 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Public International Law | SCR19000 | LBB |  |  |  | Law | Contributed volume | T.M.C. Asser Press | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Crises: Concern and Fuel for International Law and International Lawyers.- The Crisis and the Quotidian in International Human Rights Law.- The Crisis of International Human Rights Law in the Global Market Economy.- International Refugees and Irregular Migrants: Caught in the Mundane Shadow of Crisis.- Saving Humanity from Hell: International Criminal Law and Permanent Crisis.- Warming to Crisis: The Climate Change Law of Unintended Opportunity.- Between Crisis and Complacency: Seeking Commitment in International Environmental Law.- The WTO and the Doha Negotiation in Crisis? The EU in Crisis: Crisis Discourse as a Technique of Government.- The Thin Line between Deference and Indifference: the Supreme Court of The Netherlands and the Iranian Sanctions Case. | The combination of the words ‘international law’ and ‘crisis’ is intriguing and leads to a number of questions. How does international law react to crises and what are the typical conditions under which the term ‘crisis’ is invoked? Is international law a vivid field of law due to and thanks to crises? Are parts of international law maybe in crisis themselves? To what extent has the focus on crises taken away attention from important legal questions in the day-to-day application of international law? And does the focus on crisis undermine analytic progress amongst scholars, who might think about crises as being something completely new, asking for new answers while ignoring the relevance of the existing ‘international law acquis’? This volume includes eight articles, in the domains of human rights law, migration law, environmental law, international criminal law, WTO law and European law, reflecting upon these pertinent questions, basically asking: do international lawyers do the things right or do they the right things? The Netherlands Yearbook of International Law (NYIL) was first published in 1970. It offers a forum for the publication of scholarly articles of a more general nature in the area of public international law including the law of the European Union. | <p>Important contribution to the ongoing debate on the international law acquis and the challenges of new crises</p><p>Peer reviewed articles</p><p>Current resource from the Netherlands, a country with a longstanding tradition in international law and EU law</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54507-8 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Beijing, People's Republic of China | Regulating the Takeover of Chinese Listed Companies | Divergence from the West |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 261 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 261 p. 9 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | International Economic Law, Trade Law | [NAME] | LBBM | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1 Introduction.- Chapter 2 Understanding the Context.- Chapter 3 Legal Transplantation Theory: A Theoretical Framework for Examining Chinese Takeover Law.- Chapter 4 Principles of Chinese Takeover Regulation: Economic Efficiency, Administrative Intervention and Shareholder Equality.- Chapter 5 Mandatory Bid Rule and Shareholder Equality: Legal Transplantation and Local Divergence.- Chapter 6 Miscellaneous Shareholder Protection Rules: the Influence of Legal Culture, Local Demand and Institutional Capacity in Transplantation.- Chapter 7 Regulating Takeover Defences: The UK Model in Books and the US Model in Action.- Chapter 8 Conclusion. | This book provides a comprehensive review of the Measures for Administration of Takeover of Chinese Listed Companies (the Chinese takeover law), with emphasis on the differences between the Chinese takeover law and takeover legislation in the UK, the US and Hong Kong. The Chinese M&A market has been booming at an unprecedented rate in recent years; not only domestic investors, but also foreign funds and multinational companies are actively participating on the market. For both market participants and researchers, it is crucial to understand the emerging and transitional aspects of the Chinese economy and its M&A market, and the impacts of those aspects on relevant laws. While there are ongoing academic discussions on the convergence between the Chinese takeover law and its counterparts in the UK, Hong Kong and the US, this book offers a comprehensive discussion of the divergence and focuses on key differences in the transplanted Chinese takeover law. | <p>Offers an in-depth analysis of the main regulations in Chinese takeover law from the “angle” of [NAME] supporting analysis with the most recent statistics and cases</p><p>Broadly compares relevant regulations in the UK, US, Hong Kong and Australia</p><p>Analyses regulatory rules within the Chinese legal and social context</p><p>Uses legal transplantation theory as the theoretical lens</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04593-1 | Law | Chowdhury | [NAME], O.P. Jindal Global University, Sonepat, Haryana, India | European Regulation of Medical Device and Pharmaceutical | Regulatee Expectations of Legal Certainty |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 208 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 208 p. 6 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | SCR11011 | LAB | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- 2. Conceptualizing Multilevel Regulation.- 3. Reconceptualizing [NAME]: From a Principle of Positive Law to Regulatee Expectations.- 4. Explanation of Methodological Choices.- 5. Pilot Study of Regulatory Uncertainty in Marketing Authorization of Medical Products in Europe.- 6. Case Study on Medical Devices Regulation in Europe.- 7. Case Study on Pharmaceutical Regulation in Europe.- 8. Case Study on Borderline Medical Products in Europe.- 9. Conclusion. | One of the primary functions of law is to ensure that the legal structure governing all social relations is predictable, coherent, consistent and applicable. Taken together, these characteristics of law are referred to as legal certainty. In traditional approaches to legal certainty, law is regarded as a hierarchical system of rules characterized by stability, clarity, uniformity, calculable enforcement, publicity and predictability. However, the current reality is that national legal systems no longer operate in isolation, but within a multilevel legal order, wherein norms created at both the international and regional level are directly applicable to national legal systems. Also, norm creation is no longer the exclusive prerogative of public officials of the state: private actors have an increasing influence on norm creation as well. Social scientists have referred to this phenomenon of interacting and overlapping competences as multilevel governance. Only recently have legal scholars focused attention on the increasing interconnectedness (and therefore the concomitant loss of primacy of national legal orders) between the global, European and national regulatory spheres through the concept of multilevel regulation.In this project the author uses multilevel regulation as a term to characterize a regulatory space in which the process of rule making, rule enforcement and rule adjudication (the regulatory lifecycle) is dispersed across more than one administrative or territorial level and amongst several different actors, both public and private. The author draws on the concept of a regulatory space, using it as a framing device to differentiate between specific aspects of policy fields. The relationship between actors in such a space is non-hierarchical and they may be independent of each other. The lack of central ordering of the regulatory lifecycle within this regulatory space is the most important feature of such a space. The implications of multilevel regulation for the notion of legal certainty have attracted limited attention from scholars and the demand for legal certainty in regulatory practice is still a puzzle. The book explores the idea of legal certainty in terms of the perceptions and expectations of regulatees in the context of medical products – specifically, pharmaceuticals and medical devices, which can be differentiated as two regulatory spaces and therefore form two case studies. As an exploratory project, the book necessarily explores new territory in terms of investigating legal certainty first in terms of regulatee perceptions and expectations and second, because it studies it in the context of multilevel regulation. | <p>Comprehensive overview of the marketing authorization regulation in Medical Devices and Pharmaceutical in Europe</p><p>Significant contribution to our current understanding</p><p>Detailed step by step guidance on the methodology for conducting a sociolegal case study</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04372-2 | Law | Downes | [NAME], European Consulting Company (ECCO), Brussels, Belgium | The Impact of WTO SPS Law on EU Food Regulations |  | Studies in European Economic Law and Regulation | 2 | 1 | 2014 | 266 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 266 p. 4 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | Agricultural Economics | SCW12220 | TVB | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | About the Author.- Acknowledgements.- Abbreviations.- Table of Cases.- Table of Contents.- 1 Introduction.- Part I What Lawyers Expect from the SPS Agreement and Why.- 2 Evaluating the Impact of International Law: A Taxonomy of Analytical Choices.- 3 The Standard View of the SPS Agreement: A Literature Review.- Part II Reviewing Expectations of SPS Constraint on Domestic Food Regulations in the European Context.- 4 Is Science Really The Only Thing That Counts? An Evaluation of the SPS Agreement’s Expectations of Science in the Context of EU Food Policy.- 5 Bringing in the Old and the New: The Influence of the SPS Agreement on the EU Novel Food Saga.- Part III The SPS in Action: The Emerging Transnational Governance of Food.- 6 SPS Mechanisms for a Transnational Approach to Food Governance: Transparency and Equivalence.- 7 Is Codex [NAME]? The Importance of Standards in Transnational Food Governance.- 8 Conclusion.- Appendix I.- Appendix II.- Appendix III.- Index. | This book brings a fresh perspective on the emerging field of international food law with the first detailed analysis of the process and implications of domestic compliance with the World Trade Organisation (WTO) Sanitary and Phytosanitary (SPS) Agreement. It investigates the influence of WTO disciplines on the domestic policy-making process and examines the extent to which international trade law determines European Union (EU) food regulations.Following controversial WTO rulings on genetically-modified foods and growth hormones in beef, awareness and criticism of global rules governing food has grown considerably. Yet the real impact of this international legal meta-framework on domestic regulations has remained obscure to practitioners and largely unexplored by legal commentators. This book examines the emergence of transnational governance practices set in motion by the SPS Agreement and their role in facilitating agricultural trade. In so doing, it complements and challenges conventional accounts of the SPS regime dominated by analysis of WTO disputes.It reviews legal commentary of the SPS Agreement to understand why WTO rules are so commonly characterised as a significant threat to domestic food policy preferences. It then takes on these assumptions through an in-depth review of food policies and decision-making practices in the EU, revealing both the potential and limits of WTO law to shape EU policies. It finally examines two important venues for the generation of global food norms – the WTO SPS Committee and [NAME] – to evaluate the practice and significance of transnational governance in this domain. Through detailed case studies including novel foods, food additives, vitamin and mineral supplements and transparency and equivalence procedures, this book provides a richer account of compliance and exposes the subtle, but important influence of WTO obligations. | <p>Offers valuable insights on the impact of WTO rules on EU food policy </p><p>Raises important questions about how we analyse and evaluate WTO law</p><p>Challenges prevailing criticisms of the SPS Agreement through careful empirical analysis, offering a richer understanding of the SPS regime </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04464-4 | Law | Ervo | [NAME], University of Örebro, Örebro, Sweden; [NAME], University of Tromsø, Tromsø, Norway | The Future of Civil Litigation | Access to Courts and Court-annexed Mediation in the Nordic Countries |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 468 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 468 p. 12 illus., 5 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Dispute Resolution, Mediation, Arbitration | SCR19090 | LNAC5 | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Understanding the Civil Justice in the Nordic Countries.- Mediation and the Role of Courts.- Access to Courts.- Problems and Solutions.- Outlook and Conclusion. | This book offers an analysis of the current trends and developments in Nordic civil litigation and is divided into four main parts. In the first part a picture of the current civil litigation landscape is provided by focusing on whether there is a truly Nordic form of civil litigation, the current state of Nordic civil litigation, the recent major reforms of civil procedure legislation and the effects of Europeanization. In the second part, the way rules on court-connected mediation have been implemented and practiced in the Nordic countries is discussed. The authors offer their insights on why court-connected mediation has not been fully embraced by Nordic lawyers and the Nordic approach to this type of mediation is contrasted with the Austrian and German approaches. In the third part, recent developments affecting access to justice in the Nordic countries are discussed. Among the topics are changes in legal aid schemes, the impact of recent civil procedure law reforms, hindrances for larger companies to use litigation as a method of dispute resolution and differences in costs and delays. Additionally, Alternative Dispute Resolution and Class or Group Actions are explored as methods to enhance access to justice. The potential adverse effects of Alternative Dispute Resolution and Group Actions are also examined, both in a Nordic and European context. In the final part, conclusions are drawn from both historical and future-oriented perspectives. | <p>Fills the gap on English material on Scandinavian law</p><p>Very current theme from the European point of view (directives on mediation, EU plans on class actions etc.)</p><p>Written by talented professionals in the field with fresh ideas</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8809-0 | Law | Evans | [NAME], Curtin University Law School, Bentley, Perth, WA, Australia; [NAME], Murdoch University School of Law, Perth, WA, Australia | Global Perspectives on Subsidiarity |  | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 37 | 1 | 2014 | 217 | Hard cover | Book | XIV, 217 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Philosophy of Law | SCE27000 | LAB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Biographical Details.- 1. The Global Relevance of Subsidiarity: An Overview; [NAME] and [NAME] Zimmermann.- 2. Subsidiarity in the [NAME] of Aristotle and Aquinas; [NAME] Subsidiarity in Catholic Social Theory; [NAME] Brennan.- 4. The Relationship Between Subsidiarity and Sphere Sovereignty; [NAME] Weinberger.- 5. Subsidiarity and Social Pluralism; [NAME] Chaplin.- 6. Subsidiarity, Democracy and Individual Rights in Brazil; [NAME] Zimmermann.- 7. Can Subsidiarity Reform the Modern Welfare State?; The Rev Robert A Sirico.- 8. Subsidiarity and the German Constitution; Jürgen Bröhmer.- 9. Subsidiarity as Judicial and Legislative Review Principles in the European Union; Gabriël A Moens and [NAME] Trone.- 10. Subsidiarity and Federalism: A Case Study of the Australian Constitution and its Interpretation; [NAME] Evans.- 11. Subsidiarity and the Global Order; [NAME]. | Global Perspectives on Subsidiarity is the first book of its kind exclusively devoted to the principle of subsidiarity. It sheds new light on the principle and explores and develops the many applications of the principle of subsidiarity.  The book provides a comprehensive overview of the principle in all its facets, from its philosophical origins in the writings of Aristotle and Aquinas, to its development in Catholic social doctrine, and its emergence as a key principle in European Union Law. This book explores the relationship between subsidiarity and concepts such as sphere sovereignty and social pluralism. It analyses subsidiarity in light of globalisation, federalism, democracy, individual rights and welfare, and discusses subsidiarity and the Australian, Brazilian and German [NAME] | <p>The first book specifically devoted to the principle of subsidiarity in all its facets</p><p>Brings together all the scholarship on the principle of subsidiarity in a single volume</p><p>Explores and develops new applications of subsidiarity</p><p>Has broad international focus, incorporating European Union Law as well as other countries such as Australia, Canada and the U.S.A</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05719-4 | Law | Floridi | [NAME], , UK | Protection of Information and the Right to Privacy - A New Equilibrium? |  | Law, Governance and Technology Series | 17 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. 11 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | International IT and Media [NAME], Intellectual Property Law | SCR19100 | LN | Computers and Society | SCI24040 | UBJ | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface; [NAME] Floridi.- Biographies.- The right to be forgotten: dynamics of privacy and publicity; Giovanni Sartor.- Legal memories and the right to be forgotten; Ugo Pagallo and Massimo Durante.- Location Data, Purpose Binding and Contextual Integrity: What’s the Message?; [NAME] Hildebrandt.- With Great Power Comes Great Responsibility: Proposed Principles of Digital Due Process for ICT Companies; [NAME] Nunziato.- The Political Economy of Data: EU Privacy Regulation and the International Redistribution of Its Costs; [NAME] The Rise of the MASs; [NAME] Floridi.- An Ethical Framework for Information Warfare; Mariarosaria Taddeo.- Index. | This book presents the latest research on the challenges and solutions affecting the equilibrium between freedom of speech, freedom of information, information security and the right to informational privacy. Given the complexity of the topics addressed, the book shows how old legal and ethical frameworks may need to be not only updated, but also supplemented and complemented by new conceptual solutions. Neither a conservative attitude (“more of the same”) nor a revolutionary zeal (“never seen before”) is likely to lead to satisfactory solutions. Instead, more reflection and better conceptual design are needed, not least to harmonise different perspectives and legal frameworks internationally. The focus of the book is on how we may reconcile high levels of information security with robust degrees of informational privacy, also in connection with recent challenges presented by phenomena such as “big data” and security scandals, as well as new legislation initiatives, such as those concerning “the right to be forgotten” and the use of personal data in biomedical research. The book seeks to offer analyses and solutions of the new tensions, in order to build a fair, shareable and sustainable balance in this vital area of human interactions. | <p>Offers interdisciplinary and comprehensive analyses of both theoretical and applied problems</p><p>Presents an explicit focus on legal, ethical and policy-making analyses and solutions</p><p>Enables readers to identify clearly key issues and approaches in the debate on the new equilibrium</p><p>First collection of essays to address the problem of the new equilibrium head-on</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04698-3 | Law | Galley | [NAME], Southampton Solent University, Southampton, UK | Shipbreaking: Hazards and Liabilities |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 236 | Hard cover | Book | XXXVII, 236 p. 6 illus., 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | International Environmental Law | SCR19070 | LBBP | Law of the Sea, Air and [NAME] | [NAME] | LBB | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Industry Development and the Process of Disposal.- 2. The Role and Application of International Law.- 3. Legislation.- 4. Ship Registration, Owner Anonymity and Sub-Standard Shipping.- 5. Case Studies and Legal Judgements.- 6 The Hong Kong Convention 2009.- 7. Other Proposals.- 8. Conclusions. | Most of the world’s redundant ships are scrapped on the beaches of the Indian sub-continent, largely by hand. As well as cargo residues and wastes, ships contain high levels of hazardous materials that are released into the surrounding ecology when scrapped. The scrapping process is labour-intensive and largely manual; injuries and death are commonplace.Ship breaking was a relatively obscure industry until the late 1990s. In just 12 years, action by environmental NGOs has led to the ratification of an international treaty targeting the extensive harm to human and environmental health arising from this heavy, polluting industry; it has also produced important case law.Attempts to regulate the industry via the Basel Convention have resulted in a strong polarization of opinion as to its applicability and various international guidelines have also failed because of their voluntary nature. The adoption of the Hong Kong Convention in 2009 was a serious attempt to introduce international controls to this industry. | <p>Uses a range of legal case studies to examine the arguments offered for and against the status quo of the industry</p><p>Examines the industry in terms of international, regional and national legal instruments, both current and proposed, that impact upon the industry</p><p>Considers the development of the new Ship Recycling Convention and its provisions as well as a number of perceived lacunae</p><p>Also considers new initiatives in ship breaking that are developing both independently and to promote the adoption of the Convention</p><p>Considers the selective use of flag registration and its role in providing anonymity from liability</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04503-0 | Law | Gilliéron | [NAME], Fernuniversität Schweiz Rechtswissenschaftliche Fakultät, Brig, Switzerland | Public Prosecutors in the United States and Europe | A Comparative Analysis with Special Focus on Switzerland, France, and Germany |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 385 | Hard cover | Book | XXIV, 385 p. 5 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Criminology & Criminal Justice | SCX15000 | [NAME] | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Aim, Approach, and Methodology of the Study.- Methods for Coping with Overloaded Criminal Justice Systems.- The Criminal Justice Systems Studied.- History of the Public Prosecutor.- Public Prosecutors in the United States: Position, Powers, and Accountability.- Public Prosecutors in Switzerland: Position, Powers, and Accountability.- Overview of Public Prosecutors in Germany: Position, Powers, and Accountability.- Overview of Public Prosecutors in France: Position, Powers, and Accountability.- Comparative Overview of Position, Powers, and Accountability of Public Prosecutors.- Thematic Problems and the Prospects for Reform.- Conclusion. | This research examines the role of prosecutors within the United States and in Switzerland and is completed by an overview of the prosecution institutions in France and Germany. The research recognizes that despite seemingly very different legal traditions and structures, prosecutors in these systems are similar enough that each system might learn from the others. Drawing upon the experiences of other nations, this research proposes solutions to the problems identified in connection with the position and powers of public prosecutors in the United States. Furthermore, it outlines the problems related to the increase of prosecutorial power and the lessons the European criminal justice systems surveyed can draw from the experience in the US. In terms of methodology, this research not only considers formal legal provisions but also systematic structural factors, academic literature and statistics revealing how the law and governing principles actually work in practice. | <p>Treats a highly topical and "hot" subject, both in the U.S. and in Europe: Use and misuse of prosecutorial powers</p><p>Comprehensive analysis of the US American prosecution system those in continental law jurisdictions (Switzerland, Germany, France)</p><p>Includes statistical data on prosecutorial decision making not available to the public and comparative tables and figures for an overview of key issues</p><p>Provides a detailed discussion of recently reformed continental systems</p><p>Given the many common features of the American and the Swiss prosecution systems, this analysis provides many new approaches to the debate on how to improve the American prosecution system</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05022-5 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], [NAME] (VUB), Brussels, Belgium | The Emergence of Personal Data Protection as a Fundamental Right of the EU |  | Law, Governance and Technology Series | 16 | 1 | 2014 | 236 | Hard cover | Book | I, 236 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | International IT and Media [NAME], Intellectual Property Law | SCR19100 | LN | Legal Aspects of Computing | SCI24059 | UBL | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Dedication.- Acknowledgements.- Abbreviations.- Table of contents.- Chapter 1: Introduction.- Part A.- Chapter 2: Privacy and the Protection of Personal Data Avant la Lettre.- Chapter 3: The Surfacing of National Norms on Data Processing in Europe.- Chapter 4: The Materialisation of Data Protection in International Instruments.- Part B.- Chapter 5: The Beginning of EU Data Protection.- Chapter 6: EU Fundamental Rights and Personal Data Protection.- Chapter 7: The Right to the Protection of Personal Data and EU law.- Chapter 8: Conclusions. | This book explores the coming into being in European Union (EU) law of the fundamental right to personal data protection. Approaching legal evolution through the lens of law as text, it unearths the steps that led to the emergence of this new right. It throws light on the right’s significance, and reveals the intricacies of its relationship with privacy.The right to personal data protection is now officially recognised as an EU fundamental right. As such, it is expected to play a critical role in the future European personal data protection legal landscape, seemingly displacing the right to privacy. This volume is based on the premise that an accurate understanding of the right’s emergence is crucial to ensure its correct interpretation and development.Key questions addressed include: How did the new right surface in EU law? How could the EU Charter of Fundamental Rights claim to render ‘more visible’ an invisible right? And how did EU law allow for the creation of a new right while ensuring consistency with existing legal instruments and case law?The book first investigates the roots of personal data protection, studying the redefinition of privacy in the United States in the 1960s, as well as pioneering developments in European countries and in international organisations. It then analyses the EU’s involvement since the 1970s up to the introduction of legislative proposals in 2012. It grants particular attention to changes triggered in law by language and, specifically, by the coexistence of languages and legal systems that determine meaning in EU law. Embracing simultaneously EU law’s multilingualism and the challenging notion of the untranslatability of words, this work opens up an inspiring way of understanding legal change.This book will appeal to legal scholars, policy makers, legal practitioners, privacy and personal data protection activists, and philosophers of law, as well as, more generally, anyone interested in how law works. | <p>First book to cover the emerging EU right to personal data protection from a genuine European perspective</p><p>Sheds light in at a timely juncture on a right of unprecedented significance in EU law in the context of the on-going review of the EU data protection and discussions in the Council of Europe</p><p>Shows that the words "privacy" and "personal data protection" are not always synonymous, explaining when (and why) they can be</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04794-2 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Aristotle University of Thessaloniki, [NAME], Greece | Trade Marks and Free Trade | A Global Analysis |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 548 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 548 p. 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | International Economic Law, Trade Law | [NAME] | LBBM | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Introduction.- Part II: Exhaustion of trade mark rights and legality of parallel imports under GATT/WTO Law.- Part III: Exhaustion of trade mark rights and legality of parallel imports under European Union law.- Part IV: Exhaustion of trade mark rights and legality of parallel imports in national laws outside the European Economic Area.- Part V: Conclusion. | This book is the first study to examine the issue of the legality of parallel imports of trademarked goods under the most important legal systems on an international level, namely under GATT/WTO law, EU law and the laws of the ten major trading partners of the European Union. Part I consists of a general approach to the phenomenon of parallel importation and of a presentation of the theories that have been suggested to resolve the above-mentioned issue. The rule of exhaustion of rights, of which there are three types (rule of national, regional and international exhaustion of rights), is proposed as the most effective instrument to deal with the issue in question. Part II examines the question of exhaustion of trademark rights in light of the provisions of GATT/WTO Law. Part III analyzes the elements of the EU provisions on exhaustion of trademark rights (Articles 7 of Directive 2008/95/EC and 13 of Regulation (EC) 207/2009) and some specific issues relating to the application of these provisions. Part IV presents the regimes of exhaustion of trademark rights recognized in the European Union’s current ten most significant trading partners. The book is the first legal study to welcome, in light of economic analysis, the approach adopted by GATT/WTO law and EU law to the question of the geographical scope of the exhaustion of the trademark rights rule. It includes all the case law developed on an international level on the issue of the legality of parallel imports of trademarked goods and a comprehensive overview of the scientific literature concerning the phenomenon of parallel imports in general and the legality of parallel imports of trademarked goods. All the views expressed in the book are based on the European Court of Justice’s most recent case law and that of the courts of the most important trading partners of the European Union. | <p>First global analysis of the legality of parallel imports of trade-marked goods  </p><p>Covers the most important legal systems on an international level, namely GATT/WTO law, EU law and the laws of the EU’s ten major trading partners </p><p>First legal study to analyze the economic implications of parallel imports Includes all the case law developed at an international level on parallel imports of trade-marked goods </p><p>Based on the most recent case law of the ECJ and the courts of the EU’s most important trading partners</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-40290-6 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], Eurojust, The Hague, The Netherlands | Exchange of Information and Data Protection in Cross-border Criminal Proceedings in Europe |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 599 | Hard cover | Book | XXVI, 599 p. 3 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 79.99 | 79.99 | 85.59 | 87.99 | 72 | 106.5 | English | Law | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | International Criminal Law | SCR19040 | LBBZ | Law | Professional book | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- European Policy and Legal Framework.- EUROPOL, EUROJUST and OLAF. EU networks on Administrative, Police and Judicial Cooperation on Criminal Matters.- Judicial Cooperation on Criminal Matters.- New Developments.- Legislative Annex. | In the past 10 years, the Member States of the European Union (EU) have intensified their exchange of information for the purposes of preventing and combating serious cross-border crime, as manifested in three main aspects. Firstly, there is a need to ensure the practical application of innovative principles (availability, mutual recognition) and concepts (Information Management Strategy, European Information Exchange Model) for tackling criminal organisations and networks that threaten the Internal Security of the EU. Secondly, there has been a gradual consolidation of EU agencies and bodies (Eurojust, Europol) aimed at promoting cooperation and dialogue among law enforcement officials and judicial authorities responsible for preventing and combating drug trafficking, trafficking in human beings, child pornography, and other serious trans-national offences. Thirdly, important EU information systems and databases (Prüm, SIS-II, ECRIS) have been created, enabling law enforcement and judicial authorities to gain access to essential information on criminal phenomena and organisations.                                                               Pursuing a practice-orientated approach, this work provides comprehensive coverage of all these measures, as well as the applicable rules governing data quality, data protection and data security. It is especially intended for law enforcement and judicial authorities who need to develop the appropriate expertise for the practical application of the above-mentioned principles. It also offers a solid basis of practical training material for police training centres and judicial schools. | <p>Useful tips for clear understanding of the availability principle, mutual recognition principle, internal security of the EU, European Information Exchange Model and related policy concepts</p><p>Structured and clear view on the added value of involving Eurojust, Europol, OLAF and competent networks in cross-border cases</p><p>Practical orientated explanations on the best use of EU information systems (Prüm, SIS-II, ECRIS), channels and tools (SIRENE, Swedish Council Decision, EAW, confiscation order) in fighting serious crime</p><p>Recommendations and guidance on how to ensure data integrity, data protection and data security in cross-border cases</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-45415-8 | Law | Hill | [NAME], Hill & Associates, Geneva, Geneva, Switzerland | The New International Telecommunication Regulations and the Internet | A Commentary and Legislative History |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 184 | Hard cover | Book | X, 184 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | International IT and Media [NAME], Intellectual Property Law | SCR19100 | LN | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  | Distribution rights for Switzerland: Schulthess Juristische Medien AG, Zurich, Switzerland | History.- The 1988 International Telecommunication Regulations.- The Path to Revision.- What Happened at WCIT.- Overall Analysis of the 2012 treaty.- Article-by-Article Commentary.- Resolutions.- Conclusions and Implications for National Legislators and Regulators. | This book provides a clear and thorough account of the process leading up to the revision of the International Telecommunication Regulations (ITRs) one of the four treaties administered by the ITU. The author’s inside view of the events and his legal analysis of the new ITRs, are different from that what has been aired in most other accounts to date. His systematic approach shows how much of the criticism of the WCIT-12 process and of the ITRs themselves, is unjustified. This book provides the most accurate view to date of what the ITRs really mean and of what really happened at WCIT-12, which was undoubtedly a key event in the history of telecommunication policy and which is likely to have significant long-term effects.The book covers in some detail the events leading to the non-signature of the treaty by a significant number of states, outlines possible consequences of that split between states, and offers possible ways forward. The book includes a detailed article-by-article analysis of the new ITRs, explaining their implications and concludes with recommendations for national authorities. It concludes with an analysis of events from the point of view of dispute resolution theory, offering suggestions for how to avoid divisive outcomes in the future.'This is an excellent book, and quite rich and comprehensive. The topic is important and the book will surely be of interest to regulators, diplomats, policy experts, and all those who participated in WCIT. The author is uniquely qualified to write an analysis of the new ITRs and an account of the Conference. This book will be a good reference for the next Plenipotentiary Conference to be held in 2014 which is going to discuss follow-up to WCIT-12.' [NAME], United Arab Emirates.'This is an authoritative expert account of a moment of high significance for vital issues with respect to international networks.' Professor [NAME], University of Illinois.'This is an excellent and timely work.' Professor [NAME], [NAME], University of London.'Interested persons, businesses and governments can draw their policies from the assessments of a telecommunications insider as presented in this book. The manifold arguments enlightening the interpretation of the provisions of the ITRs might become an invaluable guidance for those who apply the ITRs in the future.'Professor Dr. [NAME], University of Zurich. | <p>Article-by-article analysis of the new ITRs</p><p>Of interest to anybody involved in telecommunication policy matters and international negotiations</p><p>Provides an account of facts regarding the International Telecommunication Regulations (ITRs)</p><p>Offers suggestions for how to avoid divisive outcomes in the future</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-6265-007-7 | Law | Jinks | [NAME], University of Texas, Austin, TX, USA; Jackson Nyamuya Maogoto, University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; [NAME], [NAME], Greece | Applying International Humanitarian Law to Judicial and Quasi Judicial Bodies | International and Domestic Aspects |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 475 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | International Humanitarian Law, Law of Armed Conflict | SCR19030 | LBBS | Public International Law | SCR19000 | LBB | Law | Contributed volume | T.M.C. Asser Press | In production | 2014-06-15 00:00:00 |  |  |  | The work analyzes the impact and implementation of international humanitarian law in judicial and quasi judicial bodies. Moreover, acknowledging the high impact domestic jurisdictions have in the configuration of international law, the book does not rest only in an analysis of the international jurisprudence, but delves also into the question of how domestic courts relate to international humanitarian law issues. | <p>Depicts international humanitarian law’s contemporary evolution through international and domestic judicial bodies</p><p>Treats also quasi-judicial bodies as bodies whose reports can influence international humanitarian law</p><p>Covers the multi-faced facets of international humanitarian law, giving a broader view to academics as well as practitioners</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04524-5 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], London, UK | Intellectual Property Protection of Traditional Cultural Expressions | Folklore in China |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 226 | Hard cover | Book | X, 226 p. 11 illus., 9 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | International IT and Media [NAME], Intellectual Property Law | SCR19100 | LN | Cultural Heritage | SCV35000 | JFC | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- 2. Intellectual Property System: Is It Enough to Protect Folklore?.- 3. How Far from Reaching the Goal: Legal Protection of Chinese Folklore.- 4. Construction of a Suitable Private Legal Protection Framework for Chinese Folklore.- 5. Conclusion. | The work reviews issues concerning the protection of folklore through the intellectual property legal system, then explores two main issues in the protection of Chinese folklore. The first issue is the influence of Chinese traditional culture on the Chinese intellectual property legal system and Chinese society. The second concerns the deficiencies of the Chinese intellectual property system with regard to folklore. Both issues are examined through a survey on the weak public recognition of intellectual property law and folklore in Chinese society. The book also reveals the practical issues that have arisen in Southwest China through case studies. After analysing these issues, the work designs a model law specifically for folklore and also provides suggestions for how the current intellectual property legal system could establish a comprehensive legal protection system for folklore. Furthermore, the work shows that its proposed model law is effective in practice by resolving the issues in the case studies presented. | <p>Provides an overview of the overall Chinese legal system with regard to the protection of folklore including public and private law sector</p><p>Provides a new cultural perspective for the reader to consider an alternative approach to the IP protection of folklore</p><p>Concerns both theoretical and empirical research which provides a vivid and real depiction of the current situation concerning the protection of folklore</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54040-0 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], [NAME], Guangzhou, People's Republic of China | Judicial Discretion within Adjudicative Committee Proceedings in China | A Bounded Rationality Analysis |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 208 | Hard cover | Book | X, 208 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Law, general | [NAME] | L |  |  |  | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- The Organization of the Court.- Committee Goal.- Information Processing.- Committee Composition.- Committee Procedure.- Discretion, Judicial Independence and Accountability.- [NAME]. | This book studies the organizational influences on judicial discretion within Adjudicative Committee (AC) proceedings in China. It argues that institutional reforms and practice have mainly reduced judicial discretion within AC proceedings through the rationalization of organizational processes. This central argument will be of particular interest to the readers, as previous studies offer little insight into the overall impacts of judicial institution reforms. This book is the first that uses the bounded rationality theory developed in economics and related disciplines to formulate an analytic framework for a systematic and comprehensive examination of the impacts of organizational factors on discretion within [NAME]’ decision-making processes. Readers will gain a practical and fresh understanding of the Chinese judicial reforms. | <p>Covers a normative breakthrough in the Chinese legal system</p><p>Presents an original theoretical hypothesis</p><p>Interdisciplinary lens employed to offer fresh perspectives</p><p>Offers a closer examination of the Chinese judicial reform</p><p>Includes a vast amount of empirical evidence</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03764-6 | Law | Mangiameli | [NAME], National Research Council - Institute for, Rome, Italy | Italian Regionalism: Between Unitary Traditions and Federal Processes | Investigating Italy's Form of State | Essays on Federalism and Regionalism | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 399 | Hard cover | Book | X, 399 p. 16 illus., 7 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | The Regions and the Reforms: Issues Resolved and Problems Pending by Stelio Mangiameli.- A Short History of Regionalism in Italy Since the Republican Constitution. Italian Regionalism and its Evolution by [NAME] Desideri.- Between Spain and Germany. The Historical Models of Italian Regionalism by [NAME] [NAME] by [NAME] and [NAME] Sirilli.- The Special Regions and the Autonomous Provinces by [NAME] and Davide Scarpone.- [NAME] and the Regional forms of Government by Nicola Viceconte.- Legislation by the Ordinary Statute Regions: Powers and Subjects by [NAME] Arabia.- The Administrative Structure of Italian Regions by Luca Castelli.- Regions and Local Authorities by Alessandro Gentilini.- Rules and procedures for the participation of Italian Regions in European Policy Making by Antonino Iacoviello.- The Regions and Their International Activities by [NAME] Saputelli.- Regional Finance in Italy. Past and Future by Enrico Buglione.- The Italian Health Care System and the Economics of the Right to Health by [NAME] as a Workshop for Regional Welfare Policies by Giulia Maria Napolitano.- The Judicial Construction of Italian Regionalism by [NAME]. | The object of this book is to describe the institutional modifications of the Italian form of state more than ten years after the review of Title V – Part II of the Italian Constitution – for an audience that goes well beyond the Italian national boundaries. The fifteen essays that make up the book discuss the birth and evolution of the Italian regionalism (including those regions with Special Statutes) as well as reforms of 1999-2001. A particular attention is devoted to the role of autonomy in defining regional statutes, regional forms of government, and regulatory and administrative powers. These are subjects on which there is by now an abundant body of constitutional case law, which is extensively referred to by the chapters. The role of the regions vis-à-vis the local bodies and vis-à-vis the European and international order is also discussed, as the right to negotiate with foreign powers has now been conferred on the regions. Lastly, the volume presents contributions on regional finance and on the new law on fiscal federalism, as well as on regional powers in the area of health and welfare. | <p>First book in the international context on this issue</p><p>Presents a comprehensive description of Italian regionalism and its difficulties</p><p>Offers an easy understanding (approached sector by sector) of the many demands for reform arising from different quarters in Italy</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-6265-016-9 | Law | Okoth | [NAME], University of Nairobi, Nairobi, Kenya | The Crime of Conspiracy in International Criminal Law |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 240 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | International Criminal Law | SCR19040 | LBBZ |  |  |  | Law | Monograph | T.M.C. Asser Press | Planned | 2014-06-12 00:00:00 |  |  |  | This book looks at the relevance of conspiracy in international criminal law. It establishes that conspiracy was introduced into international criminal law for purposes of prevention and to combat the collective nature of participation in commission of international crimes. Its use as a tool of accountability has, however, been affected by conflicting conceptual perceptions of conspiracy from common law and civil law countries. This conflict is displayed in the decisions on conspiracy by the international criminal tribunals, and finally culminates into the exclusion of punishment of conspiracy in the Rome Statute. It is questionable whether this latest development on the law of conspiracy was a prudent decision. While the function of conspiracy as a mode of liability is satisfactorily covered by the modes of participation in the Rome Statute, its function as a purely inchoate crime used to punish incomplete crimes is missing. This book creates a case for inclusion in the Rome Statute, punishment of conspiracies involving international crimes that do not extend beyond the conceptual stage, to reinforce the Statute’s purpose of prevention. The conspiracy concept proposed is one that reflects the characteristics acceptable under both common law and civil law systems. | <p>Establishes that conduct underlying the crime of conspiracy is punishable both in common law and civil law countries and sets out the conceptual similarities and differences in both jurisdictions</p><p>Illustrates the function of conspiracy in prosecution of international crimes and analyses its influence in developing other modes of participation</p><p>Discusses the failure to include conspiracy in the Rome Statute and its impact in future prosecution of international crimes</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-45298-7 | Law | Radu | [NAME], Geneva, Switzerland; Jean-Marie Chenou, Faculté des sciences sociales et politiques, Lausanne, Switzerland; [NAME], University of Zurich Faculty of Law, Zurich, Switzerland | The Evolution of Global Internet Governance | Principles and Policies in the Making |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 916 | Hard cover | Book | X, 916 p. 5 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | International IT and Media [NAME], Intellectual Property Law | SCR19100 | LN | Legal Aspects of Computing | SCI24059 | UBL | Law | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  | Distribution rights for Switzerland: Schulthess [NAME], Zurich, Switzerland | Introduction: Global Internet Policy: a Fifteen-Year Long Debate.- Part 1. Actors, Institutions and Principles of Internet Governance.- Chapter 1 Global Internet Governance: Governance without Governors.- Chapter 2 Competing Institutional Trajectories for Global Regulation—Internet in a Fragmented World.- Chapter 3 Internet Freedom and the Constitutionalization of Internet Governance.- Part 2. Multistakeholderism and its Limits.- Chapter 4 Internet Governance: The Last Gasp of Colonialism, or Imperialism by Other Means?.- Chapter 5 Visions of Political Power: Treaty Making and [NAME] Understanding.- Chapter 6 Use [and Abuse] of Multistakeholderism in the Internet.- Part 3. Internet Security between Competition and Cooperation.- Chapter 7 Chinese Internet Governance—Some Domestic and Foreign Issues.- Chapter 8 Extending Cybersecurity, Securing Private Internet Infrastructure: the US Einstein Program and its Implications for Internet Governance.- Chapter 9 Open Security. Contributions of Networked Approaches to the Challenge of Democratic Internet Security Governance.- Conclusions and Way Forward. From Nested Dilemmas to Democratic Internet Governance. | The volume explores the consequences of recent events in global Internet policy and possible ways forward following the 2012 World Conference on International Telecommunications (WCIT-12). It offers expert views on transformations in governance, the future of multistakeholderism and the salience of cybersecurity. Based on the varied backgrounds of the contributors, the book provides an interdisciplinary perspective drawing on international relations, international law and communication studies. It addresses not only researchers interested in the evolution of new forms of transnational networked governance, but also practitioners who wish to get a scholarly reflection on current regulatory developments. It notably provides firsthand accounts on the role of the WCIT-12 in the future of Internet governance. | <p>Consequences of recent events in global internet policy are explored</p><p>Interdisciplinary perspective including international relations, international law and communication studies</p><p>Offers expert views on transformations in governance, the future of multistakeholderism and the salience of cybersecurity</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04590-0 | Law | Rossi | [NAME], [NAME] of Bologna, Bologna, Italy; [NAME], Alma Mater Studiorum - University of Bologna, Bologna, Italy | The EU after Lisbon | Amending or [NAME] with the Existing Treaties? |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 334 | Hard cover | Book | X, 334 p. 2 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | International Relations | SCX18040 | JPS | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I The European Union at Crossroads - General Issues on Treaties’ Revision: 1. A New Revision of the EU Treaties after Lisbon? by [NAME] Rossi.- 2. Parameters of Constitutional Development - The Fiscal Compact In Between EU and Member State Constitutions by [NAME] Besselink.- 3. The Allocation of Powers/Competences between the EU and the Member States - What Can We Learn From Pre-emption in the United States? by [NAME]. Solidarity, Flexibility and the Euro-Crisis - Where Do Principles Fit In? by [NAME] McDonnell.- 5. EU Loyalty after Lisbon - An Expectation Gap to Be Filled? by [NAME] II Fundamental Rights after [NAME]: 6. The Charter of Fundamental Rights and the Court of Justice of the European Union - A First Assessment of the Interpretation of the Charter’s Horizontal Provisions by [NAME] Jacqué.- 7. The Phenomenon of Reverse Discrimination - An Anomaly in the European Constitutional Order? by [NAME] 8. Access to Health Care in the Post-Lisbon Era and the Genuine Enjoyment of the EU Citizens’ Rights by [NAME] Federico.- Part III Revisiting the EU External Relations: 9. Revisiting the Lisbon Treaty’s Constitutional Design of EU External Relations by [NAME] and [NAME] Ramopoulos.- 10. Coherence vs. [NAME]? The Case of the European External Action Service by Mauro Gatti.- 11. Article 8 TEU and the Revision of the European Neighbourhood Policy by [NAME] Comelli.- Part IV Conclusions: 12. Conclusions by [NAME]. | The book contains a collection of high-quality academic and expert contributions dealing with the central question of whether the Lisbon Treaty needs further revision. Due to the difficulties European Union actors have encountered in implementing the Lisbon Treaty’s reform and the inadequacies of the current legal framework brought to light by post-Lisbon practice, the volume focuses on possible innovations and functional approaches to improve the Union’s response to the challenges confronting it.In doing so, the volume first takes a horizontal approach to the Treaty’ revision and considers some constitutional features showing the interaction between the EU and its Member States (namely, the parameters of constitutional developments, the allocation of competences, the principles of solidarity and loyal cooperation). Then, the focus shifts to the question of fundamental rights within the EU’s constitutional framework, one of the most relevant innovations of the Lisbon Treaty being the incorporation of the Charter of Fundamental Rights into the Union’s primary law. The last part of the volume is devoted to another domain significantly reshaped by the Lisbon reform, namely, the Union’s external dimension. ECJ Advocate General [NAME]’s conclusions highlight the common themes emerging from the various contributions, stressing the need for a more general supranational approach to the political crisis the Union is going through.The content of this book will be of great value to academics, students, judges, practitioners and all others interested in the legal discourse on the progressive development of the European Union legal order. | <p>Comprehensive analysis on the need to amend the post-Lisbon EU Treaties</p><p>Gives the reader a clear and complete understanding on the way in which the EU primary law is able to face the present and future challenges of the Union</p><p>In-depth coverage of all the principal constitutional developments in different areas of EU law</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8934-9 | Law | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Sydney, Sydney, NSW, Australia | Rights Before Courts | A Study of Constitutional Courts in Postcommunist States of Central and Eastern Europe |  |  | 2 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 485 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | SCR11011 | LAB | Philosophy of Law | SCE27000 | LAB | Law | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-06-09 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface to the Second Edition.- Introduction.- Part 1.- 1. The Model of Constitutional Review In Central And Eastern Europe: An Overview.- 2. Constitutional Courts in Search if Legitimacy.- 3. The Model of Judicial Review And Its Implications.- 4. Constitutional Courts and Legislation.- Part II.- 5. Judicial Review And Protection of Constitutional Rights.- 6. Personal, Civil and Political Rights and Liberties.- 7. [NAME]8. Equality and Minority Rights.- 9. “Decommunisation”, “Lustration” and Constitutional Continuity.- 10. Restrictions of Rights.- General Literature.- Index. | This is a completely revised and updated second edition of Rights Before Courts (2005, paper edition 2008). This book carefully examines the most recent wave of the emergence and case law of activist constitutional courts: those that were set up after the fall of communism in Central and Eastern Europe. In contrast to most other analysts and scholars, the study does not take for granted that they are a “force for good” but rather subjects them to critical scrutiny against a background of wide-ranging comparative and theoretical analysis of constitutional judicial review in the modern world. The new edition takes in new case law and constitutional developments in the decade since the first edition, including considering the recent disturbing disempowerment of the Hungarian Constitutional Court (which previously was probably the most powerful constitutional court in the world) resulting from the fundamental constitutional changes brought about by the Fidesz government. | <p>The only up-to date and comprehensive study of judicial review in central and eastern Europe</p><p>Offers a unique insight into constitutional life of post-communist states</p><p>An indispensable resource for any student and scholar of comparative constitutionalism</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54659-4 | Law | Schmiegelow | [NAME], Université Catholique de Louvain, Louvain-la-Neuve, Belgium; [NAME], Güstrow, Germany | Institutional Competition between Common Law and Civil Law | Theory and Policy |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 485 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 485 p. 33 illus., 15 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | SCR11011 | LAB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Introduction.- Part II: Testing the Economic Impact of Common Law and Civil Law in Today’s Developed Countries.- Part III: Overcoming the Legacies of Colonial Transplants of Common Law and Civil Law in Developing Countries and of Socialist Legal Origin in Transforming Countries.- Part IV: [NAME] and Legal Reforms.- Part V: From Functional Comparisons to Strategic Choice.- Part VI: Conclusion. | This book addresses two countervailing challenges to theory and policy in law and economics. The first is the rise of legal origins theory, which denies the comparative law view of convergence between common law and civil law by the assertion of an economic superiority of common law. The second is the series of economic crises in the very financial markets on which that assertion was based. Both trends unsettled certainties about the rule of law and institutional economics.Meeting legal origins theory in its main areas of political science, sociology and economics, the book extends the interdisciplinary reach to neglected aspects of comparative law, legal history, dynamic econometric analysis and 'quasi-natural experiments' with counterfactual evidence of different institutional regimes in divided countries. These combined methodological tools make tests of the economic impact of different legal origins much more reliable. This is shown for developed and newly industrialized countries as well as developing, transforming and emerging countries with or without financial center advantage, affected or not by financial crises. The Asian financial crises and the American subprime crisis have been, or could have been resolved using the resources of common law or civil law.  These cases and data on access to justice in Africa, Asia and Latin America reveal the problem of substantive law remaining 'law on the books' without efficient procedural rules and judicial structures. The single most striking common law-civil law divide is that lawyer-dominated common law procedure is slower and costlier than judge-managed civil law procedure.Countries as diverse as the Netherlands, Japan, and China show functional interaction between culture and law in legal reforms. Such interaction can reduce the occurrence of legal disputes as well as facilitate their resolution. It can use economic crises as catalysts for legal reforms or rely on regional integration, and it should replace the discredited  method of legal 'transplants' by sustained dialogue between legal advisors and all actors involved in legal reforms. | <p>A contract-law solution to the subprime crisis</p><p>A must read for legal reforms in developing and transforming countries</p><p>An unprecedented combination of legal history, comparative law, institutional economics and econometrics</p><p>The first dynamic panel analysis of the economic effect of default rules of contract law</p><p>First findings of an emerging global academic database on comparative access to justice and efficiency of justice</p><p>A comprehensive critique of legal origins theory in both substantive and procedural law</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-35715-2 | Law | Schmitz-Hoffmann | [NAME], Deutsche Gesellschaft für Inter- nationale Zusammenarbeit (GIZ) GmbH, Eschborn, Germany; [NAME], Brandenburg University of Technology (BTU), Cottbus, Germany; [NAME], Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale, Eschborn, Germany; [NAME], Brandenburg University of Technology, Cottbus, Germany | Voluntary Standard Systems | A Contribution to Sustainable Development | Natural Resource Management in Transition | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 451 | Hard cover | Book | X, 451 p. 40 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | International Environmental Law | SCR19070 | LBBP | Sustainable Development | SCU34000 | RNU | Law | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Concepts and Operation of Voluntary Standard Systems (VSS).- Part II: Formal and Private Standards - The Added Value.- Part III: Voluntary Standards Systems - The Development Dimension.- Part IV: Implementation and Impact of VSS.- Part V: Challenges and Future Trends. | Emerging to the forefront of sustainable production and consumption are a promising and rapidly evolving concept known as Voluntary Standard Systems (VSS). They encompass the three pillars of sustainability – social, environmental and economic aspects and consequently they can be considered as a tool, which makes sustainable development visible. Currently, they are becoming a significant element in international trade and in the promotion of sustainable development strategies, especially in the context of globalised markets and supply chains.This volume provides a comprehensive overview of the current VSS concepts: from their nature and functioning, to the future outlook for their development. It places VSS in the broader context of global development issues and challenges, including development policy and international sustainability commitments, progress towards achieving ‘green economy’ and meeting climate protection targets. The volume contains also a representative selection of case studies which demonstrate their wide range of application in different sectors of the economy. | <p>Comprehensive coverage on the subject of voluntary sustainability standard systems</p><p>Complete overview of voluntary sustainability standard systems: from their function and strategic application, to the future outlook for their development</p><p>International scope, including chapters prepared by researchers and practitioners from Germany, the USA, Canada, the UK, China, Ukraine, Cameroon, etc</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05584-8 | Law | Silkenat | [NAME], Sullivan & Worcester, New York, NY, USA; [NAME], Hofstra University, Hempstead, NY, USA; [NAME], [NAME] and parters, Moscow, Russia | The Legal Doctrines of the Rule of Law and the Legal State (Rechtsstaat) |  | Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on [NAME] and Justice | 38 | 1 | 2014 | 365 | Hard cover | Book | XXIV, 365 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | Private International Law, International & Foreign Law, Comparative Law | SCR14002 | LB | Philosophy of Law | SCE27000 | LAB | Law | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Special Thank You.- Acknowledgements.- Introduction; [NAME], [NAME], Jr. and [NAME] One – General Perspectives On Rule Of Law And The Legal State.- Chapter 1. What is the Rule of Law and why is it so important; Mortimer Sellers.- Chapter 2. On the Foundations of the Rule of Law and the Principle of the Legal State/Rechtsstaat; [NAME] Pfordten.- Chapter 3. Philosophical Foundations of the Principle of the Legal State ([NAME]) and the Rule of Law; Stephan Kirste.- Chapter 4. Rule of Law (and [NAME]); Martin Krygier.- Chapter 5. The Rule of Law and Legal State Doctrines as a Methodology of the Philosophy of Law; [NAME] Dedov.- Chapter 6. Applying the Rule of Law to Contexts Beyond the State; [NAME] and [NAME] Schuppert.- Chapter 7. The Rule of Law as a Global Norm for Constitutionalism; Francois Venter.- Chapter 8. The Ill-fated Union: Constitutional Entrenchment of Rights and the Will Theory from Rousseau to [NAME]; [NAME] and [NAME] Taitslin.- Chapter 9. The Measure of Law: The Non-instrumental Legal Side from the State to the Global Setting (and from Hamdan to [NAME]); Gianluigi Palombella.- Chapter 10. Rule of Law, Legal State and Other International Legal Doctrines: Linguistic Aspects of their Convergence and Differentiation; [NAME] and [NAME] Two – Specific Perspectives on the Rule of Law and the Legal State.- Chapter 11. Freedom, Equality, Legality; T R S Allan.- Chapter 12. [NAME] in Germany: The Development from the Beginning Until Now; [NAME] Tiedemann.- Chapter 13. The German [NAME] in a Comparative Perspective; [NAME] Grote.- Chapter 14. The Russian Judicial Doctrine of the Rule of Law: Twenty Years After; ­­Gadis Gadzhiyev.- Chapter 15. The [NAME] is a Causeway: Metaphor and the Rule of Law in Russia; [NAME] 16. American Constitutional Analysis and a Substantive Understanding of the Rule of Law; [NAME] Charlow.- Chapter 17. Building a Government of Laws: Adams and [NAME]; [NAME]. Rule of Law v. Legal State: Where Have We Come from, Where are We Going To?; [NAME] 19. The Rule of Law in the Middle East; [NAME] Esmaeili.- Chapter20. Waiting for the Rule of Law in Brazil: A Meta-Legal Analysis of the Insufficient Realization of the Rule of Law in Brazil; [NAME] 21. The Rule of Law and the United Nations; Edric Selous.- Giovanni Bassu.- Editors.- Contributors. | This book explores the development of both the civil law conception of the Legal State and the common law conception of the Rule of Law. It examines the philosophical and historical background of both concepts, as well as the problem of the interrelation between the two doctrines. The book brings together twenty-five leading scholars from around the world and provides both general and specific jurisdictional perspectives of the issue in both contemporary and historical settings. The Rule of Law is a legal doctrine the meaning of which can only be fully appreciated in the context of both the common law and the European civil law tradition of the Legal State (Rechtsstaat). The Rule of Law and the Legal State are fundamental safeguards of human dignity and of the legitimacy of the state and the authority of state prescriptions. | <p>Explores the development of both the civilian conception of the legal state and the common law conception of the rule of law</p><p>Provides a comparative analysis of the rule of law from the viewpoints of twelve jurisdictions</p><p>The first work to explore the problem of interrelation of doctrines of the Rule of Law and the Legal State in the philosophy of law</p><p>Examines the philosophical and historical background of both concepts as well as the problem of the interrelation of the two doctrines</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-6265-013-8 | Law | Toebes | [NAME], University of Groningen, Groningen, The Netherlands; Milan M Markovic, Institute of Social Sciences, Belgrade, Serbia; [NAME], Irish Centre for Human Rights, Galway, Ireland; Obiajulu Nnamuchi, University of Nigeria, [NAME], Enugu, Nigeria | The right to health: a multi-country study of law, policy and practice |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 425 p. 5 illus. | 0 | approx. | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | Human Rights | SCR19020 | JPVH | Public International Law | SCR19000 | LBB | Law | Contributed volume | T.M.C. Asser Press | Planned | 2014-06-22 00:00:00 |  |  |  | This interdisciplinary study engages with the fields of human rights law, health law, and public health. It analyses how the internationally guaranteed human ‘right to health’ is realized by States at a national level. It brings together scholars from more than ten different countries, with each of them analyzing the right to health in their country or region. They all focus on a particular theme that is important in their country, such as health inequalities, the Millennium Development Goals, or the privatization of healthcare. This book is relevant for scholars, practitioners and policy makers in the field of human rights law, health law, public health and the intersection between these three fields. | <p>Written by experts from more than ten different countries with each of them analyzing the right to health from his or her country’s or region’s perspective</p><p>Provides an interdisciplinary and comparative human rights analysis</p><p>Accommodates the increasing interest by the public health community in human rights and explains how the right to health can be implemented</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-6265-004-6 | Law | [NAME] Hof | [NAME], Leiden University, Leiden, The Netherlands; [NAME], Leiden University, Leiden, The Netherlands; [NAME], Leiden University, Leiden, The Netherlands | Minding Minors Wandering the Web: Regulating Online Child Safety |  | Information Technology and Law Series | 24 | 1 | 2014 | 297 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 297 p. 8 illus. | 0 | final | 79.99 | 79.99 | 85.59 | 87.99 | 72 | 106.5 | English | Law | International IT and Media [NAME], Intellectual Property Law | SCR19100 | LN | Human Rights | SCR19020 | JPVH | Law | Contributed volume | T.M.C. Asser Press | In production | 2014-05-12 00:00:00 |  |  | Regulating online child safety: Introduction.- Children’s rights online: [NAME], dilemmas and emerging directions.- A framework for responding to online safety risks.- Colouring inside the lines: Using technology to regulate children’s behaviour online.- Safety by literacy? Rethinking the role of digital skills in improving online safety.- Taking risks on the World Wide Web: The impact of families and societies on adolescents’ risky online behavior.- No child’s play: Online data protection for children.- The right to privacy for children on the internet: New developments in the case law of the European Court of Human Rights.- Online social networks and young people's privacy protection: The role of the right to be forgotten.- Follow the children! Advergames and the enactment of children's consumer identity.- Children and peer-to-peer risks in social networks: Regulating, empowering or a little bit of both? On technology against cyberbullying.- Violent video games and cyberbullying: Why education is better than regulation.- Addressing cyberbullying using a multi-stakeholder approach: The Flemish case.- Regulating online sexual solicitation: Towards evidence-based policy and regulation.- Protecting children from the risk of harm? A critical review of the law’s response(s) to online child sexual grooming in England and Wales. | Ensuring online safety has become a topic on the regulatory agenda in many Western societies. However, regulating for online safety is far from easy, due to the wide variety of national and international, private and public actors and stakeholders that are involved. When regulating online risks for children it is important to strike the right balance between protection against harms on the one hand and safeguarding their fundamental freedoms and rights on the other. The authors in this book attempt to grapple with precisely this theme: striking the right balance between ensuring safety for children on the internet while at the same time enabling them to experiment, to learn, to enrich their lives, to acquire skills and to have fun using this global network. The authors come from various scientific disciplines, ranging from law to social science and from media studies to philosophy. This means that the book provides the reader with both empirical and theoretical/conceptual chapters and sheds a multi-disciplinary light on the complex topic of regulating online safety for children. | <p>Contributes to the ongoing academic debate on online safety </p><p>Complements legal analysis with insights from other disciplines such as social science, media studies and philosophy </p><p>Treats the aspects of both online safety and fundamental rights</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54162-9 | Law | Varella | [NAME], University Center of Brasilia, Brasilia, DF, Brazil | Internationalization of Law | Globalization, International Law and Complexity |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 376 | Hard cover | Book | X, 376 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Law | Sources and Subjects of International Law, International Organizations | SCR19010 | LBB | International Relations | SCX18040 | JPS | Law | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- 2. Factors and Actors Behind Greater Complexity in Contemporary International Law.- 3. The Greater Complexity of International Law with the Intensification of Relations Among States and International Organizations.- 4. The Internationalization of Law from the Perspective of Infra- and Non-State Actors.- 5. New Features of the Internationalized Legal System: Expansion, Consolidation, Plurality, and Effectiveness.- 6. Challenges with Complexity: New Sources, Private Regimes and the Proliferation of Conflict Resolution Mechanisms.- 7. The problems of New and Old Concepts of International Law.- 8. Conclusions. | The book provides an overview of how international law is today constructed through diverse macro and microprocesses that expand its traditional subjects and sources, with the attribution of sovereign capacity and power to the international plane (moving the international toward the national). Simultaneously, national laws approximate laws of other nations (moving among nations or moving the national toward the international) and new sources of legal norms emerge, independent of states and international organisations. This expansion occurs in many subject areas, with specific structures: commercial, environmental, human rights, humanitarian, financial, criminal and labor law contribute to the formation of post national law with different modes of functioning, different actors and different sources of law that should be understood as a new complexity of law. | <p>Original research, conducted over five years and is the state of the art on the subject</p><p>Provides an in-depth analysis by the main authors, with extensive lists and studies on legal cases from international and domestic courts</p><p>It is not only a critical overview of the main European and American jurists and cases, but it adds critical comment from jurists from peripheral countries such as Latin America and Asia</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04470-5 | Law | Weidemann | [NAME], Intern. Max Planck Research Schol for Ma for Maritime Affairs, Hamburg, Germany | International Governance of the Arctic Marine Environment | With Particular Emphasis on High Seas Fisheries | Hamburg Studies on Maritime Affairs | 27 | 1 | 2014 | 263 | Soft cover | Book | X, 263 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Law of the Sea, Air and [NAME] | [NAME] | LBB | International Environmental Law | SCR19070 | LBBP | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Environmental Situation in the Arctic.- International Governance of the Arctic Marine Environment.- Possible Ways for Enhancement.- Summary. | The Arctic is particularly affected by climate change; over the past few decades, temperatures in this area have risen twice as fast as the mean global rate. The most prominent effect of global climate change in the region is the melting sea ice in the Arctic Ocean, which enables a multitude of ocean uses to be initiated and extended, such as shipping, fishing and oil and gas extraction. Unlike in the Antarctic, there is currently no single comprehensive legal regime for governance of the Arctic. Instead, the region is regulated by a patchwork of international treaties, above all the United Nations Convention on the Law of the Sea (UNCLOS), various regional and sub-regional agreements, national laws and soft-law agreements. This treatise provides an evaluation of the governance regime that regulates the use of the Arctic marine environment and its readiness to protect these fragile ecosystems in light of the consequences of climate change. | <p>Overview of the international legal regime governing the Arctic marine environment</p><p>Analysis of prevailing deficits of the international regime for governance of the marine Arctic </p><p>Analysis of the different proposals for improving the governance regime of the marine Arctic</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05070-6 | Law | Westra | [NAME], University of Windsor, Windsor, ON, Canada | [NAME] | Children's Rights and Collective Obligations |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 290 p. 5 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Law | Human Rights | SCR19020 | JPVH | Childhood, Adolescence and Society | SCX22090 | JFSP | Law | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Who is a Child? The Protection of Children’s Rights.- The Child’s Life, Health and Development Rights.- The Child’s Right to Non-discrimination.- Child Law in the International Context: Exploitation, Abuse and The Limits of Labour Laws.- Child Law: Conflicts, Violence and Forced Displacement.- Concluding Thoughts: Progress in the Protection of the Child . | Child Law starts with the question “Who is the Child?” In direct contrast to the CRC, which calls for putting the interests of the child first in all policies dealing with children, it appears that the interests of others are the major consideration de facto. In law, children’s right to protection is severely limited by the presence of a maximum age limit, with no consideration of the starting point: current and ongoing scientific research has demonstrated the effects of this non-consideration in a number of abnormalities and diseases, not only in children, but in adults and the elderly. The WHO has published a number of studies to that effect and the 2012 Report on Endocrine Disruptors more than confirms this claim. This and other scientific insights that have largely been ignored show the flaws and inadequacies of the legal regimes intended to protect children, in a number of areas, from the basic public health to the right to normal development; child labor law conventions; in conflict situations; as a result of climate and other events; children as illegal migrants and as inmates in prison camps. | <p>Expands on the 2006 UNICEF Report’s contention that children are “invisible” in law and policy</p><p>Based on the implications of children’s specific biology and their vulnerability in relation to industrial developments, conflicts and climate change</p><p>Discusses the discriminatory component to be found in many laws intended to protect children, which significantly limits their effectiveness</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03556-7 | Linguistics | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Warsaw, Warsaw, Poland | Towards the Pragmatic Core of English for European Communication | The Speech Act of Apologising in Selected Euro-Englishes | Second Language Learning and Teaching |  | 1 | 2014 | 140 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 140 p. 16 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Linguistics | Applied Linguistics | SCN13000 | CB | Language Education | SCO23000 | CJ | Linguistics | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | The European Union: culture, identity and languages.- English as a means of communication by non-native Speakers.- Learning English for Intercultural Communication.- Linguistic pragmatic background for the study of the speech act of apologizing: from theory to practice.- Empirical study of the realisation of the speech act of apologizing in Euro-English. | English in Europe is not one language but many, and substantial differences in the way people from different countries communicate using it may cause misunderstandings. This book shows that, through research into the pragmatic behavior of non-native speakers of English from across Europe, it is possible to uncover the core shared strategies, which are proposed as the basis of a reference guide for learners who wish to successfully communicate in English in Europe. The content is based on the analysis of the speech act of apologizing as realized by 466 respondents from 8 European countries, all proficient users of English involved in teacher-training programs. The results provide a basis for practical teaching and in-class research ideas are included in the book. | <p>Presents an original proposal challenging the "English as a lingua franca" approach by establishing standard English patterns which Europeans use in communication</p><p>Seeks to inspire a new way of thinking about English in Europe, providing evidence for shared tendencies in pragmatic behavior-a key element of successful communication across cultures</p><p>Fits a paradigm of studies exploring the potential of cross-cultural pragmatics</p><p>Provides a new perspective and a new data-based, well-motivated program</p><p>Offers suggestions for further research directions and practical application in teaching English for European communication</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8644-7 | Linguistics | [NAME] | [NAME], The Pennsylvania State University, University Park, PA, USA | Computational Methods for Corpus Annotation and Analysis |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 186 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 186 p. 22 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Linguistics | Applied Linguistics | SCN13000 | CB | Language Translation and Linguistics | SCI21041 | UYQL | Linguistics | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Chapter 1 Introduction.- Chapter 2 Text Processing with the Command Line Interface.- Chapter 3 Lexical Annotation.- Chapter 4 Lexical Analysis.- Chapter 5 Syntactic Annotation.- Chapter 6 Syntactic Analysis.- Chapter 7 Semantic, Pragmatic and Discourse Analysis.- Chapter 8 Summary and Outlook.- [NAME]. | In the past few decades the use of increasingly large text corpora has grown rapidly in language and linguistics research. This was enabled by remarkable strides in natural language processing (NLP) technology, technology that enables computers to automatically and efficiently process, annotate and analyze large amounts of spoken and written text in linguistically and/or pragmatically meaningful ways. It has become more desirable than ever before for language and linguistics researchers who use corpora in their research to gain an adequate understanding of the relevant NLP technology to take full advantage of its capabilities. This volume provides language and linguistics researchers with an accessible introduction to the state-of-the-art NLP technology that facilitates automatic annotation and analysis of large text corpora at both shallow and deep linguistic levels. The book covers a wide range of computational tools for lexical, syntactic, semantic, pragmatic and discourse analysis, together with detailed instructions on how to obtain, install and use each tool in different operating systems and platforms. The book illustrates how NLP technology has been applied in recent corpus-based language studies and suggests effective ways to better integrate such technology in future corpus linguistics research. This book provides language and linguistics researchers with a valuable reference for corpus annotation and analysis. | <p>Provides an accessible introduction to natural language processing technology that facilitates automatic corpus annotation and analysis</p><p>Covers computational tools for lexical, syntactic, semantic, pragmatic and discourse analysis</p><p>Offers detailed instructions on how to obtain, install and use each tool</p><p>Illustrates how NLP technology has been applied in recent corpus-based language studies</p><p>Suggests effective ways to integrate NLP technology in future applied corpus linguistic research</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8812-0 | Linguistics | [NAME] | [NAME], Aoyama Gakuin University, Shibuya-ku, Japan; [NAME], Naruto University of Education, Naruto, Japan; [NAME], Tohoku University, [NAME], Japan | Formal Approaches to Semantics and Pragmatics | Japanese and Beyond | Studies in Linguistics and Philosophy | 95 | 1 | 2014 | 346 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 346 p. 104 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Linguistics | Semantics | [NAME] | CFG | Pragmatism | SCE38000 | HPCF | Linguistics | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction.- 2. The Noncooperative Basis of Implicatures.- 3. Meta-Lambda-Calculus: Syntax and Semantics.- 4. Coordinating and Subordinating Binding Dependencies.- 5. What is a universal? On the explanatory potential of evolutionary game theory in linguistics.- 6. Continuation Hierarchy and Quantifier Scope.- 7. Japanese Reported Speech: Towards an account of perspective shift as mixed quotation.- 8. What is Evidence in Natural Language?.- 9. A Categorial Grammar Account of Information Packaging in Japanese.- 10. A Note on the Projection of Appositives.- 11. Towards Computational Non-Associative Lambek Lambda-Calculi for Formal Pragmatics.- 12. On the functions of the Japanese discourse particle yo in declaratives.- 13. A Question of Priority.- 14.Measurement-Theoretic Foundations of Dynamic Epistemic Preference Logic.- 15. A [NAME] of Only.- 16. [NAME] in Japanese as [NAME]. | This volume presents an exploration of a wide variety of new formal methods from computer science, biology and economics that have been applied to problems in semantics and pragmatics in recent years. Many of the contributions included focus on data from East Asian languages, particularly Japanese and Korean. The collection reflects on a range of new empirical issues that have arisen, including issues related to preference, evidentiality and attention. Separated into several sections, the book presents discussions on: information structure, speech acts and decisions, philosophical themes in semantics and new formal approaches to semantic and pragmatic theory. Its overarching theme is the relation between different kinds of content, from a variety of perspectives. The discussions presented are both theoretically innovative and empirically motivated. | <p>Includes a variety of papers by leading researchers working at the cutting edge of formal semantics and pragmatics</p><p>Contains both foundational and empirical work, all from scholars well-informed both about formal and philosophical work and natural language</p><p>Will be useful for researchers working on a wide range of problems in formal semantics and pragmatics and at their interface</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05085-0 | Linguistics | Roeper | [NAME], University of Massachusetts South College, Amherst, MA, USA; [NAME], University of Massachusetts South College, Amherst, MA, USA | Recursion: Complexity in Cognition |  | Studies in Theoretical Psycholinguistics | 43 | 1 | 2014 | 210 | Hard cover | Book | X, 210 p. 20 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Linguistics | Psycholinguistics | SCN35000 | CFD | Mathematical Logic and Formal Languages | SCI16048 | UYA | Linguistics | Handbook | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Minimal Recursion: Exploring the Prospects.- Recursion Restrictions: Where Grammars Count.- Deriving the Two-argument Restriction without Recursion.- Embedding Illocutionary Acts.- Recursion, Legibility, Use.- Recursion and Truth.- Recursion in Language: Is it Indirectly constrained?.- Recursion in Grammar and Performance.- Empirical Results and Formal Approaches to Recursion in Acquisition.- Recursive Complements and Propositional Attitudes.- Recursive Merge and Human Language Evolution. | This volume focuses on recursion and reveals a host of new theoretical arguments, philosophical perspectives, formal representations and empirical evidence from parsing, acquisition and computer models, highlighting its central role in modern science. [NAME], whose work introduced recursion to linguistics and cognitive science and other leading researchers in the fields of philosophy, semantics, computer science and psycholinguistics in showing the profound reach of this concept into modern science. Recursion has been at the heart of generative grammar from the outset. Recent work in minimalism has put it at center-stage with a wide range of consequences across the intellectual landscape. The contributor to this volume both advance the field and provide a cross-sectional view of the place that recursion takes in modern science. | <p>Original contributions by a stellar group of authors including [NAME] Chomsky</p><p>Perspectives on the core property of human language from computer science, philosophy, psycholinguistics, evolutionary biology, semantics and syntax</p><p>Empirical evidence applied to language variation, experimentation and parsing models</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04659-4 | Philosophy | Agazzi | Evandro Agazzi, Universidad Panamericana, Mexico City, Mexico | Scientific Objectivity and Its Contexts |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 482 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 482 p. 7 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy of Science | SCE34000 | PDA | History and Philosophical Foundations of Physics | SCP29000 | PDX | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Historical and Philosophical Background.- The Characterisation of Objectivity.- First Corollaries in the Philosophy of Science.- The Ontological Commitment of Science.- Scientific Realism.- The Contexts of Objectivity.- Corollaries in the Philosophy of Science.- Scientific Truth Revisited.- The Context of Making Science.- Science and Metaphysics.- Appendix.- References.- Indexes. | The first part of this book is of an epistemological nature and develops an original theory of scientific objectivity, understood in a weak sense (as intersubjective agreement among the specialists) and a strong sense (as having precise concrete referents). In both cases it relies upon the adoption of operational criteria designed within the particular perspective under which any single science considers reality. The “object” so attained has a proper ontological status, dependent on the specific character of the criteria of reference (regional ontologies). This justifies a form of scientific realism. Such perspectives are also the result of a complex cultural-historical situation. The awareness of such a “historical determinacy” of science justifies including in the philosophy of science the problems of ethics of science, relations of science with metaphysics and social dimensions of science that overstep the traditional restriction of the philosophy of science to an epistemology of science. It is to this “context” that the second part of the book is devoted. | <p>The comprehensive summary of the author's life work</p><p>Proposes a theory of objectivity that applies equally well to the natural sciences and the humanities</p><p>Takes concepts and methodologies from traditional, analytic and continental philosophy and brings them to a fruitful complementary interplay in the philosophy of science</p><p>Offers a clear methodological framework for interdisciplinary investigation</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04758-4 | Philosophy | Back | [NAME], Kutztown University, Kutztown, PA, USA | Aristotle's Theory of Abstraction |  | The New Synthese Historical Library | 73 | 1 | 2014 | 370 | Hard cover | Book | V, 370 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Classical Philosophy | SCE12000 | HPCA | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Introduction.- Logic: The Formal Structure of Abstraction.- Chapter 1. The Conception of Abstraction.- Chapter 2. Abstract Relata.- Chapter 3. The Relation of Abstraction.- Science: The Psychological Process of Abstraction.- Chapter 4. Perceiving.- Chapter 5. Thinking.- Chapter 6. The Process of Abstraction.- Metaphysics: Aristotle’s Abstract Ontology.- Chapter 7. The Subject of Metaphysics.- Chapter 8. Aristotle’s Buddhism.- Chapter 9. Parts of Animals.- Chapter 10. Aristotle’s Nominalism.- Appendix.- The Formal Structure of Abstraction. | This book investigates Aristotle’s views on abstraction and explores how he uses it. In this work, the author follows [NAME] in focusing on the scientific detail first and then approaches the metaphysical claims, and so creates a reconstructed theory that explains many puzzles of Aristotle’s thought. Understanding the details of his theory of relations and abstraction further illuminates his theory of universals.Some of the features of Aristotle’s theory of abstraction developed in this book include: abstraction is a relation; perception and knowledge are types of abstraction; the objects generated by abstractions are relata which can serve as subjects in their own right, whereupon they can appear as items in other categories. The author goes on to look at how [NAME] distinguishes the concrete from the abstract paronym, how induction is a type of abstraction which typically moves from the perceived individuals to universals and how Aristotle’s metaphysical vocabulary is 'relational.’Beyond those features, this work also looks at how of universals, accidents, forms, causes and potentialities have being only as abstract aspects of individual substances. An individual substance is identical to its essence; the essence has universal features but is the singularity making the individual substance what it is. These theories are expounded within this book. One main attraction in working out the details of Aristotle’s views on abstraction lies in understanding his metaphysics of universals as abstract objects.This work reclaims past ground as the main philosophical tradition of abstraction has been ignored in recent times. It gives a modern version of the medieval doctrine of the threefold distinction of essence, made famous by the Islamic philosopher, Avicenna. | <p>Presents new views on abstraction, a philosophical tradition with Greek and Islamic roots, that has been ignored in recent times</p><p>Offers a look at how universals, accidents, forms and the like have only the abstract aspects of individual substances</p><p>Approaches the study of abstraction with a focus on scientific detail before addressing metaphysical claims</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8859-5 | Philosophy | Bezhanishvili | [NAME], New Mexico State University, Las Cruces, NM, USA | Leo Esakia on Duality in Modal and Intuitionistic Logics |  | Outstanding Contributions to Logic | 4 | 1 | 2014 | 317 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 317 p. 44 illus. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Mathematical Logic and Formal Languages | SCI16048 | UYA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Introduction.- Esakia’s Biography.- Canonical extensions, Esakia spaces, and universal models; Mai Gehrke.- Free modal algebras revisited: the step-by-step method; [NAME], [NAME], and Mamuka Jibladze.- Easkia duality and its extensions; [NAME] and [NAME] Jansana.- On the Blok-Esakia Theorem; [NAME] and [NAME] Zakharyaschev.- Modal logic and the Vietoris functor; [NAME] and [NAME]: A Biography; Alexei Muravitsky.- Constructive modalities with provability smack; [NAME] Litak.- Cantor-Bendixson properties of the assembly of a frame; Harold Simmons.- Topological interpretations of provability logic; [NAME] and [NAME] Derivational modal logics with the difference modality; [NAME] and [NAME] Shehtman.- Esakia’s Bibliography. | This volume is dedicated to Leo Esakia's contributions to the theory of modal and intuitionistic systems. Consisting of 10 chapters, written by leading experts, this volume discusses Esakia’s original contributions and consequent developments that have helped to shape duality theory for modal and intuitionistic logics and to utilize it to obtain some major results in the area.Beginning with a chapter which explores Esakia duality for S4-algebras, the volume goes on to explore Esakia duality for Heyting algebras and its generalizations to weak Heyting algebras and implicative semilattices. The book also dives into the Blok-Esakia theorem and provides an outline of the intuitionistic modal logic KM which is closely related to the Gödel-Löb provability logic GL. One chapter scrutinizes Esakia’s work interpreting modal diamond as the derivative of a topological space within the setting of point-free topology. The final chapter in the volume is dedicated to the derivational semantics of modal logic and other related issues. | <p>Offers an overview and analysis of Leo Esakia’s contributions to the theory of modal and intuitionistic systems</p><p>Explores a wide range of Esakia’s work in the area with explanations and analyses by leading experts in the field</p><p>Traces Esakia’s lifelong work in the field from its beginnings in the 1960s to the 2000s</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8723-9 | Philosophy | Calkins | [NAME], University of Massachusetts Boston College of Management, Boston, MA, USA | Developing a Virtue-Imbued Casuistry for Business Ethics |  | Issues in Business Ethics | 42 | 1 | 2014 | 480 | Hard cover | Book | I, 480 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Management/Business for Professionals | SCW23040 | KJM | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Summary Abstract.- Overview.- Acknowledgements.- Introduction: Casuistry and Virtue in Business.- The Applied Principles Approach.- The Casuistic Approach.- The Plan.- Part 1: Casuistry and Business Cases.-  Chapter 1: Casuistry’s Features and History .- Chapter 2: Casuistry Compared and Criticized.- Chapter 3: Casuistry and the Business Case Method .- Part 2: Virtue Ethics.- Chapter 4: Aristotle’s Virtue Ethics .- Chapter 5: Other Theories of Virtue .- Chapter 6: The Value of Virtue Ethics .- Part 3: The Beneficial Synergy of Casuistry and Virtue Ethics.- Chapter 7: The Synergy of Casuistry and Virtue Ethics .- Chapter 8: Applying the Casuistry/Virtue Ethics Synergy to Breaking the Ideological Stalemate Underlying Debates About the Genetic Modification of Foods .- Part 4: Select Business Ethics Issues.- Chapter 9: Pricing a Vaccine After a Terrorist Attack .- Chapter 10: Managing the Benefits and  Risks of a New Medication .- Chapter 11: Data Ownership and the Internet .-Conclusion.- Index.- Bibliography.- Books and Book Sections.- Journal Articles.-  Case and Case Materials.-  Newspapers and Periodicals.-  Internet Resources.- Conclusion.- Index.- Bibliography.- Books and Book Sections.-  Journal Articles.-  Case and Case Materials.-  Newspapers and Periodicals.-  Internet Resources. | Casuistry, Virtue, and Business Ethics brings together three important processes for business ethics: casuistry, virtue ethics, and the business case method. In doing so, it considers the overlap and synergy of casuistry and virtue ethics, the similarities and differences of casuistry and the business case method, and the relationships between emerging and well-established cases. The goal of the book is twofold: to provide a distinctly practical method for moral decision-making within the context of business and to illustrate how contemporary vexing issues are similar to those of the past and how they might be resolved satisfactorily. | <p>The only book of its kind on moral decision-making and business ethics</p><p>Makes it novel and a significant contribution to the field of business ethics by providing a comprehensive account of casuistry as a method of moral problem solving applied to business</p><p>Unique comparison of casuistry to classic virtue theory</p><p>Only text of its genre to explain the advantages and disadvantages of casuistry</p><p>Facilitates a deeper understanding of some of the pressing problems of the day</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05355-4 | Philosophy | Calosi | [NAME], University of Urbino, Empoli, Italy; [NAME], University of Urbino, Urbino, Italy | Mereology and the Sciences | Parts and [NAME] in the Contemporary Scientific Context | Synthese Library | 371 | 1 | 2014 | 377 | Hard cover | Book | X, 377 p. 92 illus., 13 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Mathematical Logic and Formal Languages | SCI16048 | UYA | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Notes on Contributors.- Introduction: Parts, [NAME] and Contemporary Sciences; [NAME] and P. Graziani.- Part I. Physics.- Introduction to Part I: Mereology and Physics.- Building Enduring Objects out of Spacetime; C. Gilmore.- Relativistic Parts and Places: a Note on Corner Slices and Shrinking Chairs; [NAME] Parthood and Composition in Quantum Mechanics; [NAME] and G. Tarozzi.- Continuity of motion in Whitehead’s Geometrical Space; [NAME] and P. Graziani.- Part II. Mathematics.- Introduction to Part II: Mereology and Mathematics.- Multi-valued Logic for a Point Free Foundation of Geometry; [NAME] and G. Gerla.- The Relations of Supremum and Mereological Sum in Partially Ordered Sets; [NAME] and A. Pietruszczak.- Natural Mereology and Classical Mereology; P. Hovda.- Part III. Natural Sciences.- Introduction to Part III: Mereology and Natural Science.- Crisp islands in vague seas. Cases of determinate parthood relations in biological objects; [NAME], [NAME] Schulz.- Developing the Mereology of Chemistry; [NAME] and R. Harrè.- Part IV. Computer Sciences and Engineering.- Introduction to Part IV: Mereology, Computer Sciences and Engineering.- Mereology in Engineering and Computer Sciences; L. Polkowski.- Discrete Mereotopology; A. Galton.- A Role for Mereology in Domain Science and Engineering; [NAME]. | This volume is the first systematic and thorough attempt to investigate the relation and the possible applications of mereology to contemporary science. It gathers contributions from leading scholars in the field and covers a wide range of scientific theories and practices such as physics, mathematics, chemistry, biology, computer science and engineering. Throughout the volume, a variety of foundational issues are investigated both from the formal and the empirical point of view.The first section looks at the topic as it applies to physics. The section addresses questions of persistence and composition within quantum and relativistic physics and concludes by scrutinizing the possibility to capture continuity of motion as described by our best physical theories within gunky space times.The second part tackles mathematics and shows how to provide a foundation for point-free geometry of space switching to fuzzy-logic. The relation between mereological sums and set-theoretic suprema is investigated and issues about different mereological perspectives such as classical and natural [NAME] are thoroughly discussed.The third section in the volume looks at natural science. Several questions from biology, medicine and chemistry are investigated. From the perspective of biology, there is an attempt to provide axioms for inferring statements about part hood between two biological entities from statements about their spatial relation. From the perspective of chemistry, it is argued that classical mereological frameworks are not adequate to capture the practices of chemistry in that they consider neither temporal nor modal parameters.The final part introduces computer science and engineering. A new formal mereological framework in which an indeterminate relation of part hood is taken as a primitive notion is constructed and then applied to a wide variety of disciplines from robotics to knowledge engineering. A formal framework for discrete mereotopology and its applications is developed and finally, the importance of mereology for the relatively new science of domain engineering is also discussed. | <p>First thorough attempt to investigate the relation and possible applications of an important area of ontology, metaphysics and logic, i.e. mereology and different scientific disciplines</p><p>Offers a self-contained and accessible introduction to a relatively new subject in the metaphysics and the foundations of science while promoting an inter-disciplinary approach</p><p>Presents a brief introduction to each section that serves as an overview of single applications of mereological theories to specific sciences</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8624-9 | Philosophy | Chuwa | [NAME], Duquesne University, Pittsburgh, PA, USA | African Indigenous Ethics in Global Bioethics | Interpreting Ubuntu | Advancing Global Bioethics | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 258 | Hard cover | Book | XI, 258 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Theory of Medicine/Bioethics | SCH66000 | PSAD | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter One – Introduction: The Culture of Ubuntu                                                  Chapter Two – Ubuntu Ethics                                                                                                 Chapter Three – Ethics of Care: enlightening the role of rights in global bioethics    Chapter Four – UNESCO Declaration: enlightening the cosmic context of global bioethics                                                                                               Chapter Five – Catholic Social Ethics: enlightening the role of solidarity in global bioethics                                                                                               Chapter Six – Conclusion       ​ | This book educates whilst also challenging the contemporary schools of thought within philosophical and religious ethics. In addition, it underlines the fact that the substance of ethics in general and bioethics/healthcare ethics specifically, is much more expansive and inclusive than is usually thought. Bioethics is a relatively new academic discipline. However, ethics has existed informally since before the time of Hippocrates. The indigenous culture of African peoples has an ethical worldview which predates the western discourse. This indigenous ethical worldview has been orally transmitted over centuries. The earliest known written African text containing some concepts and content of ethics is the “Declaration of Innocence” written in 1500 B.C., found in an Egyptian text. Ubuntu is an example of African culture that presents an ethical worldview. This work interprets the culture of Ubuntu to explain the contribution of a representative indigenous African ethics to global bioethics. Many modern scholars have written about the meaning of Ubuntu for African societies over centuries. Some scholars have viewed Ubuntu as the greatest contribution of African cultures to other world cultures. None of the scholars, however has explored the culture of Ubuntu as providing a representative indigenous ethics that can contribute to global bioethics as discussed in this book.​ | <p>Challenges the contemporary schools of thought within philosophical and religious ethics</p><p>Underlines the fact that the substance of ethics generally and bioethics / healthcare ethics specifically is much more expansive and inclusive than it is usually understood</p><p>Invites ethicists and bioethicists to dialogue and research into Ubuntu and other similar indigenous cultures</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8779-6 | Philosophy | de Paz | María de Paz, Lisbon University, Lisbon, Portugal; [NAME], University of Western Ontario, London, ON, Canada | Poincaré, Philosopher of Science | Problems and Perspectives | The Western Ontario Series in Philosophy of Science | 79 | 1 | 2014 | 392 | Hard cover | Book | X, 392 p. 10 illus., 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy of Science | SCE34000 | PDA | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Introduction; [NAME] and María de Paz.- Part I Poincaré’s Philosophy of Science.- 1 Portrait of Henri Poincaré as a young philosopher: the formative years (1860-1873); Laurent Rollet.- 2 The Invention of Convention; [NAME] Folina.- 3 The third way epistemology: A re-characterization of Poincaré’s conventionalism; María de Paz.- 4 Poincaré, Indifferent Hypotheses and Metaphysics; [NAME] on the Foundations of Mathematics.- 5 Poincaré in Göttingen; Reinhard Kahle.- 6 Poincaré on the Principles of the Calculus; [NAME] 7 Does the French Connection (Poincaré, [NAME]) provide some insights regarding the thesis that meta-mathematics is an exception to the slogan that mathematics concerns structures?; Gerhard Heinzmann.- Part III Poincaré on the Foundations of Physics.- 8 Henri Poincaré: The status of mechanical explanations and the foundations of statistical mechanics; [NAME] Príncipe.- 9 Poincaré: A scientist inspired by his philosophy; [NAME] Serra.- 10 Poincaré on the construction of space-time; [NAME]. | This volume presents a selection of papers from the Poincaré Project of the Center for the Philosophy of Science, University of Lisbon, bringing together an international group of scholars with new assessments of [NAME] philosophy of science—both its historical impact on the foundations of science and mathematics, and its relevance to contemporary philosophical inquiry. The work of Poincaré (1854-1912) extends over many fields within mathematics and mathematical physics. But his scientific work was inseparable from his groundbreaking philosophical reflections, and the scientific ferment in which he participated was inseparable from the philosophical controversies in which he played a pre-eminent part. The subsequent history of the mathematical sciences was profoundly influenced by Poincaré’s philosophical analyses of the relations between and among mathematics, logic, and physics, and, more generally, the relations between formal structures and the world of experience. The papers in this collection illuminate Poincaré’s place within his own historical context as well as the implications of his work for ours. | <p>Brings together an international group of scholars with new assessments of [NAME] philosophy of science</p><p>Presents a selection of papers from the Poincaré Project of the Center for the Philosophy of Science, University of Lisbon</p><p>Illuminates Poincaré’s place within his own historical context as well as the implications of his work for ours</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04671-6 | Philosophy | Fairweather | [NAME], San Francisco State University, San Francisco, CA, USA | Virtue Epistemology Naturalized | Bridges between Virtue Epistemology and Philosophy of Science | Synthese Library | 366 | 1 | 2014 | 415 | Hard cover | Book | X, 415 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Introduction: Virtue epistemology meets philosophy of science; [NAME] Fairweather.- Part I. Epistemic Virtue, Cognitive Science & Situationism.- Chapter 2. The Function of Perception; Peter Graham.- Chapter 3.Metacognition and [NAME]; [NAME] Lepock.- Chapter 4. Daring to Believe: Epistemic Agency and [NAME] in Virtue Epistemology; [NAME]. Success, Minimal Agency and Epistemic Virtue; [NAME] Chapter 6. Toward a Eudaimonistic Virtue Epistemology; Berit Brogaard.- Chapter 7. The Situationist Challenge to Reliabilism About Inference; [NAME] Alfano.- Chapter 8. Inferential Virtues and Common Epistemic Goods; [NAME] Montemayor.- Part II. Epistemic Virtue and Formal Epistemology.- Chapter 9. Curiosity, [NAME] and [NAME]; [NAME] Inan.- Chapter 10. Epistemic Values and Disinformation; Don Fallis.- Chapter 11. Defeasibility without inductivism; [NAME] Comasana.- Part III. Virtues of Theories and Virtues of Theorists.- Chapter 12. Acting to know; [NAME] Morton.- Chapter 13. Is there a place for epistemic virtues in theory choice; Milena Ivanova.- Chapter 14. “Bridging A Fault Line: On under determination and the ampliative adequacy of competing theories”; Guy Axtell.- Chapter 15. Epistemic virtues and the success of science; [NAME] Tulodziecki.- Chapter 16. Experimental Virtue: Perceptual Responsiveness and the Praxis of Scientific Observation; Shannon Vallor.- Chapter 17. A Matter of Phronesis: Experiment and Virtue in Physics, a Case Study; Marilena diBuchianno.- Part IV. Understanding, Explanation and Epistemic Virtue.- Chapter 18. Knowledge and Understanding; [NAME] Pritchard.- Chapter 19. Understanding As Knowledge of Causes; [NAME] 20. Knowledge, Understanding and [NAME]; [NAME]. | This book presents four bridges connecting work in virtue epistemology and work in philosophy of science (broadly construed) that may serve as catalysts for the further development of naturalized virtue epistemology. These bridges are: empirically informed theories of epistemic virtue; virtue theoretic solutions to under determination; epistemic virtues in the history of science; and the value of understanding.Virtue epistemology has opened many new areas of inquiry in contemporary epistemology including: epistemic agency, the role of motivations and emotions in epistemology, the nature of abilities, skills and competences, wisdom and curiosity.Value driven epistemic inquiry has become quite complex and there is a need for a responsible and rigorous process of constructing naturalized theories of epistemic virtue. This volume makes the involvement of the sciences more explicit and looks at the empirical aspect of virtue epistemology.Concerns about virtue epistemology are considered in the essays contained here, including the question: can any virtue epistemology meet both the normativity constraint and the empirical constraint? The volume suggests that these worries should not be seen as impediments but rather as useful constraints and desiderata to guide the construction of naturalized theories of epistemic virtue. | <p>Examines an underdeveloped aspect of virtue epistemology, namely the interconnections between virtue epistemology and philosophy of science</p><p>Contributes to the development of naturalistic perspectives in virtue epistemology</p><p>Builds on recent empirical work in virtue ethics</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04134-6 | Philosophy | Floridi | [NAME], Oxford Internet Institute, University of Oxford, Oxford, UK; Mariarosaria Taddeo, Research Fellow in Cyber Security and Ethics, PAIS, University of Warwick, Coventry, UK | The Ethics of Information Warfare |  | Law, Governance and Technology Series | 14 | 1 | 2014 | 259 | Hard cover | Book | I, 259 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy of Technology | SCE35000 | HP | Computers and Society | SCI24040 | UBJ | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface: M. Taddeo and [NAME] Floridi.- Part  I.- 1 Fog in the Fifth Dimension: The Ethics of Cyber-war; [NAME] Orend.- 2 The Future Impact of a Long Period of Limited Cyber warfare on the Ethics of Warfare; [NAME] Dipert.- 3 Is Warfare the Right Frame for the Cyber Debate?; [NAME], [NAME], and Keith Abney.- 4 Technology, Information, and Modern Warfare: Challenges and Prospects in the 21st Century; [NAME] and Deen Chatterjee.- Part II.- 5 Permissible Preventive Cyberwar:  Restricting Cyber Conflict to Justified Military Targets; [NAME], Jr.- 6 Moral Cyber Weapons; [NAME] and [NAME] 7 The Ethics of Cyberattack; [NAME] and Just War Theory; M. Taddeo.- Part III.- 9 The Wrong in Cyberattacks; T. Simpson.- 10 Virtue in Cyber conflict; Don Howard.- 11 Armed Robots and Military Virtue; Shannon Vallor.- 12 Deception and Virtue in Robotic and [NAME]; [NAME] and Warfare: Challenges and European Responses; [NAME]. | This book offers an overview of the ethical problems posed by [NAME], and of the different approaches and methods used to solve them, in order to provide the reader with a better grasp of the ethical conundrums posed by this new form of warfare.The volume is divided into three parts, each comprising four chapters. The first part focuses on issues pertaining to the concept of Information Warfare and the clarifications that need to be made in order to address its ethical implications. The second part collects contributions focusing on Just War Theory and its application to the case of Information Warfare. The third part adopts alternative approaches to Just War Theory for analysing the ethical implications of this phenomenon. Finally, an afterword by [NAME] - Vice President of the European Commission and European Digital Agenda Commissioner - concludes the volume. Her contribution describes the interests and commitments of the European Digital Agenda with respect to research for the development and deployment of robots in various circumstances, including warfare. | <p>Presents interdisciplinary and comprehensive analyses of both theoretical and applied problems</p><p>Focuses explicitly on ethics of information warfare</p><p>Identifies key issues and approaches in the debate on the ethics of information warfare</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04092-9 | Philosophy | Floridi | Luciano Floridi, University of Oxford, Oxford, UK | The Onlife Manifesto | Being Human in a Hyperconnected Era |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 315 | Hard cover | Book | I, 315 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy of Technology | SCE35000 | HP | R & D/Technology Policy | SCW12170 | [NAME] | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction;  [NAME] Floridi.- Preface.- The Onlife Manifesto.- Commentary by Ess; Charles Ess.- Commentary by Floridi; [NAME] Floridi.- Commentary by [NAME]; [NAME] by Hildebrandt; [NAME] Hildebrandt.- Commentary by Laouris; Yiannis Laouris.- Commentary by Pagallo; Ugo Pagallo.- Commentary by [NAME]; [NAME] Simon.- Commentary by [NAME]; May Thorseth.- The Onlife Initiative.- Background Document: Rethinking public spaces in the digital transition.- Part I. Hyperconnectivity.- Hyperhistory and the Philosophy of Information Policies; Luciano Floridi.- Views and Examples on Hyper-connectivity;  [NAME]. Identity, selfhood and attention.- The Onlife Manifesto Philosophical Backgrounds Media Usages and the Futures of Democracy and Equality; [NAME] a Grey Ecology; [NAME] and [NAME] and Reinventing both Democracy and the Concept of Life in the Digital Era; Yiannis Laouris.- Part III. Complexity, responsibility and governance.- Distributed Epistemic Responsibility in a Hyperconnected Era;  [NAME] Simon.- Good Onlife Governance: On Law, Spontaneous Orders, and Design; Ugo Pagallo.- Part IV. The public sphere in a computational era.- The Public(s) Onlife – A Call for Legal Protection by Design; [NAME] Hildebrandt.- Rethinking the Human Condition in a Hyperconnected Era: Why Freedom is not about Sovereignty but about Beginnings; [NAME] Dewandre.- Designing the public sphere: information technologies and the politics of mediation; [NAME] an Online Bill of Rights; [NAME] Oates.- On Tolerance and Fictitious Publics; May Thorseth.- The Onlife Initiative – Conclusion. | What is the impact of information and communication technologies (ICTs) on the human condition? In order to address this question, in 2012 the European Commission organized a research project entitled The Onlife Initiative: concept reengineering for rethinking societal concerns in the digital transition. This volume collects the work of the Onlife Initiative. It explores how the development and widespread use of ICTs have a radical impact on the human condition.ICTs are not mere tools but rather social forces that are increasingly affecting our self-conception (who we are), our mutual interactions (how we socialise); our conception of reality (our metaphysics); and our interactions with reality (our agency). In each case, ICTs have a huge ethical, legal, and political significance, yet one with which we have begun to come to terms only recently.The impact exercised by ICTs is due to at least four major transformations: the blurring of the distinction between reality and virtuality; the blurring of the distinction between human, machine and nature; the reversal from information scarcity to information abundance; and the shift from the primacy of stand-alone things, properties, and binary relations, to the primacy of interactions, processes and networks.Such transformations are testing the foundations of our conceptual frameworks. Our current conceptual toolbox is no longer fitted to address new ICT-related challenges. This is not only a problem in itself. It is also a risk, because the lack of a clear understanding of our present time may easily lead to negative projections about the future. The goal of The Manifesto, and of the whole book that contextualises, is therefore that of contributing to the update of our philosophy. It is a constructive goal. The book is meant to be a positive contribution to rethinking the philosophy on which policies are built in a hyperconnected world, so that we may have a better chance of understanding our ICT-related problems and solving them satisfactorily.The Manifesto launches an open debate on the impacts of ICTs on public spaces, politics and societal expectations toward policymaking in the Digital Agenda for Europe’s remit. More broadly, it helps start a reflection on the way in which a hyperconnected world calls for rethinking the referential frameworks on which policies are built. | <p>Result of “the Onlife Initiative,” a one-year project funded by the European Commission to study the deployment of ICTs and its effects on the human condition</p><p>Inspires reflection on the ways in which a hyperconnected world forces the rethinking of the conceptual frameworks on which policies are built</p><p>Draws upon the work of a group of scholars from a wide range of disciplines including, anthropology, cognitive science, computer science, law, philosophy, political science</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04381-4 | Philosophy | Galavotti | [NAME], University of Bologna, Bologna, Italy; Dennis Dieks, Utrecht University Inst. History & Foundations of Scie, Utrecht, The Netherlands; [NAME], University of A Coruña, [NAME], Spain; [NAME], Ludwig Maximilian University of Munich, Munich, Germany; [NAME], University of Manchester, Manchester, UK; [NAME], University of Geneva, Geneva 4, Switzerland | New Directions in the Philosophy of Science |  | The Philosophy of Science in a European Perspective | 5 | 1 | 2014 | 600 | Hard cover | Book | XX, 600 p. 17 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 199.99 | 199.99 | 213.99 | 219.99 | 180 | 266.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy of Science | SCE34000 | PDA |  |  |  | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface: [NAME] Galavotti.- TEAM A: FORMAL METHODS.- Chapter 1: Things in Possible Experiments. Case-intensional Logic as a Framework for Tracing Things from Case to Case; [NAME] Müller.- Chapter 2: The Proof Is in the Process. A Preamble for a Philosophy of Computer-assisted Mathematics; [NAME] Chapter 3: The Future Role of Computation in Science and Society; Patrick Suppes.- Chapter 4: In No Categorical Terms: A Sketch for an Alternative Route to a Humean Interpretation of Laws; Kerry McKenzie.- Chapter 5: The Undeniable Effectiveness of Mathematics in the Special Sciences; [NAME] Colyvan.- Chapter 6: Comment on “The Undeniable Effectiveness of Mathematics in the Special Sciences”; [NAME] PHILOSOPHY OF THE NATURAL AND LIFE SCIENCES.- Chapter 7: Explanatory Pluralism in Psychiatry: What Are We Pluralists about, and Why? Raffaella Campaner.- Chapter 8: Pluralists about [NAME]? [NAME] of Explanatory Pluralism in Psychiatry; [NAME] 9: Shifting Attention from Theory to Practice in Philosophy of Biology; [NAME] 10: Living Instruments and Theoretical Terms: [NAME] as Measurements in Cancer Research; [NAME] Germain.- Chapter 11:   Developmental Explanation; Veli-Pekka Parkkinen.- Chapter 12: What Counts as Causation in Physics and Biology? Jan Faye.- Chapter 13: Challenges to Characterizing the Notion of Causation across Disciplinary Boundaries: Comment on Faye; Jan Baedke.- Chapter 14: Just Complexity; [NAME] 15: Confessions of a Complexity Skeptic; [NAME] Scholl.- Chapter 16: New Directions in the Philosophy of Biology: A New Taxonomy of Functions; Cristian Saborido.- TEAM C: PHILOSOPHY OF THE CULTURAL AND SOCIAL SCIENCES.- Chapter 17: How Essentialism Properly Understood Might Reconcile Realism and Social Constructivism; [NAME] Spohn.- Chapter 18: Social Construction – by [NAME]? Matti Sintonen.- Chapter 19: Is Social Constructivism Soluble in Critical Naturalism? [NAME] Andler.- Chapter 20: Scientific Representation, Reflexivity, and the Possibility of Constructive Realism; Tarja Knuuttila.- Chapter 21: The Limits of Realism in the Philosophy of Social Science; [NAME] Ruben.- Chapter 22:   The Social Re-Construction of Agency; [NAME] 23: Local Realism. An Analysis of Social Choice Theory; Obdulia Torres.- Chapter 24: Objectivity and Visual Practices in Science and Art; Chiara Ambrosio.- Chapter 25: Cultural Information: Don’t Ask, Don’t Tell; [NAME]. TEAM D: PHILOSOPHY OF THE PHYSICAL SCIENCES.- Chapter 26: Introducing QBism; [NAME] 27: A Critic Looks at QBism; Guido Bacciagaluppi.- Chapter 28: [NAME] and Metaphysics; F.A. Muller.- Chapter 29:  Assessing the Status of the Common Cause Principle; [NAME] Rédei.- Chapter 30: A Note on Strong Causal Closedness and Completability of Classical Probability Spaces; [NAME] and [NAME] Marczyk.- Chapter 31: Artificial Examples of Empirical Equivalence; Pablo Acuña.- Chapter 32: The Measurement Problem is Your Problem Too; Ronnie Hermens.- Chapter 33: [NAME] and Cons of Physics in Logics; Petr Švarný.- Chapter 34: How Fundamental Physics Represents Causality; [NAME] and [NAME] 35: How Fundamental Physics Represents Causality. Comment; [NAME] and Roland Poellinger.- Chapter 36: Good Just Isn’t Good Enough - Humean Chances and Boltzmannian Statistical Physics; Claus Beisbart.- Chapter 37: Unsharp Humean Chances in Statistical Physics: A Reply to Beisbart; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 38: Noncommutative Causality in Algebraic Quantum Field Theory; Gábor Hofer-Szabó.- Chapter 39: Lost in Translation. A Comment on “Noncommutative Causality in Algebraic Quantum Field Theory”; Dustin Lazarovici.- Chapter 40: [NAME] in GRW Quant | This volume sheds light on still unexplored issues and raises new questions in the main areas addressed by the philosophy of science. Bringing together selected papers from three main events, the book presents the most advanced scientific results in the field and suggests innovative lines for further investigation. It explores how discussions on several notions of the philosophy of science can help different scientific disciplines in learning from each other. Finally, it focuses on the relationship between Cambridge and Vienna in twentieth century philosophy of science. The areas examined in the book are: formal methods, the philosophy of the natural and life sciences, the cultural and social sciences, the physical sciences and the history of the philosophy of science. | <p>Presents the most advanced researches in the area of philosophy of science, collecting contributions by some of the most renowned scholars in the field</p><p>The significant quality and originality of the papers appearing in the volume make it an indispensable tool for the study of philosophy of science and for the comprehension of its latest and future developments</p><p>Reflects the findings from three events organised by the ESF Research Networking Programme        </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-90-481-2920-1 | Philosophy | [NAME] | Chun-chieh [NAME], National Taiwan University College of Liberal Arts, Taipei, Taiwan; [NAME], East Carolina University Dept. History, Greenville, NC, USA | Dao Companion to Japanese Confucian Philosophy |  | Dao Companions to Chinese Philosophy |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 500 p. | 0 | approx. | 169.95 | 169.95 | 181.85 | 186.95 | 153 | 244 | English | Philosophy | Non-Western Philosophy | SCE21000 | HPD | Religious Studies | SCV26000 | HRA | Philosophy | Handbook | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Confucian Philosophy in Japan; C.-C. [NAME], J.A. Tucker.- 1: [NAME] and [NAME]; J.A. Tucker.- 2: Japanese Understandings of Ghosts and Spirits; J.W. Boot.- 3: [NAME] Philosophy of Ki; M.E. Tucker.- 4: Ito Jinsai's Interpretations of Confucius and the Analects; C.-C. Huang.- 5: [NAME] Political Philosophy; O. Lidin.- 6: [NAME] and Kaiho Seiryo; O. Ansart.- 7: Dazai Shundai Understanding of [NAME]; P. Flueckiger.- 8: Confucianism and the Ako Ronin Debate; B. Steben.- 9: The [NAME] and [NAME]; W.M. Ng.- 10: Confucianism and Nativism; P. Nosco.- 11: Confucianism and Kokugaku philosophy; M. McNally.- 12: Confucian Philosophies of Education; M. Tsujimoto.- 13: [NAME]; G. Smits.- 14: Ando Shoeki's Critique of Confucianism; [NAME] 15: Meiji Confucianism; author yet unknown.- 16: Confucianism in Post-War Japan; [NAME] 17: Confucianism as a Living Philosophy in Japan and East Asia; author yet unknown.- Index. | [NAME] to Japanese Confucian Philosophy will be part of the handbook series Dao Companion to Chinese Philosophy, published by [NAME]. This series is being edited by Professor [NAME], Professor of Philosophy at Kutztown University and Editor of Dao: A Journal of Comparative Philosophy. This volume includes original essays by scholars from the U.S., Europe, Japan, and China, discussing important philosophical writings by Japanese Confucian philosophers. The main focus, historically, will be the early-modern period (1600-1868), when much original Confucian philosophizing occurred, and Confucianism in modern Japan. [NAME] to Japanese Confucian Philosophy makes a significant contribution to the [NAME] handbook series, and equally to the field of Japanese philosophy. This new volume including original philosophical studies will be a major contribution to the study of Confucianism generally and Japanese philosophy in particular. | <P>First comprehensive publication in English on Japanese Confucian Philosophy in decades</P> <P>Includes indepth philosophical analyses of major Japanese Confucian writings</P> <P>Features philosophical scholarship by Amerian, European, Chinese and Japanese scholars</P> <P>Highlights the Japanese development and interpretation of Confucian ideas</P> <P>Analyzes Japanese Confucian philosophy within East Asian and Global contexts</P> <P>Edited by the main scholars in the field</P> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05205-2 | Philosophy | Kapsner | [NAME], Ludwig-Maximilians University, Munich, Germany | Logics and Falsifications | A New Perspective on Constructivist Semantics | Trends in Logic | 40 | 1 | 2014 | 280 | Hard cover | Book | V, 280 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Language Translation and Linguistics | SCI21041 | UYQL | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-06-10 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Part 1. Background.- Introduction to Part One.- Constructivism.- Intuitionism.- Gaps, [NAME] and Paraconsistency.- Part 2. Falsifications.- Introduction to Part Two.- From Proofs to Verifications, and on to Falsifications.- Falsificationism.- Part 3. Logics.- Introduction to Part Three.- Stage Five: Pure Falsificationism and Dual Intuitionistic Logic.- Stage Two: Expanded Verificationism and the Logic N3.- Stage Four.- Stage Three: Hybrid Strategies.- Summary.- Appendix. | This volume examines the concept of falsification as a central notion of semantic theories and its effects on logical laws. The point of departure is the general constructivist line of argument that [NAME] has offered over the last decades. From there, the author examines the ways in which falsifications can enter into a constructivist semantics, displays the full spectrum of options, and discusses the logical systems most suitable to each one of them. While the idea of introducing falsifications into the semantic account is [NAME]'s own, the many ways in which falsificationism departs quite radically from verificationism are here spelled out in detail for the first time.The volume is divided into three large parts. The first part provides important background information about Dummett’s program, intuitionism and logics with gaps and gluts. The second part is devoted to the introduction of falsifications into the constructive account and shows that there is more than one way in which one can do this. The third part details the logical effects of these various moves. In the end, the book shows that the constructive path may branch in different directions: towards intuitionistic logic, dual intuitionistic logic and several variations of [NAME] logics. The author argues that, on balance, the latter are the more promising routes to take. | <p>Offers a new approach to Dummettian arguments for constructive logic</p><p>Introduces and analyzes several new logical systems</p><p>Shows new connections between ideas from the literature on intuitionism, falsificationism, paraconsistency and relevant logic</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11649 | Mathematics and Statistics
 | 978-94-017-8815-1 | Philosophy | Macneill | [NAME], Singapore, Singapore | Ethics and the Arts |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 290 | Hard cover | Book | X, 290 p. 8 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Table of ContentsIntroduction• [NAME] and ethics: Chapter 1 [NAME] Part 1: What is the relation between Arts and Ethics?• At the Crossroads of Ethics and Aesthetics: Chapter 2 Noël Carroll  Distinguished Professor, [NAME], City University of New York • Nexus between aesthetics and ethics: Chapter 3 [NAME] Little*  Emeritus Professor, Centre for Values, Ethics and the Law in Medicine, University of Sydney  Part 2: The Arts and Ethics• performing arts  • theatre  • Theatre and ethics: Chapter 4  [NAME] in Theatre and Performance Studies Department of Drama, Queen Mary University of London  Witnessing Shadows: Chapter 5  [NAME]  Professor Department of English, Stanford University • Actor's Embodied Experience: Chapter 6 [NAME] Professor of Performance Practice Drama Department, University of Exeter   • dance: Chapter 7 Philipa Rothfield Brief Bio: Senior Lecturer in Philosophy at La Trobe University, Melbourne, Australia. She writes on philosophy of the body largely in relation to dance.  She has engaged with the work of Merleau-Ponty, Nietzsche, [NAME] and [NAME], to see what each of these philosophers bring to dance and also to see what dance brings to philosophy.  Alongside these commitments, she has performed with [NAME] (director Dance Exchange, Australia), most recently in [NAME]' Dance for the Time Being, (Melbourne, January and March 2010). She also reviews dance for RealTime, an Australian arts magazine. • Aboriginal dance and performance: Chapter 8 ‘Listening to ‘country’ as ethics’<br [NAME] this is meant “the practice itself, the methodology which has been developed to create the work ‘in place’, ‘sitting down in country’ is in itself a commitment to an ethical way of making art.” [NAME] personal correspondence, 2011.] [NAME]* Director: Marrigeku Theatre Company and Stalker Theatre Company    • visual arts  • painting: Chapter 9 [NAME], ‘Merleau-Ponty and the Question of Painting’ Topic from her PhD thesis: PhD in Art Theory, Essex University (1997): Merleau-Ponty and the Question of Painting Head of Department Department of Visual Cultures, Goldsmiths, University of London • photography: Chapter 10  Yet to identify the appropriate person  To consult with [NAME] (above) who has listed (as forthcoming) ‘The Photographic Stare’, Philosophy of Photography. • film and documentary  • film: Chapter 11 [NAME] and [NAME]  Authors: [NAME] and [NAME]. 2010. Film and Ethics: Foreclosed Encounters. New York: Routledge. [NAME]: Professor of French Discourses of Sexuality at the University of Exeter, UK. Director of the Centre for the Interdisciplinary Study of Sexuality and Gender in Europe (CISSGE), in the School of Arts, Languages and Literatures at Exeter. • documentary: Chapter 12 [NAME]* Brief Bio: [NAME] is a human rights documentary filmmaker. Her films have won more than 70 international and national awards. She is a Brazilian professor of public health and bioethics and her fields of research are reproductive and sexual rights, access to high cost medicine, psychiatric prisons, secular state and research ethics. She has agreed to write on documentaries and ethics and is an ideal person for this chapter. Film Director, Board member of International Women’s Health; One of the founders of Anis: Institute of Bioethics, Human Rights and Gender, feminist group dedicated to bioethics in Latin America. • music  • Music and Morality: Chapter 13 [NAME] Professor of PhilosophyDirector, Center For Vietnamese Philosophy, Culture, and Society College of the Liberal | This book proposes that the highest expression of ethics is an aesthetic. It suggests that the quintessential performance of any field of practice is an art that captures an ethic beyond any literal statement of values. This is to advocate for a shift in emphasis, away from current juridical approaches to ethics (ethicalcodes or regulation), toward ethics as an aesthetic practice—away from ethics as a minimal requirement, toward ethics as an aspiration. The book explores the relationship between art and ethics: a subject that has fascinated philosophers from ancient Greece to the present. It explores this relationship in all the arts: literature, the visual arts, film, the performing arts, and music. It also examines current issues raised by ‘hybrid’ artists who are working at the ambiguous intersections between art, bioart and bioethics and challenging ethical limits in working with living materials. In considering these issues the book investigates the potential for art and ethics to be mutually challenged and changed in this meeting.The book is aimed at artists and students of the arts, who may be interested in approaching ethics and the arts in a new way. It is also aimed at students and teachers of ethics and philosophy, as well as those working in bioethics and the health professions. It will have appeal to the ‘general educated reader’ as being current, of considerable interest, and offering a perspective on ethics that goes beyond a professional context to include questions about how one approaches ethics in one’s own life and practices. | <p>This book explores the relationship between art and ethics</p><p>Numerous step-by-step tutorials help the reader to learn quickly</p><p>A special chapter on next generation [NAME] prepares readers for the future</p><p>Includes ten tips on how to protect flash sites from hackers</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04632-7 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Turku, Turku, Finland | Social Justice in Practice | Questions in Ethics and Political Philosophy | Studies in Applied Philosophy, Epistemology and Rational Ethics | 14 | 1 | 2014 | 167 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 167 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Political Philosophy | SCE37000 | HPS | Political Theory | SCX18010 | JPA | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Theory and Practice.- Action and Uncertainty.- Unmasking in Justices.- Privacy and Justice.- Morality and Inner Life.- Self-Deception as an Explanation. | In this book the practical dimension of social justice is explained using the analysis and discussion of a variety of well-known topics. These include: the relation between theory and practice in normative political philosophy; the issue of justice under uncertainty; the question of whether we can and should unmask social injustices by means of conspiracy theories; the issues of privacy and the right to privacy; the issue of how certain psychological states may affect our moral obligations, in particular the obligation to treat others fairly; and finally the concepts of morality, fairness, and self-deception. The primary goal of the book is to provide readers with an updated discussion of some important and practical social justice issues. These issues are presented from a new perspective, based on the author´s research. It is hoped that bringing these topics together in a single book will promote the emergence of new insights and challenges for future research.[NAME] is a professor at the Department of Philosophy at the University of Turku, Finland. His research focuses on ethics and political philosophy. | <p>Discusses issues of traditional social justice in an innovative way</p><p>Invites to rethink traditional political theory and envisions the need to expand its scope</p><p>Focuses on practical aspects of social justice</p><p>Written by an expert in the field</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04198-8 | Philosophy | Reboul | [NAME], [NAME], CNRS UMR5304 Institute for Cognitive Sciences, [NAME], France | Mind, Values, and [NAME] | Philosophical Essays in Honor of [NAME] 1 |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 550 | Hard cover | Book | V, 550 p. | 0 | final | 169.99 | 169.99 | 181.89 | 186.99 | 153 | 226.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Semantics | [NAME] | CFG | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Dedication: K.M.: [NAME]; A. Garcia.- Introduction; A. Reboul.- Part 1. Metaphysics.- Formal objects and the argument from knowledge; J. Leech.- The naming of facts and the methodology of language-based metaphysics; A. Betti.- The truth on predicates and connectives; J. Stern.- Truth-makers and convention T; J. Wolenski.- From grounding to truth-making: some thoughts; F. Correia.- Fundamental ontology and ontology of epistemic processes; P. Livet.- Truth and Tropes; K. Lehrer & J. Tolliver.- The facts of tropes; [NAME] Hochberg.- The transcendental metaphysics of G.F. Stout: A Defence and Elaboration of Trope Theory; F. Mac Bride.- Two problems for resemblance nominalism; [NAME] the colours; B. Schnieder.- Predication; P. Leonardi.-Temporal parts and spatial location; [NAME], formal and thin relations; F. Clementz.- All relations are internal — the New Version; I. Johansson.- Connectives, prenectives and dishonoured cheques of metaphysical explanations; P. Blum.- Because; A. Varzi.- Why metaphysicians do not explain; I. Brinck, [NAME], J. Persson & N-E. Sahlin.- Science and metaphysics: the case of quantum physics; M. Esfeld.- Part 2. History of philosophy.- [NAME]; J. Sebestik.- Bolzano versus Kant: Mathematics as [NAME]; P. Cantù.- Le direct et l’oblique: sur quelques aspects antiques et [NAME] théorie brentanienne des relatifs; [NAME] philosophy and its institutions: Remarks on the Philosophical Society of the University of Vienna (1888-1938); D. Fisette.- La noción de valor en la filosofía de Meinong; [NAME] Ferran.- Austrian and Hungarian philosophy: On the logic of Wittgenstein and Pauler; B. Smith.- Winnowing Wittgenstein: what’s worth salvaging from the wreck of the Tractatus; P. Simons.- Wittgenstein, ses prédécesseurs et ses contemporains; M. Ouelbani.- [NAME] on [NAME] and cosmic emotions; M. Marion.- Le dogme de la vérité selon Parménide: le voir peut être factif sans [NAME], et “dicible” n’est pas véridictionnel ; J-M. Monnoyer.- The mind-body problem in Husserl and Merleau-Ponty; R. Lanfredini.- Locke and the problem of weakness of the will; R. Glauser.- Bergson, truth-making, and the retrograde movement of the true; D. Schulthess. | This book addresses five main topics of metaphysics in its first section: formal objects and truth-makers; tropes; properties and predicates; varieties of relations; and the notion of explanation in metaphysics. The second part of this volume focuses on the history of philosophy with an emphasis on Austrian philosophy: the ideas of Bolzano, [NAME], [NAME], amongst others, are explored in the papers presented here.This is the first volume in a two-volume set that originates from papers presented to Professor [NAME], covering the subjects that he contributed to during his career including ontology, mind and value, history and philosophy of mind and philosophy of language. This volume contains thirty two chapters, written by researchers from across Europe, North America and North Africa.These papers cover topics in metaphysics ranging from Lehrer and Tolliver’s discussion of truth and tropes, to [NAME]’s defence of the distinction between thick and thin relations and Persson and [NAME]’s presentation of the difficulties inherent in applying the concept of explanation in metaphysics.Papers on the history of philosophy include a look at Bolzano’s formative years and his conception of mathematics. [NAME] examines [NAME]’s adverbial theory of judgment and Fisette traces the history of the Philosophical Society of the University of Vienna in the late 19th and early 20th century. Marion contests the trendy pragmatist accounts that lump [NAME] and [NAME] together and there are analyses of Locke and Bergson’s work, amongst the many papers presented here.This volume contains three chapters in French and one in Spanish. The second volume of this set looks at ethics, values and emotions, epistemology, perception and consciousness, as well as philosophy of mind and philosophy of language. | <p>Deep metaphysical analyses of the notion of truth-making</p><p>Discussion of the notion of explanation in metaphysics</p><p>Overview of Austrian philosophy from Bolzano to Wittgenstein</p><p>A complete bibliography of [NAME] work</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05145-1 | Philosophy | Reboul | [NAME], Institute  for Cognitive Sciences, [NAME], France | Mind, Values, and [NAME] | Philosophical Essays in Honor of [NAME] 2 |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 525 | Hard cover | Book | V, 525 p. | 0 | final | 169.99 | 169.99 | 181.89 | 186.99 | 153 | 226.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy | SCE00003 | HP | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Introduction; [NAME], 10.- Part I: Values, Ethics and Emotions.- Chapter 2. Alternatives and Responsibility: An Asymmetrical Approach; [NAME] 3. The Normativity of Evaluative Concepts; [NAME], 18.- Chapter 4. For [NAME]’s sake; T. Rønnow-Rasmussen.- Chapter 5. Knowledge, Emotion, Value and Inner Normativity: When [NAME] meets Collective Persons; [NAME] Ziv.- Chapter 6. The Argument of Ethical Naturalism; B. Baertschi.- Chapter 7. Why We Don’t Perceive Aesthetic Properties; [NAME] 8. Literature, Emotions and the Possible: Hazlitt and [NAME]; P. Lombardo.- Chapter 9. L’avenir du crétinisme; P. Engel.- Part II. Epistemology, Perception, and Consciousness.- Chapter 10. Three Easy Points on Relative Truth; D. Marconi.- Chapter 11. [NAME] as a Modification; [NAME] Schaar.- Chapter 12. The Epistemological Disunity of Memory; F. Teroni.- Chapter 13. The Vocabulary of Epistemology, with observations on some surprising shortcomings of the English language; G. Sundholm.- Chapter 14. The Blurred Hen; C. Calabi.- Chapter 15. How Picture Perfection Defies Cognitive Impenetrability; A. Voltolini.- Chapter 16. Singular Thoughts, Seeing Doubles and Delusional Misidentification; P. Gerrans.- Chapter 17. Reconstructing (Phenomenal) Consciousness; A. Paternoster.- Chapter 18. Basic Intentionality, Primitive Awareness and Awareness of Oneself; [NAME] Part III: Philosophy of Mind and Philosophy of Language.- Chapter 19. [NAME] as a Basis for the Specification of Neural Correlates; U. Meixner.- Chapter 20. Simulation vs. Theory-Theory: A Plea for an Epistemological Turn; J. Deonna & B. Nanay.- Chapter 21. Mental Simulation and the Reification of Beliefs; J. Dokic.- Chapter 22. Numerals and Word Sequences; R. Casati.- Chapter 23. Frege’s New Language; J. Barnes.- Chapter 24. On Liars, ‘Liars’ and Harmless Self-Reference; [NAME] 25. Constitutive vs. Normative Accounts of Speech and Mental Acts; [NAME] 26. M&Ms – Mentally Mediated Meanings; [NAME] 27. Mental Files and Identity; F. Recanati.- Chapter 28. Did ‘Madagascar’ Undergo a Change in Referent?; M. Santambrogio.- Chapter 29. Live metaphors; A. Reboul.- Chapter 30. [NAME] and the Syntacticisation of Scope-Discourse Semantics; L. Rizzi. | There are three themed parts to this book: values, ethics and emotions in the first part, epistemology, perception and consciousness in the second part and philosophy of mind and philosophy of language in the third part. Papers in this volume provide links between emotions and values and explore dependency between language, meanings and concepts and topics such as the liar’s paradox, reference and metaphor are examined.This book is the second of a two-volume set that originates in papers presented to Professor [NAME], covering the subjects that he contributed to during his career. This volume opens with a paper by Moya, who proposes that there is an asymmetrical relation between the possibility of choice and moral responsibility. The first part of this volume ends with a description of foolishness as insensitivity to the values of knowledge, by [NAME]. Marconi’s article makes three negative claims about relative truth and Sundholm notes shortcomings of the English language for epistemology, amongst other papers. This section ends with a discussion of the term ‘subjective character’ by Nida-Rümelin, who finds it misleading.The third part of this volume contains papers exploring topics such as the mind-body problem, whether theory of mind is based on simulation or theory and [NAME] shows that the most common analyses of the so-called '[NAME]' paradox are wanting. At the end of this section, Rizzi introduces syntactic cartography and illustrates its use in scope-discourse semantics.This second volume contains twenty nine chapters, written by both high profile and upcoming researchers from across Europe, North America and North Africa.The first volume of this set has two main themes: metaphysics, especially truth-making and the notion of explanation and the second theme is the history of philosophy with an emphasis on Austrian philosophy. | <p>Explores links between emotions and values in ethics</p><p>Presents new approaches to epistemology and perception</p><p>Discusses dependency between language, meanings and concepts</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8844-1 | Philosophy | Rendtorff | [NAME], Roskilde University, Roskilde, Denmark | Ethics of Organizations and Philosophy of Management | A Perspective of Contemporary French Philosophy and Social Theory | Ethical Economy | 49 | 1 | 2014 | 250 | Hard cover | Book | 250 p. 10 illus. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 143.5 | English | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Operations Research/Decision Theory | SCW23067 | KJT | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-05-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1.Introduction: Basic concepts of business ethics.- 2. Early contemporary French philosophy and business ethics .- 3. Phenomenology and existentialism .- 4. The epistemological tradition and organizations .- 5. Structuralism and post-structuralism .- 6. Postmodernism and hyper modernism.- 7. Discussion: What can French philosophy do for business ethics? | This book demonstrates how the conceptual resources of contemporary French philosophy from the early 20thCentury to the present day can be applied to give us new perspectives on business ethics and the ethics of organizations. In providing an overview of possible applications, the book covers a wide range of philosophers, philosophical movements and perspectives and provides detailed analyses of core materials relevant to business ethics. It explores and analyzes French philosophy, taking into account phenomenology, existentialism, French epistemology, structuralism, post-structuralism, deconstruction and postmodernism as well as recent discussions of philosophy of organizations and management.Each chapter contains suggestions for further reading and educational illustrations of possible applications to the mainstream business ethics and ethics of organization literature. | <p>A comprehensive overview that uniquely applies French philosophy to business ethics<br></p><p>Provides a new perspective of business ethics<br></p><p>Broad appeal not only to economics, management science and philosophy, but also to the general readers</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04360-9 | Philosophy | Silva | [NAME], University of Helsinki, Helsinki, Finland; [NAME], University of Jyväskylä Dept. Social Sciences & Philosophy, Jyväskylä, Finland | Active Perception in the History of Philosophy | From Plato to Modern Philosophy | Studies in the History of Philosophy of Mind | 14 | 1 | 2014 | 292 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 292 p. 2 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | History of Philosophy | SCE15000 | HPC | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction: The World as a Stereogram; [NAME] and Mikko Yrjönsuuri.- 2. Plato: Interaction Between the External Body and the Perceiver in the [NAME]; Pauliina Remes.- 3. Activity, Passivity, and Perceptual Discrimination in Aristotle; Klaus Corcilius.- 4. On Activity and Passivity in Perception: Aristotle, Philoponus, and Pseudo-Simplicius; Miira Tuominen.- 5. [NAME] on Active Perception; [NAME] Silva.- 6. Avicenna on the Soul’s Activity in Perception; [NAME]. Medieval Theories of Active Perception: An Overview; [NAME] Silva.- 8. Agent Sense in Averroes and Latin Averroism; Jean-Baptiste Brenet.- 9. Active Perception from Nicholas of Cusa to [NAME]; Cees Leijenhorst.-10. Seeing Distance; Mikko Yrjönsuuri.- 11. Descartes and Active Perception; Cecilia Wee.- 12 Locke and Active Perception; Vili Lähteenmäki.- 13. Spinoza on Activity in Sense Perception; Valtteri Viljanen.-14. Berkeley and Activity in Visual Perception; [NAME] Paukkonen.-15. Activity and Passivity in Theories of Perception: Descartes to [NAME]; [NAME]. | The aim of the present work is to show the roots of the conception of perception as an active process, tracing the history of its development from Plato to modern philosophy. The contributors inquire into what activity is taken to mean in different theories, challenging traditional historical accounts of perception that stress the passivity of percipients in coming to know the external world. Special attention is paid to the psychological and physiological mechanisms of perception, rational and non-rational perception and the role of awareness in the perceptual process.Perception has often been conceived as a process in which the passive aspects - such as the reception of sensory stimuli - were stressed and the active ones overlooked. However, during recent decades research in cognitive science and philosophy of mind has emphasized the activity of the subject in the process of sense perception, often associating this activity to the notions of attention and intentionality. Although it is recognized that there are ancient roots to the view that perception is fundamentally active, the history remains largely unexplored.The book is directed to all those interested in contemporary debates in the fields of philosophy of mind and cognitive psychology who would like to become acquainted with the historical background of active perception, but for historical reliability the aim is to make no compromises. | <p>Offers a unique examination of the most relevant authors on active perception throughout the history of philosophy</p><p>Presents chapters written by the foremost experts in the field</p><p>Includes a collection of essays which is essential for understanding the origin of the contemporary discussions in the philosophy of perception</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8773-4 | Philosophy | Smith | [NAME], [NAME] 30, Dordrecht, The Netherlands; [NAME], Northern Michigan University Dept. Psychology, Marquette, MI, USA | Brain, Mind and Consciousness in the History of Neuroscience |  | History, Philosophy and Theory of the Life Sciences | 6 | 1 | 2014 | 403 | Hard cover | Book | X, 403 p. 26 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy of Biology | SCE24000 | HP | Neuropsychology | [NAME] | JMM | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; C.U.M.Smith and H.A. Whitaker.- Chapter 1. Beginnings: ventricular neuropsychology; C.U.M.Smith.- Chapter 2. Return of the Repressed: [NAME] in the History of Mind and Brain Sciences; [NAME] Meehan.- Chapter 3. ‘Struck, As It Were, With Madness:’ The Phenomenology of Animal Spirits in the Neurology of Thomas Willis; [NAME] Tabb.- Chapter 4. Hooke’s mechanical mind; [NAME] MacIntosh.- Chapter 5. [NAME]: An instructive 18th century perspective on the mind-body problem; [NAME] Beretta.- Chapter 6. Reflections of western thinking on 19th C Ottoman thought: A critique of the 'hard-problem' by [NAME]; [NAME]. [NAME] (1817–1878): Embodied Cognition, Vitalism, and the Evolution of Symbolic Perception; Huw Price.- Chapter 8. [NAME]: brain, mind and the ‘hard problem’; C.U.M.Smith.- Chapter 9. Problems of Consciousness in Nineteenth Century British and [NAME]; J Wayne Lazar.- Chapter 10. Emil du Bois-Reymond’s Reflections on Consciousness ; [NAME] Finkelstein.- Chapter 11. [NAME] and the “Theatre” of Consciousness; [NAME] 12. The enigmatic deciphering of the neuronal code of word meaning; [NAME] 13. [NAME] and the history of consciousness; [NAME] 14. The ‘hard problem’ and the Cartesian strand in British neurophysiology: [NAME], Foster, Sherrington, Eccles; C.U.M.Smith.- Chapter 15. Is there a link between quantum mechanics and consciousness?; [NAME] Ward.- Chapter 16. Consciousness and neuronal microtubules: the Penrose-Hameroff quantum model in retrospect; [NAME] Frixione.- Chapter 17. [NAME]: Slavery and the Self in the Twenty-first Century; [NAME] 18. Mind and Brain: Toward an Understanding of Dualism; [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. | This volume of essays examines the problem of mind, looking at how the problem has appeared to neuroscientists (in the widest sense) from classical antiquity through to contemporary times. Beginning with a look at ventricular neuropsychology in antiquity, this book goes on to look at Spinozan ideas on the links between mind and body, [NAME] and the foundation of Neurology, Hooke’s mechanical model of the mind and [NAME] approach to the mind-body problem.The volume offers a chapter on the 19th century Ottoman perspective on western thinking. Further chapters trace the work of nineteenth century scholars including [NAME], [NAME] and Emil du Bois-Reymond. The book covers significant work from the twentieth century, including an examination of [NAME] and the history of consciousness, and particular attention is given to the development of quantum consciousness. Chapters on slavery and the self and the development of an understanding of Dualism bring this examination up to date on the latest 21st century work in the field.At the heart of this book is the matter of how we define the problem of consciousness itself: has there been any progress in our understanding of the working of mind and brain? This work at the interface between science and the humanities will appeal to experts from across many fields who wish to develop their understanding of the problem of consciousness, including scholars of Neuroscience, Behavioural Science and the History of Science. | <p>Traces significant work in neuroscience, from classical antiquity to the 21st century</p><p>Presents historic milestones in the investigation of correlating brain activity with consciousness</p><p>Examines the problem of mind at the interface between science and the humanities, looking at how the problem should be posed</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8735-2 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], Regina Apostolorum Pontifical University, Rome, Italy; [NAME], [NAME], Rome, Italy; Gonzalo Miranda, [NAME], Rome, Italy | Religious Perspectives on Human Vulnerability in Bioethics |  | Advancing Global Bioethics | 2 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Theory of Medicine/Bioethics | SCH66000 | PSAD | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface                         [NAME]   Introduction             The principle of vulnerability: meeting ground of six religions [NAME]    General considerations of the principle of vulnerability in bioethics Vulnerability: How did the principle come about? Gonzalo Miranda    The principle of vulnerability in the UNESCO Declaration on Bioethics and Human Rights Henk ten Have    Vulnerability: Considerations on the Appropriate use of the Term in Bioethics. [NAME] Michel     The principle of vulnerability from philosophical, ethical and legal points of view From six different religious perspectives, this section looks at 1) Anthropology of vulnerability (e.g., questions on human contingency, suffering and mortality); 2)  Ethics of vulnerability (e.g., respect, compassion /mercy, charity / love); 3) Legal aspects of vulnerability (religious and civil)  Vulnerability, Compassion, and Ethical Responsibility: A Buddhist Perspective on the Phenomenology of Illness and Health [NAME]   The Ethical and the Legal Aspects of Vulnerability in the Christian Perspective [NAME]    Family as First Bulwark for the Vulnerable:  Confucian Perspectives on the Anthropology and Ethics of Human Vulnerability [NAME]    Between Tradition and Modernity:  Bioethics, Vulnerabilities and Social Change in Hinduism Prakash Desai Human Vulnerability in Islam [NAME] on human vulnerability and the rabbinic perspective on medical ethics [NAME] to vulnerable groups in six religions This section looks at the way different religious tradtions repond to the need of vulnerable groups in society, in particular children, women, eldery and the handicapped. Buddhist perspectives [NAME]    Christian perspectives [NAME] Colleen M Gallagher Confucian perspectives [NAME] perspectives [NAME]    Isalmic perspectives Dariusch Atighetchi    Jewish perspectives [NAME] and [NAME] [NAME] Heyd​ | With the advance of biomedicine, certain individuals and groups are vulnerable because of their incapacities to defend themselves. The International Bioethics Committee as a UNESCO working group has for the last several years dedicated to deepen this principle of human vulnerability and personal integrity. This book serves to supplement this effort with a religious perspective given a great number of the world’s population is affiliated with some religious traditions. While there is diversity within each of these traditions, all of them carry in them the mission to protect the weak, the underprivileged, and the poor. Thus, here presented is a collection of papers written by bioethics experts from six major world religions—Buddhism, Christianity, Confucianism, Hinduism, Islam, and Judaism—who were gathered to discuss the meaning and implications of the principle of vulnerability in their respective traditions. | <p>Delves deeper into the Principle of Vulnerability which was proposed in the 2005 UNESCO Declaration in Bioethics and Human Rights</p><p>First book to analyze vulnerability from the religious perspective</p><p>Based on a dialogue between experts from six major world religions about the meaning of vulnerability</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04261-9 | Philosophy | Timmerman | [NAME], University of Groningen, Groningen, The Netherlands | Moral Contract Theory and Social Cognition | An Empirical Perspective | Theory and Decision Library A: | 48 | 1 | 2014 | 234 | Hard cover | Book | X, 234 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Industrial, Organisational and Economic Psychology | [NAME] | JMJ | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-02-28 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgements.- I Introduction.- 1 The Practicability Assumption.- 2 Contract Theory and Perspective-Taking.- 3 Perspective-Taking in Moral Judgment.- 4 Perspective-Taking Accuracy and the Contract Test.- 5 How to Use a Contract Test.- II The Translucency Assumption.- 6 Contract Theory and Translucency.- 7 Translucency and the Irrationality of Straightforward Maximization.- 8 Why Not Be an Opportunist?.- 9 When Constrained Maximization is Rational.- 10 Conclusions.- Appendix.-  Index. | This interdisciplinary work draws on research from psychology and behavioral economics to evaluate the plausibility of moral contract theory. In a compelling manner with implications for moral theory more broadly, the author’s novel approach resolves a number of key contingencies in contractarianism and contractualism. Acting in accordance with principles that we could all agree to under certain conditions requires that agents are capable of taking up the perspectives of others. Research in social and developmental psychology shows just how challenging this can be. The author discusses in detail what implications findings on perspective-taking have for contract theory. He concludes with cautious optimism that, despite our limitations, it lies within our power to become better at perspective-taking and to adopt a contractarian or contractualist mode of moral thinking. This does however require us to be much more attentive to the standpoints of others than we tend to be. Contract theorists also assume that agents can be moved to comply with principles that would be the object of agreement, with some arguing they can be so moved out of their own interest. The book show that, in contrast to the suspicion of many philosophers, this idea is largely supported by research on the dynamics of trust and our ability to distinguish trustworthy from untrustworthy others. Bringing a welcome dose of realism to the debate on contract theory, the author shows the value of assessing moral theories from an empirical perspective. | <p>First study to evaluate the empirical plausibility of moral contract theory</p><p>Reveals that certain crucial assumptions of moral contract theory that have been controversial are in fact plausible in the light of empirical findings</p><p>First comprehensive study to scrutinize the implications of recent empirical findings on social cognition for moral theory</p><p>Highly interdisciplinary study, relating insights from philosophy with results from social psychology, development psychology, and behavioural economics</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04161-2 | Philosophy | [NAME] | [NAME], Universität Duisburg-Essen, Essen, Germany | The Concept of Reduction |  | Philosophical Studies Series | 121 | 1 | 2014 | 226 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 226 p. 3 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Statistical Theory and Methods | SCS11001 | PBT | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Chapter 1. Introduction.- Part 1. The Concept of Reduction—An Explication.- Chapter 2. How to Approach Reduction: Explication and Meta-Science.- Chapter 3. The Puzzle of Reduction.- Chapter 4. Reductive Explanation and Mechanistic Explanation.- Chapter 5. Reductive Explanation.- Part 2. The Explication at Work.- Chapter 6. Reduction in the Philosophy of Mind.- Chapter 7. Conceptions of Reduction in the Philosophy of Science.- Chapter 8. Theory Reduction and Holism.- Chapter 9. Reduction Beyond the Reduction Debate.- Chapter 10. The Reductionist’s Commitment. | This volume investigates the notion of reduction. Building on the idea that philosophers employ the term ‘reduction’ to reconcile diversity and directionality with unity, without relying on elimination, the book offers a powerful explication of an “ontological”, notion of reduction the extension of which is (primarily) formed by properties, kinds, individuals, or processes. It argues that related notions of reduction, such as theory-reduction and functional reduction, should be defined in terms of this explication. Thereby, the book offers a coherent framework, which sheds light on the history of the various reduction debates in the philosophy of science and in the philosophy of mind, and on related topics such as reduction and unification, the notion of a scientific level, and physicalism.The book takes its point of departure in the examination of a puzzle about reduction. To illustrate, the book takes as an example the reduction of water. If water reduces to H2O, then water is identical to H2O – thus we get unity. Unity does not come at the price of elimination – claiming that water reduces to H2O, we do not thereby claim that there is no water. But what about diversity and directionality? Intuitively, there should be a difference between water and H2O, such that we get diversity. This is required for there to be directionality: in a sense, if water reduces to H2O, then H2O is prior to, or more basic than water. At least, if water reduces to H2O, then H2O does not reduce to water. But how can this be, if water is identical to H2O? The book shows that the application of current models of reduction does not solve this puzzle, and proposes a new coherent definition, according to which unity is tied to identity, diversity is descriptive in nature, and directionality is the directionality of explanation. | <p>Explores the history and role of reduction in philosophy of science and philosophy of mind</p><p>Offers a new, coherent framework within which various notions of reduction can be defined</p><p>Sheds light on the relation between reductive explanation and neighboring topics, such as mechanistic explanation, unification, levels in science, and metaphysical dependence</p><p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05280-9 | Philosophy | Vitz | [NAME], Azusa Pacific University, Azusa, CA, USA | Reforming the Art of Living | Nature, Virtue, and Religion in Descartes's Epistemology | Philosophical Studies in Contemporary Culture | 24 | 1 | 2014 |  | Soft cover | Book | Approx. 190 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Ethics | SCE14000 | HPQ | Epistemology | SCE13000 | HPK | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-05-30 00:00:00 |  |  | CONTENTS ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS.-ABBREVIATIONS.- INTRODUCTION.- The [NAME] Framework.- MORALITY AS A COSMOPOLITAN ART.- Virtuous BELIEF FORMATION.- Virtue, Volition, AND [NAME] RELIGIOUS IMPLICATIONS.- CONCLUSION.- BIBLIOGRAPHY.- INDEX.​ | Descartes’s concern with the proper method of belief formation is evident in the titles of his works—e.g., The Search after Truth, The Rules for the Direction of the Mind and The Discourse on Method of rightly conducting one’s reason and seeking the truth in the sciences. It is most apparent, however, in his famous discussions, both in the Meditations and in the Principles, of one particularly noteworthy source of our doxastic errors—namely, the misuse of one’s will. What is not widely recognized, let alone appreciated and understood, is the relationship between his concern with belief formation and his concern with virtue. In fact, few seem to realize that Descartes regards doxastic errors as moral errors and as sins both because such errors are intrinsically vicious and because they entail notably deleterious social consequences.Reforming the Art of Living seeks to rectify this rather common oversight in two ways. First, it aims to elucidate the nature of Descartes’s account of virtuous belief formation. Second, it aims both (i) to illuminate the social significance of Descartes’s philosophical program as it relates to the understanding and practice not of science, but of religion and (ii) to develop a kind of Leibnizian critique of this aspect of his program. More specifically, it aims to show that Descartes’s project is “dangerous,” insofar as it is subversive not only of traditional Christianity but also of other traditional forms of religion, both in theory and in practice. | <p>Analyses Descartes’s systematic account of virtuous belief formation </p><p>Explains Descartes’s account from the perspective of his own eclectic, cosmopolitan account of virtue </p><p>Demonstrates the account of belief formation's lasting social significance</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8761-1 | Philosophy | Wohlrapp | Harald R Wohlrapp, Professor emeritus of philosophy Universität Hamburg, Hamburg, Germany | The Concept of Argument | A Philosophical Foundation | Logic, Argumentation & Reasoning | 4 | 1 | 2014 | 517 | Hard cover | Book | X, 517 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Pragmatism | SCE38000 | HPCF | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Introduction.- Chapter 1. Knowledge.- Chapter 2. Research.- Chapter 3. Subjectivity.- Chapter 4. Basic Operations.- Chapter 5. Frame Structures.- Chapter 6. Dialogue Events.- Chapter 7. Validity.- Chapter 8. Argument Analysis.- Chapter 9. Reflexivity.- Chapter 10. Transsubjectivity. | Arguing that our attachment to Aristotelian modes of discourse makes a revision of their conceptual foundations long overdue, the author proposes the consideration of unacknowledged factors that play a central role in argument itself. These are in particular the subjective imprint and the dynamics of argumentation. Their inclusion in a four-dimensional framework (subjective-objective, structural-procedural) and the focus on thesis validity allow for a more realistic view of our discourse practice. Exhaustive analyses of fascinating historical and contemporary arguments are provided. These range from Columbus’s advocacy of the Western Passage to India, over the trial of King Louis XVI during the French Revolution, to today’s highly charged controversies surrounding euthanasia and embryo research.Excavating foundational issues such as the purpose of argument itself (assent of an audience or critical examination of validity claims) and the contested role of argument as a generator of knowledge, the book culminates in a discussion of the relationship between rationality and reasonableness and criticizes the restrictions of ‘rational’ argument relying on fixed logical, economic or cultural criteria that in reality are mutable. Here, a true, open argument requires the infusion of [NAME] principle of ‘transsubjectivity’, which recognizes but transcends the partiality of the individual and which can be seen in the pragmatic and expanding consensus that humanity can control itself to safeguard the future of a fragile, damaged world. | <p>Outlines a thoroughly reflected philosophical fundament of the concept of argument and its role in the growth of knowledge</p><p>Proposes a pragmatic and more nuanced understanding of the concept of argumentative practice and the role of subjectivity in the dynamics of argument</p><p>Deploys fascinating historical and contemporary case studies from the French Revolution to today’s embryo debate</p><p>Critically examines axiomatic ‘rational’ arguments, such as economic ones, to expose the need to transcend the limitations of subjectivity</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05343-1 | Philosophy | Zahle | [NAME], University of Copenhagen, Copenhagen, Denmark; [NAME], University of Copenhagen, Copenhagen, Denmark | Rethinking the Individualism-Holism Debate | Essays in the Philosophy of Social Science | Synthese Library | 372 | 1 | 2014 | 265 | Hard cover | Book | X, 265 p. 4 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Philosophy | Philosophy of the Social Sciences | SCE36000 | HPS | Methodology of the Social Sciences | SCX17000 | JHBC | Philosophy | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction; [NAME] and [NAME] Collin.- Part [NAME] Individualism-Holism.- What is Individualism in Social Ontology? Ontological Individualism vs. Anchor Individualism; [NAME] Epstein.- Social entities and the basis of their powers; [NAME] localism and actor-centered sociology; [NAME] and Group-Control; András Szigeti.- Rethinking Micro-Macro Relations; Petri Ylikoski.- Part II. Methodological Individualism-Holism.- Dead Ends and Live Issues in the Individualism-Holism Debate; [NAME] beyond the individualism/holism debate; [NAME] Bouwel.- Holism, Emergence and the Crucial Distinction; [NAME] Who are the Actors?; [NAME] Collin.- Are Individuals Fickle-Minded?; Mathew McCubbins & Mark Turner. | This collection of papers investigates the most recent debates about individualism and holism in the philosophy of social science. The debates revolve mainly around two issues: firstly, whether social phenomena exist sui generis and how they relate to individuals. This is the focus of discussions between ontological individualists and ontological holists. Secondly, to what extent social scientific explanations may and should, focus on individuals and social phenomena respectively. This issue is debated amongst methodological holists and methodological individualists.In social science and philosophy, both issues have been intensively discussed and new versions of the dispute have appeared just as new arguments have been advanced. At present, the individualism/holism debate is extremely lively and this book reflects the major positions and perspectives within the debate. This volume is also relevant to debates about two closely related issues in social science: the micro-macro debate and the agency-structure debate.This book presents contributions from key figures in both social science and philosophy, in the first such collection on this topic to be published since the 1970s. | <p>Introduces and covers the newest developments in the individualism/holism debate</p><p>Offers the most recent collection of papers on this topic, since 1973</p><p>Presents papers by key figures within the debate, from both philosophy and social science</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05484-1 | Philosophy | Zarefsky | [NAME], Northwestern University, Evanston, IL, USA | Rhetorical Perspectives on Argumentation | Selected Essays by [NAME] | Argumentation Library | 24 | 1 | 2014 | 260 | Hard cover | Book | XVI, 260 p. | 0 | final | 49.99 | 49.99 | 53.49 | 54.99 | 44.99 | 67 | English | Philosophy | Logic | SCE16000 | HPL | Theories of Law, Philosophy of Law, Legal History | SCR11011 | LAB | Philosophy | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Dedication.- Contents.- Acknowledgments.- Introduction.- Part One: Objectives of Studying Argumentation Rhetorically.- 1. Reflections on Making the Case.- 2. Argument as Hypothesis Testing.- 3. Knowledge Claims in Rhetorical Criticism.- 4. What Does an Argument Culture Look Like?.- 5. [NAME] Responsibilities.- Part Two: Approaches to Studying Argumentation Rhetorically.- 6. Product, Process, or Point of View?.- 7. Persistent Questions in the Theory of Argument Fields.- 8. [NAME] in Political Argumentation.- 9. Taking the Jurisprudential Analogy Seriously.- Part Three: Patterns of Rhetorical Argumentation.- 10. Definitions.- 11. Strategic Maneuvering Through Persuasive Definitions: Implications for Dialectic and Rhetoric.- 12. Felicity Conditions for the Circumstantial Ad Hominem: The Case of [NAME] v. Gore.- 13. Terrorism and the Argument from Ignorance.- 14. Arguing about Values: The Problem of Public Moral Argument.- 15. The Appeal for Transcendence: A Possible Response to Cases of Deep Disagreement.- Part Four: Analyses of Rhetorical Argumentation.- 16. [NAME] in the Lincoln-Douglas Debates.-  17. Turning Points in the Galesburg Debate.- 18. Presidential Rhetoric and the Power of Definition.- 19. The Impasse of the Liberal Argument: Speculation on American Politics in the Late 1960s.- 20. Pragma-Dialectical Analysis of Rhetorical Texts: The Case of Barack Obama in Cairo with [NAME]. | This book contains 20 essays tracing the work of [NAME], a leading North American scholar of argumentation from a rhetorical perspective. The essays cohere around 4 general themes: objectives for studying argumentation rhetorically, approaches to rhetorical study of argumentation, patterns and schemes of rhetorical argumentation, and case studies illustrating the potential of studying argumentation rhetorically. These articles are drawn from across [NAME]’s 45-year career. Many of these articles originally appeared in publications that are difficult to access today, and this collection brings the reader up to date on the topic.[NAME]’s scholarship focuses on the role of language in political argumentation, the ways in which argumentation creates public knowledge and belief, the influence of framing and context on what is said and understood, the deployment of particular patterns and schemes of argumentation in public reasoning, and the influence of debate on politics and governance. All these topics are addressed in this book.Each of the conceptual essays includes brief application to specific cases, and five extended case studies are also presented in this volume. The case studies cover different themes: two explore famous political debates, the third focuses on presidential rhetoric across the course of United States history, the fourth on the arguments for liberalism at a time of political polarization, and the fifth on the contemporary effort to engage the United States with the Muslim world.This book is of interest to scholars in the fields of philosophy, logic, law, philosophy of law, and legal history. The range of topics and concepts addressed, the interplay of concepts and cases and the unifying perspective of rhetorical argumentation make this book a valuable read for students of argumentative practice, whether rhetorically or otherwise. | <p>Provides rare insights into [NAME] particular approach to argumentation studies</p><p>Complements works in logic and dialectic by offering a specifically rhetorical approach to argumentation</p><p>Demonstrates the applicability of argumentation to significant questions of public policy</p><p>Offers detailed case studies as well as theoretical treatments</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4939-0622-2 | Psychology | Bornstein | [NAME], University of Nebraska Department of Psychology, Lincoln, NE, USA; [NAME], University of Nebraska Department of Psychology, Lincoln, NE, USA | Justice, Conflict and Wellbeing | Multidisciplinary Perspectives |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 86.5 | 127.5 | English | Psychology | Law and Psychology | SCY34000 | JMK | Psychotherapy and Counseling | [NAME] | MMJT | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | ​      All Else Being Equal: Overcoming the Egalitarian Norm.-    Is Equality a Distributive Justice Principle?.-     A Theory of Hostile Environments: The Roles of Objectification and Perspective Taking.-    What Is Objectification and How and When Is It Harmful?.-    That’s What Friends Are For: Mentors, LAP Lawyers, and Clients with Mental Illness.-    Therapeutic Jurisprudence: A View from the Trenches.-    Mental Illness, Dangerousness, and Police Power Interventions in Pursuit of Justice and Wellbeing.-    From Adjudication to Aftermath: A Comparative Assessment of the Impact of the ICTY on the Balkans.-    Complexity of Accountability for Mass Atrocity.-    Taming the Wild West of Arbitration Ethics.-    The Public Cost of Private Justice.-    Peer Interaction, Adult Supervision, and Conflict: The Baby and the Bathwater.-       Playground Conflicts: Everyday Opportunities for Children to Master Conflict Management​. | Justice, conflict and wellbeing are large topics that occupy researchers from a variety of disciplines, as well as laypeople and policy makers. The three concepts are closely connected: conflict often (though not always) impairs wellbeing, whereas justice often (though not always) enhances it; perceived injustice is a common source of conflict, at multiple levels and calls for justice are a common response to conflict. In addition, each construct has subtypes, such as distributive and procedural justice, individual and group conflict and physical and psychological wellbeing. Although there are established traditions of research on the topics in multiple disciplines, there is little cross-fertilization across disciplines. This volume brings together researchers from social, clinical and educational psychology; law and political science. The unifying theme is how injustice and conflict pose threats to wellbeing, at the micro (individual) and macro (groups and societies) levels. Multi- and interdisciplinary research are at the vanguard of science in the twenty-first century, and the present work applies multi and interdisciplinary perspectives to the important real-world topics of justice, conflict and wellbeing. | Multi and interdisciplinary approach <br>Contains original research, reviews of relevant empirical research, and theory<br>Covers a variety of levels (individual, group, society) and research methods (qualitative and quantitative) | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-531-16517-2 | Psychology | Funke | [NAME], [NAME]. [NAME] f. Psychologie, Jena, Germany; [NAME], [NAME]. [NAME] f. Psychologie, Lüneburg, Germany; [NAME], Belfast, UK; [NAME], University of Auckland Department of Psychology, Auckland, New Zealand | Perspectives on Authoritarianism |  | Politische Psychologie |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Soft cover | Book | Approx. 400 p. | 0 | approx. | 46.68 | 46.68 | 49.95 | 51.35 | 42.99 | 62.5 | English | Psychology | Psychology, general | SCY00007 | JM | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Psychology | Professional book | Springer [NAME] | Planned | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Prelude.- Introduction. - The concept of authoritarianism. - The roots of authoritarianism.- Epilogue | The book documents current developments in research on authoritarianism by well-known experts from all over the world. Adorno et [NAME] study of the authoritarian character and [NAME]'s reconceptualization in the 1980s are legendary – but where has research developed since? Modern perspectives, theoretical approaches and empirical results are assembled in this book which systematically reflects the state of the art in international authoritarianism research. | <p>The book documents current developments in research on authoritarianism by well-known experts from all over the world</p><p>Modern perspectives, theoretical approaches and empirical results are assembled in this book</p><p>Systematically reflection about the state of the art in international authoritarianism research.</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0611-6 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Texas at Arlington, Arlington, TX, USA; [NAME], University of British Columbia, Vancouver, BC, Canada | Handbook of Musculoskeletal Pain and Disability Disorders in the Workplace |  | Handbooks in Health, Work, and Disability |  | 1 | 2014 | 678 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 678 p. 45 illus., 20 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 249 | 249 | 266.43 | 273.9 | 224.5 | 331.5 | English | Psychology | Health Psychology | SCY12020 | MBNH9 | Occupational Medicine/Industrial Medicine | SCH42001 | MMRP | Psychology | Handbook | Springer New York | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | PART I   THE MOST COMMON OCCUPATIONAL MUSCULOSKELETAL PAIN AND DISABILITY DISORDERS.- Occupational Musculoskeletal Pain and Disability Disorders: An Overview.- Back Pain.- Cervical Pain.- Upper Extremity Pain.- Lower Extremity Pain.- Chronic Widespread Pain.-The Problem of Whiplash Injuries: Etiology, Assessment and Treatment.- New Trends of Musculoskeletal Disorders in the Military.- PART II CONCEPTUAL AND METHODOLOGICAL ISSUES.- Search Engines/Resources Available to Obtain the Latest Prevalence and Cost Data for Occupational Pain and Disability Disorders.- Epidemiology of Musculoskeletal Disorders and Workplace Factors.- Acute, Postacute and Chronic Disorders: Differences and Potential Recovery Outcomes.- Psychological and Psychiatric Sequelae of Chronic Musculoskeletal Disorders.- Preemployment and Preplacement Screening of Workers to Prevent Occupational Musculoskeletal Disorders.- Medicolegal Issues Involved in Occupational Musculoskeletal Injuries.- Workers’ Compensation and Other Disability Insurance Systems Involved in Occupational Musculoskeletal Disorders.- Approaches to the Quantitative Physical and Functional Capacity Assessment of Occupational Musculoskeletal Disorders.- Current American Medical Association Guidelines for Evaluating Musculoskeletal Impairment and Maximum Medical Impairment.- PART III INTERVENTION APPROACHES AND TECHNIQUES.- Traditional Medical Intervention Approaches to Musculoskeletal Disorders: A Review.-The Biopsychosocial Approach to the Assessment and Intervention for Musculoskeletal Disorders.- The Interdisciplinary Treatment Approach: The Key Components for Success.- Early Intervention to Prevent the Development of Chronic Musculoskeletal Pain and Disability Disorders.- A Review of Self-Management Techniques for Musculoskeletal Pain.- Work Accommodation Methods for Occupational Musculoskeletal Injuries.- Models of Return-to-Work for Musculoskeletal Disorders: An Update.- Vocational Assessment and Training for Patients with Chronic Occupational Musculoskeletal Disorders.- Real-effectiveness Medicine in Musculoskeletal Disorders.- Future Research Directions for Preventing and Treating Occupational Musculoskeletal Disorders. | Chronic pain from job-related stressors is responsible for countless lost work hours and considerable lost revenue-and if current statistics are any indication, the problem isn't going away anytime soon. Between rising numbers of affected workers and rising health care costs, musculoskeletal pain has taken on crisis proportions.The Handbook of Musculoskeletal Pain and Disability Disorders in the Workplace addresses the complex state of the issues in authoritative and practical fashion. Divided evenly between common occupational pain disorders, conceptual and methodological issues, and evidence-based intervention methods, this comprehensive reference presents current findings on prevalence, causation and physical and psychological aspects common to these disorders. Attention is given to working-world concerns, including insurance and compensation issues and AMA guidelines for disability evaluations. Also, specialized chapters offer lenses for understanding and administering the best approaches for treating specific pain disorders, as well as explore what workplaces can do to accommodate affected employees and prevent injuries from occurring in the first place. Among the [NAME]'s featured topics:Chronic widespread pain.Whiplash injuries: etiology, assessment and treatment.Acute, postacute and chronic disorders: differences and potential recovery outcomes.Medicolegal issues involved in occupational musculoskeletal injuries.Self-management techniques for musculoskeletal pain.Models of return-to-work for musculoskeletal disorders.The Handbook of Musculoskeletal Pain and Disability Disorders in the Workplace offers expert, up-to-date coverage suited to health psychologists, rehabilitation specialists (including physical, vocational, and occupational therapists), human resources and disability management professionals and occupational medicine physicians. | <p>Reviews and synthesizes the current conceptual research and treatment advances across a wide range of musculoskeletal disorders</p><p>Focuses on most effective treatments to return workers back to occupational settings</p><p>Delves into complexities involved in assessment and treatment of particular musculoskeletal pain and disability disorders</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0608-6 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME], University of California, San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, CA, USA | The Nature of Language | Evolution, Paradigms and Circuits |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 280 p. 86 illus., 55 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Psycholinguistics | SCN35000 | CFD | Psychology | Monograph | Springer New York | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Acknowledgement.- Introduction.- Part I. Bioanthropological Perspective Chapter 1 Evolution of cognitive systems 1.1 Early Ideas 1.2 Darwian Stance Chapter 2 Human and Non-Human Primates 2.1 Overlaps and Differences 2.2 Origin of Language.- Part II. Neurobiological Assumptions Chapter 3 Neural Blueprint 3.1 Genetic Factors 3.2 Neurogenesis Chapter 4 Spatial and Temporal Parameters 4.1 [NAME] 4.2 Electrical Energy.- Part III. Neurolinguistic Reports Chapter 5 Atypical Network 5.1 Children 5.2 Adult Chapter 6 Single Cases 6.1 Language Disorders 6.2 Bilingualism.- Part IV. The Human Language System Chapter 7 The Core System 7.1 Symbolic elements 7.2 Syntactic structures Chapter 8 Meanings 8.1 Semantic Networks 8.2 Theory of Mind.- Conclusions.- Notes Index. | The book The Nature of Language addresses one of the most fundamental questions of mankind: how did language evolve, and what are the neurobiological and cognitive foundations of language processing? This monograph explores these questions from different perspectives to discuss the building blocks of language evolution and how they developed in the way they can be found in modern humans. Furthermore, primarily neural mapping methods of cognition presented in this research provide extremely valuable data about the neural circuitries that are involved in language processing. Thus, the book explores and illustrates cortical mapping in typical language patterns, but also cortical mapping in atypical populations that fail to process particular language aspects. In sum, an evolutionary stance is used to explore how language abilities of the Homo sapiens evolved to communicate for the purposes of conveying information, ideas, emotions, goals, humor, etc. This book presents an evolutionary language model that builds on the cognitive abilities of our evolutionary ancestors, and it allows readers to draw a variety of expansive conclusions from that, including the idea that human language as an interface system provides the basis for consciousness. | <p>Addresses all scholars interested in evolution, biology, neurology, language, cognition and theory of mind</p><p>Uses modern neuroimaging technology to map language and related cognitive functions</p><p>Illustrates and discusses a genetic blueprint for language</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-94-017-8853-3 | Psychology | Korunka | [NAME], University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria; [NAME], University of Wisconsin-Madison, (CQPI), [NAME], WI, USA | The Impact of ICT on Quality of Working Life |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 229 | Hard cover | Book | X, 229 p. 28 illus., 14 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | Positive Psychology | SCY44000 | [NAME] | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Introduction; [NAME] and Christian Korunka.- Chapter 2. Information and Communication Technology and Quality of Working Life. Backgrounds, Facts and Figures; [NAME] 3. Changing Working Conditions at the Onset of the 21st Century: From International Datasets; [NAME], [NAME], Matea Paškvan, [NAME] and [NAME] Gerdenitsch.- Chapter 4. From Work-Life to Work-Age Balance? Acceleration, Alienation and Appropriation at the Workplace; Hartmut Rosa.- Chapter 5. Time and Work Pressure in Today’s Working World; [NAME], Ulrike Stilijanow and Gisa Junghanns.- Chapter 6. Technostress: The Dark Side of Technologies; [NAME], [NAME] and Mercedes Venture.- Chapter 7. The Balance Concept Revisited: Finding Balance to Reduce Stress in a Frantic World of IT; Pascale Carayon and [NAME] 8. New Ways of Working: Impact on Working Conditions, Work-Family Balance, and Well-Being; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] ten Brummelhuis and [NAME] Chapter 9. Trust in Complex Work Systems: A Focus on Information and Communication Technologies; [NAME] and [NAME] 10. Asgeing, Changes, and Quality of Working Life; [NAME], Mathieu Narcy and Serge Volkoff.- Chapter 11. [NAME] and [NAME] of ICT Acceleration for Vulnerable Populations; [NAME] and [NAME] 12. Beyond the Optimal Flow: Pause, Detachment, Serendipity, and Action; [NAME], [NAME] and Patrizia Marti.- Chapter 13. The Future of ICT and Quality of Working Life: Challenges, Benefits, and Risks; [NAME] and [NAME]. | This book discusses the impact and effects of Information and Communication Technologies (ICT) on quality of working life of employees. It describes the changes and the acceleration of processes caused by the widespread use of ICT in a broad range of working areas and in different national contexts. It explores the important role ICT has come to play in nearly all work places in developed societies and the impact it is starting to have on work places in developing countries. The book brings together experts from the fields of ICT and quality of working life and from a variety of backgrounds and disciplines, including sociology, psychology, industrial engineering and macro ergonomics. It discusses the range of current positive and negatives effects as well as the possible increase of both kinds of effects in the future. The final chapter of the book integrates the diverse perspectives of the authors and gives recommendations on how to increase the possible positive outcomes and to diminish negative effects of ICT in an accelerated society. | <p>Re-evaluates the current impact of ICT on Quality of (Working) Life</p><p>Describes changes in different national contexts</p><p>Is written by highly reputable experts and covers the topic from interdisciplinary perspectives</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-05463-6 | Psychology | Moeschberger | [NAME], Taylor University, Upland, IN, USA; [NAME], Coastal Carolina Community College, Jacksonville, NC, USA | Symbols that Bind, Symbols that Divide | The Semiotics of Peace and Conflict | Peace Psychology Book Series |  | 1 | 2014 | 355 | Hard cover | Book | X, 355 p. 16 illus., 12 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Cross Cultural Psychology | SCY20100 | JMH | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Chapter 1.The Functions of Symbols that Divide and Unite by [NAME] and Scott Moeschberge.- Chapter 2. [NAME] and Social Change: The Function of Socialist Monuments in the Post-Yugoslav Space by [NAME] and Boriša Mraović.- Chapter 3. “What We Are, Where We Are Headed”: A Peace March Visits and Ex-Torture Center by Carolina Muñoz Proto.- Chapter 4.Contested Symbols as Social Representations: The Case of Cyprus by [NAME], Tahir Beydola, Giorgos FIlippou and Nekatios Vrachimis.- Chapter 5.Symbols that Speak: Christ and His Word in El Salvador by [NAME] Santos.- Chapter 6.Holocaust Collective Memory in the Context of the Palestinian-Israeli Conflict: A Multifaceted Symbol by Cristina Adriani.- Chapter 7.Understanding Symbols of Division in Post Conflict Northern Ireland by [NAME] and [NAME] in Post-Genocide Rwanda by [NAME] DeZalia.- Chapter 9.Post-Apartheid South Africa: A United or a Divided Nation? By [NAME] Bornman.- Chapter 10.Heritage or Hatred: The Confederate Battle Flag and Current Race Relations in the United States by [NAME]. | This work explores the function of both divisive and uniting symbols in various conflict settings around the world.  It takes a fairly broad perspective on what constitutes a symbol, to include objects such as flags, signs, language, and monuments, all of which convey conflicting meanings in a society affected by conflict.  In addition, the authors include commemorations and other dynamic events that serve as a means for groups or individuals to connect with past generations, celebrate a heritage, and possibly express religiosity. In order to provide context for the nuances surrounding the symbols, there are brief historical overviews for each conflict featured in the volume. In each chapter, three issues are emphasized: the particular symbols that are divisive in the specific culture; how these symbols were used to perpetuate conflict; and how these symbols can be used or modified to bring unification. Contributions come from authors from around the world that have conducted empirical studies on intergroup relationships or have provided significant academic contributions in the area of symbols and collective memories represented in theoretical publications.  Taken together, the contents of the volume provide a rich tapestry of intellectual analyses to the diverse selection of conflict settings from around the globe.  In addition to the nine case studies, there is an introductory chapter, which grounds the discussion in current peace psychology literature as well as provides future directions. This volume is a valuable resource to many, as the focus on symbols can span many disciplines such as political science, anthropology, sociology, psychology, and art.  Furthermore, it is of significant interest to all scholars and peace activists studying these various countries and their conflicts. | <p>Explores the roles of divisive symbols in various conflict settings around the world </p><p>Provides both a historical background as well as psychological and anthropological analyses of the use of symbols in war and conflict </p><p>Contains a concluding chapter focusing on how peace psychologists can contribute to building cultures of peace through a better understanding of semiotics</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0541-6 | Psychology | Prince-Embury | [NAME], Resiliency Institute of Allenhurst, LLC., [NAME], NJ, USA; [NAME], Western University, London, ON, Canada | Resilience Interventions for Youth in Diverse Populations |  | The Springer Series on Human Exceptionality |  | 1 | 2014 | 556 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 556 p. 28 illus., 16 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | Child and School Psychology | SCY12040 | JMC | Social Work | SCX21000 | JKSN | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-03-25 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Part I. Introduction and General Issues.- 1. Building a Science of Resilience Intervention for Youth; [NAME], [NAME]. Review of Resilience Constructs and Conceptual Issues; [NAME] 3. A Three Factor Model of Personal Resiliency and Related Assessment; [NAME]. Creating  [NAME] in Children and Adults: A Strength-Based Approach for Clinical and Non-Clinical Populations; [NAME], Suzanne Brooks.- Part II. Interventions for [NAME] and Non-Clinical Populations.- 5. Using the FRIENDS Programs to Promote Resilience in Cross-Cultural Populations; [NAME], [NAME], Julia Gallegos.- 6. Girls Leading Outward (GLO): A School-Based Leadership Intervention to Promote Resilience for At-Risk Middle School Girls; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], Maurice Elias- 7. [NAME] through Executive Function Training for Homeless and Highly Mobile Preschoolers; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Masten.- 8. Your Journey Together: Promoting Resilience in the Foster Care System; [NAME], [NAME],  [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Likins.- 9. Building Resilience in Young Children the Sesame Street Way; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Lewis.- 10. Enhancing Classroom Resilience with ClassMaps Consultation; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], M. Sikorski.- 11.  The Resilience Doughnut Model an Intervention Program aimed at Building Resilience in Adolescence; [NAME] Worsley.- 12. Community and Residential Programs: Spurwink Mental Health System in Maine; [NAME], [NAME]. Resiliency in Youth who have been Exposed to Violence; [NAME] Ghali.- 14. A Multilevel Approach of Promoting Resilience and a Positive Climate in the School Community during Unsettling Times; Chryse Hatzichristou, [NAME], [NAME] Lampropoulou.- Part III.  Interventions for Clinical Populations.- 15. Developing Social Competence through a Resilience Mode; [NAME],  [NAME], [NAME] Berghorst.- 16. [NAME] in Children with Intellectual Disability; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] Shochet.- 17. Resilience Perspectives for Autism Spectrum Disorder; [NAME], [NAME] Montgomery.- 18. Resilience in ADHD: School-based Intervention to Promote Social-Emotional Well-being; [NAME], [NAME]  Deen.- 18. Applying a Resiliency Perspective to Improve Health and Educational Outcomes for Youth with Chronic Illnesses; [NAME], [NAME] Jaramillo.- 20. [NAME]: A Social Ecological Approach to Intervention with a Trans-sexual Youth; [NAME], [NAME]. | Our uncertain times are hard enough for adults to navigate. For all too many young people—even many who appear to possess good coping skills—the challenges may seem overwhelming. More and more, resilience stands as an integral component in prevention programs geared to children and adolescents, whether at risk or not.Resilience Interventions for Youth in Diverse Populations details successful programs used with children and teens in a wide range of circumstances and conditions, both clinical and non-clinical. New strength-based models clarify the core aspects of resilience and translate them into positive social, health, educational, and emotional outcomes. Program descriptions and case examples cover diverse groups from homeless preschoolers to transgender youth to children with autism spectrum disorders, while interventions are carried out in settings as varied as the classroom and the clinic, the parent group and the playground. This unique collection of studies moves the field toward more consistent and developmentally appropriate application of the science of resilience building.Among the empirically supported programs featured:Promoting resilience in the foster care system.Developing social competence through a resilience model.Building resilience in young children the Sesame Street way.School-based intervention for resilience in ADHD.Girls Leading Outward: promoting resilience in at-risk middle school girls.Resiliency in youth who have been exposed to violence.Resilience Interventions for Youth in Diverse Populations is an essential resource for researchers, professionals/practitioners, and graduate students in clinical child and school psychology, social work, educational psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, developmental psychology, and pediatrics. | <p>Examines interventions for emotional, learning, and behavioral disorders designed to enhance resilience</p><p>Merges complex theory and evidence-based research with case studies of resilience enhancement in diverse populations</p><p>Explores interventions for developing core aspects of resilience as well as assessing treatment effectiveness</p><p>Provides strengths-based constructs to enhance resilience across diverse populations</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-04548-1 | Psychology | Sacipa-Rodriguez | [NAME], Pontifical Javeriana University, Bogota, Colombia; [NAME], Universidad Central de Venezuela, Caracas, Venezuela | Psychosocial Approaches to Peace-Building in Colombia |  | Peace Psychology Book Series | 25 | 1 | 2014 | 155 | Hard cover | Book | XXI, 155 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Community and Environmental Psychology | SCY20070 | JMH | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Background.- Introduction: The Beginnings.- Historical Data about the Colombian Strife.- Part II: Peace-Building in Colombia.- Peace Cultures and Cultural Practices in Colombia.- Reflections on Psychological Damage of People Exposed to War Situations in Colombia.- To feel and to resignify forced displacement in Colombia.- Personal Resources and Empowerment in a Psychosocial Accompaniment Process.- Memory, narrative and social transformation of reality.- Discourse as strategy for the construction of peace cultures.- Genderization and links with illegal armed groups in Colombia.- Eight cultures of peace indicators applied to Colombian Conflict during 2002-2006. | This edited volume summarizes the work of a research group, called Social Bonds and [NAME] of Peace that accompanies and supports victims of socio-political violence in Columbia. The individual chapters focus on the ongoing violence in the Colombian context, a complex and dynamic area in which various groups (drug traffickers, national armed forces, guerrilla fighters, self-defence groups) have been engaged in organized violence for more than 60 years. Emphasis is placed on the psychological consequences of violence and various forms of psychosocial support that psychologists have been providing to the victims of violence. Central to their work is the notion of 'accompanying' those who have been victims of violence, listening to them, engaging them in dialogue and working together to strengthen the resources of victims. The recovery of individual and collective memories of atrocities is discussed as an important avenue for healing and for the empowerment of individuals and groups. The solidarity among victims creates opportunities at the grassroots level to pursue truth, reveal perpetrators of violence, seek public acknowledgment and attain social justice. For perpetrators of violence and members of armed groups, the book addresses a host of psychosocial issues related to disarming, demobilizing and reintegrating former combatants, including children, into society.   Throughout the book, in the spirit of peace psychology, the researchers are engaged in a form of praxis that is cognizant of the wider geohistorical context within which victims and perpetrators are embedded and the dialectical relationship between micro and macro-level events and change. Researchers in Latin American studies, peace psychology, social justice and transitional justice, will find this volume to be an excellent resource. | <p>Describes, analyses and critically discusses the psychological effects of armed conflict in Colombia</p><p>Explores the results of Colombian research action group Social Bonds and [NAME] of Peace </p><p>Includes a chapter linking the historical background of the Colombian conflict to the current situation</p><p>Written by active psychologists based in Colombia</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0783-0 | Psychology | Sherer | [NAME], TIRR Memorial Hermann; University of Texas Medical School at Houston, Houston, TX, USA; [NAME], TIRR [NAME]; Baylor College of Medicine, Houston, TX, USA | Handbook on the Neuropsychology of Traumatic Brain Injury |  | Clinical Handbooks in Neuropsychology |  | 1 | 2014 | 248 | Hard cover | Book | VIII, 248 p. 33 illus., 17 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Psychology | Neuropsychology | [NAME] | JMM | Rehabilitation | SCH55006 | MQV | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part 1:Introduction to Traumatic Brain Injury.- 1.Epidemiology and Societal Impact of Traumatic Brain Injury.- 2.Cognitive and Behavioral Outcomes from Traumatic Brain Injury.- Part 2:Assessment.- 3.Bedside Evaluations.- 4.Comprehensive Assessment.- 5.Outcome Assessment.- 6.Neuroimaging in Traumatic Brain Injury.- Part 3:Intervention.- 7.A Systematic and Evidence-Based Approach to Clinical Management of Patients with Disorders of Consciousness.- 8.Behavioral Assessment of Acute Neurobehavioral Syndromes to Inform Treatment.- 9.Rehabilitation of Memory Problems Associated with Traumatic Brain Injury.- 10.Rehabilitation of Attention and Executive Function Impairments.- 11.Social Communication Interventions.- 12.Impaired Self-awareness.- 13.Emotional Distress Following Traumatic Brain Injury.- 14.Treating and Collaborating With Family Caregivers in the Rehabilitation of Persons with Traumatic Brain Injury.- 15.Comprehensive Brain Injury Rehabilitation in Post-Hospital Treatment Settings.- Part 4:Special Issues.- 16Pediatric Traumatic Brain Injury:  Outcome, Assessment, and Intervention.- 17.Assessment and Treatment of Older Adults with Traumatic Brain Injuries.- Part 5:Mild TBI.- 18.Mild Traumatic Brain Injury.- 19.Malingering in Mild Traumatic Brain Injury.- 20.Special Issues with Mild TBI in Veterans and Active Duty Service Members. | From student athletes to professional football players to military personnel, the experiences of diverse groups are driving clinical and research efforts toward better treatment of traumatic brain injury. And as more is understood about the complexities of the condition, especially in its milder forms, the greater the need for clinical expertise in assessment and intervention.The Handbook on the Neuropsychology of Traumatic Brain Injury collects and synthesizes the latest thinking on the condition in its variety of cognitive and behavioral presentations, matched by a variety of clinical responses. Acknowledging the continuum of injury and the multi-stage nature of recovery, expert contributors review salient research data and offer clinical guidelines for the neuropsychologist working with TBI patients, detailing key areas of impairment, brief and comprehensive assessment methods and proven rehabilitation strategies. Taken together, these chapters provide a framework for best serving a wide range of TBI patients (including children, elders, and patients in multidisciplinary settings) and model treatment that is evidence-based and relevant. A sample of the topics featured in the Handbook: Bedside evaluations in TBI.Outcome assessment in TBI.Collaborating with family caregivers in the rehabilitation of persons with TBI.Behavioral assessment of acute neurobehavioral syndromes to inform treatment.Pediatric TBI: assessment, outcomes, intervention.Special issues with mild TBI in veterans and active duty service members. Expanding professional knowledge on a topic that continues to grow in importance, the Handbook on the Neuropsychology of Traumatic Brain Injury is a premier resource, not only for neuropsychologists but also for other professionals in cognitive care, and trainees entering the field. | <p>Focuses on TBI assessment and intervention </p><p>Includes pediatric and geriatric patients </p><p>Offers practical advice for clinicians </p><p>Authors well known in the field</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-81-322-1803-6 | Psychology | Sinha | [NAME], ASSERT Institute of Management Studies, Patna, India | Psycho-Social Analysis of the Indian Mindset |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. 11 illus. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Psychology | Personality and Social Psychology | SCY20050 | JMS | Cultural Studies | SCX22040 | JFC | Psychology | Monograph | Springer India | Planned | 2014-02-22 00:00:00 |  |  | Framework.- Collectivism and Individualism.- Hierarchy and Power Process.- Spirituality and Materialism.- Religiosity, Secularism, and Sexuality.- Dependence Proneness and Entrepreneurship.- The Paradoxical Mindset.- The Shifting Mindset.- Mindset in the Larger Context.- References.- Glossary.- Author Index.- Subject Index.    ​ | ​This volume situates Indians in the contemporary world and profiles the major facets of their thought and behaviour; then goes back to trace the roots of such behaviour to the past. The volume begins with a conceptual framework showing how the Indian worldview has encompassed and enveloped a variety of ideas and influences from divergent sources. As a result, Indians are both collectivists and individualists, hierarchically oriented while respecting merit and quality, religious as well as secular and sexually indulgent, spiritual as well as materialists, excessively dependent but remarkably entrepreneurial, non-violent in principle but violent in practice and comfortable in shifting between analytical, synthetic as well as intuitive approaches to reality. Such a coexistence of opposites often causes inaction, hesitation and perfunctory action, but also equips Indians to be creative by continuously aligning their thought and behaviour to the demands of a milieu. The milieu has an inner layer consisting of desh (place), kaal (time) and paatra (person), which are embedded in larger societal contexts of castes and classes, poverty, corruption, fragmenting politics, conflicts and violence and unfolding global opportunities and challenges. Indians function in this two-tiered, multifactorial, dynamic space. This volume draws evidence from ancient texts and the latest national and international research, many of which were conducted by the author and his associates. It does not, however, hesitate to indulge in anecdotal evidence, cases and speculative ideas in order to complete the picture. The author takes an in-depth view of the Indian mindset without getting the reader lost in either the intricacies of ancient philosophical abyss or the trivialities of present-day non-events. | <p>Provides insights into the complexity of the Indian psyche</p><p>Traces the roots of present behaviour in ancient thought</p><p>Helpful particularly for non-Indians in understanding the modern Indian mindset   </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0652-9 | Psychology | Stoltenberg | [NAME], University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Lincoln, NE, USA | Genes and the Motivation to Use Substances |  | Nebraska Symposium on Motivation | 61 | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. 30 illus., 15 illus. in color. | 0 | approx. | 99.95 | 99.95 | 106.95 | 109.95 | 86.5 | 127.5 | English | Psychology | Biological Psychology | SCY20020 | JMM | Cognitive Psychology | SCY20060 | JMR | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | Planned | 2014-06-16 00:00:00 |  |  | ​The following researchers have committed to being part of the 2013 Nebraska Symposium:       Chapter 1: Introduction: [NAME] (University of Nebraska) Chapter 2: [NAME], Ph.D. (University of Minnesota) Chapter 3: [NAME], Ph.D. (University of Michigan) Chapter 4: [NAME], Ph.D. (Oregon Health & Science University) Chapter 5: [NAME], M.D., Ph.D. (University of Iowa) Chapter 6: [NAME], M.D. (National Institute on Alcohol Abuse and Alcoholism) Chapter 7: [NAME], Ph.D. (Washington University, St. Louis)  Chapter 8: Concluding chapter: [NAME] (University of Nebraska)   Authors will each contribute a chapter, addressing the motivation to use substances from their specific academic background. (exact chapter titles to be announced) [NAME] will write the introductory and concluding chapter. | Human beings have been using intoxicating substances for millennia. But while most people have used psychoactive substances without becoming dependent on them, a significant minority develop substance use disorders. The question remains: why does addiction occur in some and not others? The 61st installment of the Nebraska Symposium on Motivation, Genes and the Motivation to Use Substances probes the complex role of genetics in substance use and abuse across diverse methodologies, research organisms, levels of analysis and disciplines. Its combined lifespan/motivation approach to individual differences sheds necessary light on genetic vs. environmental factors in vulnerability, addiction risk, the relationship between behavioral disinhibition and substance use and the motivation to quit. While alcohol use/abuse is the focus of much of the book, its chapters provide scientific and clinical insights into substance abuse in general as well as implications for treatment. And an intriguing conclusion discusses the need to bridge the gap between genetics and neuroscience and the best scientific conditions in which this integration may thrive. Included in the coverage: • Rodent models of genetic contributions to the motivation to use alcohol. • The adolescent origins of substance abuse disorders • The developmental matrix of addictive behavior • The genetics of cannabis involvement • The DNA methylation signature of smoking • Genomics of impulsivity: integrating genetics and neuroscience. Reflecting the current state of knowledge in a field with groundbreaking potential, Genes and the Motivation to Use Substances is a fascinating resource for psychologists, psychiatrists, geneticists, neuroscientists, social workers, policymakers and researchers in addiction. | <p>Sheds necessary light on genetic vs. environmental factors for addiction risk</p><p>Suggests how to alter substance abuse treatment according to an individual's genetic code</p><p>Concluding chapter explores the relationship between genetics and neuroscience in addiction</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0400-6 | Psychology | Tarbox | [NAME], Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Tarzana, CA, USA; [NAME], Center for Autism and Related Disorders, Tarzana, CA, USA; [NAME], Queens College City University of New York, Flushing, NY, USA; [NAME], Louisiana State University, Baton Rouge, LA, USA | Handbook of Early Intervention for Autism Spectrum Disorders | Research, Policy, and Practice | Autism and Child Psychopathology Series |  | 1 | 2014 | 834 | Hard cover | Book | XXIII, 834 p. 22 illus. | 0 | final | 599 | 599 | 640.93 | 658.9 | 539.5 | 797.5 | English | Psychology | Child and School Psychology | SCY12040 | JMC | Psychiatry | SCH53003 | MMH | Psychology | Handbook | Springer New York | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part 1: Diagnosis and Background.- 1. Evolution of Autism: From Kanner to the DSM-V.- 2. Autism Spectrum Disorders: Several Disorders on a [NAME] or One?.- 3. Related Disorders.- 4. Assessment of the Core Features of ASD.- 5. Measures Used to Screen and Diagnose ASD in Young Children.- 6. Psychological Theories of Childhood Autism.- 7. Family Adaptation to a Diagnosis of Autism Spectrum Disorder.- Part 2: Intervention.- 8. Ethical Issues in Early Intervention.- 9. Economics of Autism Spectrum Disorders.- 10. Designing Curriculum Programs for Children with Autism.- 11. Reinforcement Arrangements for Learners with Autism Spectrum Disorder.- 12. Discrete Trial Teaching and Discrimination Training.- 13. Natural Environment Training.- 14. Picture Activity Schedules.- 15. Use of Visual Supports with Young Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders.- 16. Teaching Verbal Behavior to Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders.- 17. Social Skills and Play in Children with Autism.- 18. Teaching Cognitive Skills to Children with Autism.- 19. Teaching Independent Living Skills to Children with ASD.- 20. Developmental Approaches.- 21. Recovery and Prevention.- 22. Mainstream Education for Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders.- 23. Controversial Treatments for Autism Spectrum Disorders.- 24. Families of Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders.- 25. Management of General Medical Conditions.- 26. Behavioral Disorders in Young Children with Autism Spectrum Disorder.- 27. Mental Health Disorders in Young Children with Autism Spectrum Disorders.- 28. Training and Supporting Caregivers in Evidence-Based Practices.- 29. Multicultural and Minority Issues. | Current rates of autism diagnoses have been cause for concern and research as well as rumor and misinformation. Important questions surround the condition: how early can an accurate diagnosis be made? At what age should intervention start? How can parents recognize warning signs? And what causes autism in the first place?There are no easy answers, but the Handbook of Early Intervention for Autism Spectrum Disorders gives researchers, practitioners, and academics the science and guidance to better understand and intervene. Background chapters survey the history of professional understanding of the disorders and the ongoing debate over autism as a single entity or a continuum. Chapters on best methods in screening, assessment, and diagnosis reflect the transition between the DSM-V and older diagnostic criteria. And at the heart of the book, the intervention section ranges from evidence-based strategies for developing core skills to ethical concerns, cultural considerations, and controversial treatments.Included in the [NAME]'s broad-based coverage:Designing curriculum programs for children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD).Mainstream education for children with ASD.Teaching independent living skills to children with ASD.Social skills and play.Behavioral and mental health disorders in children with ASD.Training and supporting caregivers in evidence-based practices. Teaching cognitive skills to children with ASD. The Handbook of Early Intervention for Autism Spectrum Disorders is a comprehensive reference for researchers, professors, and graduate students as well as clinicians and other scientist-practitioners in clinical child and school psychology, child and adolescent psychiatry, social work, rehabilitation, special education, and pediatric medicine. | <p>Offers comprehensive, evidence-based research on early intensive behavioral intervention for autism</p><p>Explores the evolution of ASD, from Kanner and [NAME] through the various DSM editions</p><p>Reviews the neurobiology of ASD, including its implications for screening and treatment</p><p>Examines the EIBI methods for screening, diagnosing, and treating autism spectrum disorders</p><p>Points the way forward for future research and practice</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-1-4939-0505-8 | Psychology | [NAME] | [NAME], Yale University, New Haven, CT, USA; [NAME], University of Connecticut Health Center, Farmington, CT, USA; [NAME], Yale University, New Haven, CT, USA | Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 360 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 360 p. 1 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 44.95 | 44.95 | 48.1 | 49.45 | 40.99 | 64.5 | English | Psychology | Developmental Psychology | SCY20010 | JMC | Psychiatry | SCH53003 | MMH | Psychology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword; Sir [NAME] Rutter.- Chapter 1. Introduction to Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], & [NAME] Chapter 2. Families of Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], & Lee Marcus.- Chapter 3. Transition from High School to Adulthood for Adolescents and Young Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], & Staci Carr.- Chapter 4. Social Skills Training for Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME] Ellingsen.- Chapter 5. [NAME], Sexuality, and [NAME]; [NAME], [NAME], Amanda Fox, & [NAME] 6. Employment and Related Services for Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], & Erik Mayville.- Chapter 7. Innovative Programming to Support College Students with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], & Sarah Kroesser.- Chapter 8. Adaptive Behavior, Life Skills, and [NAME] for Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME] Matson.- Chapter 9. Pharmacotherapy of Behavioral Symptoms and Psychiatric Comorbidities in Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], & Kimberly Stigler.- Chapter 10. Residential Options and Treatment for Individuals on the Autism Spectrum; Paul K. Cavanagh & Ernst O. VanBergeijk.- Chapter 11. Range of Outcomes and Challenges in Middle and Later Life for Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME] and [NAME] McMahan.- Chapter 12. Medical and Health Problems in Adults with High-Functioning Autism and Asperger Syndrome; Lillian Burke & Kevin P. Stoddart.- Chapter 13. Unlawful Behaviors in Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME] Chapter 14. Assessment and Treatment Planning in Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME] Ventola.- Chapter 15. The Epidemiology of Autism Spectrum Disorders in Adulthood; [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], [NAME], & Sally McManus.- Chapter 16. A Systematic Review of Psychosocial Interventions for Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders; [NAME], [NAME], & Shaun M. Eack. | The research on children with autism spectrum disorders (ASD) is extensive and growing. Although these conditions are recognized as affecting the entire lifespan, the literature on ASD after childhood is limited and has not been brought together in a single volume in over a decade.Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders fills this knowledge gap by focusing on needs and difficulties unique to these stages of development. Expert contributors offer cogent reviews of complex issues, from education to employment, leisure activities to illegal behaviors, mental health issues to medical health concerns. The latest findings in key areas, such as psychosocial and residential treatments, social skills programs, epidemiology, the impact of ASD on families, are examined in detail. Throughout the volume, coverage focuses on areas requiring improved models of assessment, updated data, new interventions and increased support services.Featured topics include:Transition from high school to adulthood for adolescents and young adults with ASD.Innovative programming to support college students with ASD.Romantic relationships, sexuality and ASD.Treatment of mental health comorbidities.Assessment and treatment planning in adults with ASD.The range of outcomes and challenges in middle and later life.Adolescents and Adults with Autism Spectrum Disorders is a must-have reference for a wide range of clinicians and practitioners – as well as researchers and graduate students – in clinical child, school and developmental psychology; child and adolescent psychiatry; social work; rehabilitation medicine/therapy; education and general practice/family medicine. It will also serve as an important resource for parents and caregivers with its focus on translating the current state of knowledge relevant to understanding adolescents and adults with ASD into practical and relevant recommendations on how best to support them. | <p>Provides comprehensive coverage of the issues facing adolescents and adults with autism and those who care for them</p><p>Fills the void of evidence-based practices for clinicians who treat adolescents and adults with autism spectrum disorders</p><p>Outlines best practices for professionals who work with this aging population with ASD</p><p>Unites authors from across multiple fields to provide a broad perspective</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11640 | Behavioral Science
 | 978-3-319-04974-8 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Cornell University, Ithaca, NY, USA | [NAME] | Caring for Our Expanding Legacy |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 300 p. 155 illus., 135 illus. in color. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 86.5 | 127.5 | English | Social Sciences | Archaeology | SCX13000 | HD | Cultural Heritage | SCV35000 | JFC | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-04-21 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Introduction1. Our Changing Need to Preserve2. The Struggle Continues3. The Legal Framework4. Changing Our Economic Outlook5. Meeting the Financial Challenges6. Documentation, Context, and Design7. Advocacy and Ethics8. Placing Greater Faith in Religion​ | This book offers an up-to-date synthesis of the field of historic preservation, cast as a social campaign concerned with the condition, treatment and use of the legacy of existing properties in the United States. It explores topics, such as preservation economics and finance, context and design, ethics and advocacy, and the importance of religious activities in our cultural understandings, some of which are generally given short shrift or ignored almost completely. Drawing on a wide range of research, experience and scholarship over the last fifty years, it allows us to re-think past and current ideas in preservation, challenging readers to explore how their own interests lie within the cognitive framework of the activities taking place with people who care. | <p>Provides a current picture of historic preservation</p><p>Explores topics such as preservation economics and finance, ethics and advocacy and religious activities</p><p>Displays the accomplishments of preservation projects throughout the country</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8714-7 | Social Sciences | Agyei-Mensah | [NAME], University of Ghana, Legon, Ghana; [NAME], MountCrest University College, [NAME], Ghana; [NAME], University of Ghana, Legon, Ghana | Changing Perspectives on the Social Sciences in Ghana |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 327 | Hard cover | Book | I, 327 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | [NAME] | SCX25000 | JHBD | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 2: Trends in the Development of Archaeology and Heritage Studies in Ghana: [NAME] 3: Bridging the Ivory Tower: Professional History, Scholarship, and Public Engagement in Ghana: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 4: Change and Continuity in the Practice and Development of Geography in Ghana: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 5: Psychology in Ghana: A Review of Research and Practice: Ama de-Graft Aikins, [NAME], Adote Anum and [NAME] 6: The Development of Sociology and Anthropology in Ghana and Future Prospects: Akosua Darkwah, [NAME] and [NAME] 7: Social Work Practice in Ghana Changing Dynamics, [NAME] and Opportunities: [NAME] and [NAME] 8: The Study and Practice of Economics in Ghana: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME] 9: The Vissisitudes of Political Science in Ghana: [NAME] and Maame A.A. Gyekye-Jandoh.- Chapter 10: Changing Perspectives in the Didactics of International Affairs in Ghana: [NAME] and [NAME] Attuquayefio.- Chapter 11: From [NAME] and Archival Studies to Information Studies: Anaba [NAME] and [NAME] 12: Critically 'Trending' Approaches to Communication Theory and Methods of Inquiry in Ghana: Kwasi Ansu –Kyeremeh.- Chapter 13: African Studies: Evolution, [NAME] and Prospects: [NAME] Sackey.- Chapter 14: Evolution and Development of Development Studies in Ghana: [NAME] Osei.- Chapter 15: Women's and Gender Studies in Ghana: [NAME], Akosua [NAME] and [NAME] Chapter 16: Changing Trends in Adult and Continuing Education: The Ghanaian Experience: [NAME], Olivia Adwoa [NAME], [NAME], [NAME] 17: Conclusion: [NAME], [NAME] and [NAME]. | This book is the first compilation of its kind that brings together discussions of the evolution of scholarship in different branches of the Social Sciences. It presents a comprehensive multi-disciplinary text exploring the changing dynamics of the Social Sciences in Ghana, offering a broader perspective from which to view the evolution, theory, methods, substance and relevance of each of the Social Science disciplines and their multiple interfaces. The introduction and the conclusion are devoted to the theoretical, comparative and empirical debate over the Social Sciences from historical and analytical perspectives. Written by acknowledged experts, the 15 chapters span the following disciplines: Archaeology and Heritage Studies; History; Geography; Psychology; Sociology and Anthropology; Social Work; Economics; Political Science; International Affairs; Information Studies; Communication Studies; African Studies; Development Studies; Women’s and Gender Studies and Adult and Continuing Education.Changing Perspectives on the Social Sciences in Ghana offers sophisticated perspectives for comparing and appreciating the synergies, differences, trends and nuances among and between the Social Science disciplines in Ghana, in a holistic and scholarly manner. | <p>Offers sophisticated perspectives for comparing and appreciating the synergies, differences, trends and nuances among and between the Social Science disciplines </p><p>Surveys and assesses the complete range of social sciences as currently taught and practiced in Ghana </p><p>Covers Geography, Archeology and Heritage Studies, Sociology, Anthropology, Gender Studies, Psychology, Social Work, Adult Education and more</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54680-8 | Social Sciences | Bausch | [NAME], Munich University of Applied Sciences, Munich, Germany; [NAME], University of Salzburg, Salzburg, Austria; [NAME], Ludwig Maximilians University Munich, Munich, Germany | Coping with Demographic Change in the Alpine Regions | Actions and Strategies for Spatial and Regional Development | European Studies of Population | 23 | 1 | 2014 | 200 | Hard cover | Book | 200 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | [NAME] | SCX25000 | JHBD | Population Economics | SCW12154 | KCP | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Processes and Issues of Demographic Change in the Alps.- Addressing Specific Impacts of Demographic Change - Experiences form DEMOCHANGE Pilot Actions.- Implications and Recommendations for Spatial Planning and Regional Development. | Europe’s population is ageing and decreasing. Demographic change is making not only regional and territorial adaptation necessary, but also new region-specific spatial planning and regional development. This publication focusses on demographic change and its implications for the economy and social systems in the Alpine areas, which differ widely from their surrounding metropolitan areas. It provides a specific regional in-depth study in order to help establish suitable adaptation and development programs. It covers various aspects including demographic analysis, onsite participatory strategies and implementation processes, as well as generalized adaptation strategies. Reports on pilot actions in various regions across the Alps demonstrate how demographic change can be approached from a practitioner’s perspective. The volume is based on the results of the DEMOCHANGE project, which was co-funded by the EU transnational co-operative program “[NAME].” | <p>Presents a comprehensive overview of the connections between demographic change and regional development</p><p>Includes useful implementation examples from pilot activities</p><p>Offers numerous methodological and technical insights valuable for researchers and practitioners in the field of regional planning</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-981-287-004-9 | Social Sciences | Bhandari | [NAME], Ritsumeikan University, [NAME], Kyoto, Japan | Self-Determination & Constitution Making in Nepal | Constituent Assembly, Inclusion, & Ethnic Federalism |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 257 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 257 p. 14 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Comparative Politics | [NAME] | JPB | Constitutional Law | SCR17028 | LND | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Dedication.- List of Tables and Charts- Preface.- Acronyms.- Chapter 1: The Landscape of Constitution Making in Nepal.- 1.1: Six Decades of Constitutional History.- 1.2: Pre-1990 Constitution Making Processes.- 1.3: The 1990 Constitution Making Process.- 1.4: Making of the Interim Constitution 2007.- 1.5: Lessons from Past Constitutions Making.- 1.5.1: Constitution Writing versus Constitution Making.- 1.5.2: Constitution versus Constitutionalism.- 1.5.3: Political Interests versus System Building.- 1.5.4: Power versus Authority.- 1.5.5: The Rule of Law versus Rule by Law.- 1.5.6: Legitimacy versus Political Ideology.- 1.5.7: Challenges of the Divided Society and the Constitution Making.- 1.5.8: From Uncertainty to Political Stability.- 1.6: Concluding Observations.- Chapter 2: Abolition of Monarchy.- 2.1 Background.- 2.2: The First Conflict: Conflict between [NAME] and other Principalities.- 2.3: The Second Conflict: Conflict between the Shah and [NAME] Dynasties.- 2.4: The Third Conflict: The King versus the People.- 2.4.1 Conflict between the King and the People from 1951 to 1990.- 2.4.2 Conflict from 1990 to 2008.- 2.5 Concluding Observations.- Chapter 3: Why did the Constituent Assembly Fail?.- 3.1: The Context of the CA.- 3.2: Reasons for the Failure of the CA.- 3.2.1: The Redundant Role of the CA.- 3.2.2: Faulty Discourse.- 3.2.3: Crisis of Constitutionalism.- 3.2.4: Democratic Deficit.- 3.3: Designing a Constitution in the Future.- 3.3.1: Political Consensus.- 3.3.2: From Ideology to Constitutionalism?.- 3.3.3: Civic or [NAME] Identity.- 3.3.4: Welfare-Grundnorm.- 3.4: Concluding Observations.- Chapter 4: Epistemology of Ethnic Federalism.- 4.1: Civic or Ethnic Federalism?.- 4.2: Ethnic & Indigenous Identity.- 4.3: Ethnic Federalism in Nepal.- 4.4: Major [NAME] of Thought & the Controversy.- 4.5: Civic Identity.- 4.5.1: Marxism.- 4.5.2: Max Weber & Ethnicity.- 4.5.3: Robert Park & Assimilation to Civic State.- 4.6: Concluding Observations.- Chapter 5: Nation-Building, Inclusion & Liberal Democracy.- 5.1: Nation-Building in Nepal.- 5.1.1: Formative Stage of Nation-Building.- 5.1.2: Democratic Stage of Nation-Building.- 5.1.3 Post-National Stage of Nation-Building.- 5.2 Inclusion.- 5.2.1 Inclusion During the Panchayati Era: 1960-1990.- 5.2.2 Inclusion in the Post-1990 Era.- 5.3: Liberal Democracy & Federalism.- 5.3.1 Constitutionalism.- 5.3.2 The Rule of Law.- 5.3.3 Political Parties Reform.- 5.3.4 A Robust Counter Hegemonic Mechanism in Place.- 5.4: Concluding Observations.- Chapter 6: Right to Self-Determination & Restructuring the Nepalese State.- 6.1 Right to Self Determination (RSD).- 6.2: RSD: Internal Autonomy of Groups & Ethnic Federalism.- 6.2.1: The UN Declaration on Indigenous Peoples.- 6.2.2: RSD & Minority Rights.- 6.3: IRSD & its Scope: Empowerment of All Peoples.- 6.3.1: The Scope of IRSD under the UNDRIP.- 6.3.2 Rights over Land and Resources.- 6.3.3: IRSD and Human Rights for All Peoples.- 6.4: Restructuring the Nepalese State.- 6.4.1: Could Federalism Ensure Autonomy?.- 6.4.2: Is Federalism the Solution of Discrimination and Inequality?.- 6.4.3 Is Federalism the Natural Political Course for Nepal?.- 6.5: Concluding Observations.- Chapter 7: Prospects of Liberal Democracy and Development.- 7.1: The CA Must Not Repeat Past Mistakes: Learn From the Past.- 7.1.1: Learn from the Past and [NAME] any Redundant Role.- 7.1.2: Build and Entrench Constitutionalism.- 7.1.3:  Espouse a Robust and Transparent Discourse.- 7.1.4: Don’t Endure Democratic Deficit.- 7.2: Monarchy is Abolished: Monarchs Have Yet to be Abolished.- 7.2.1: Monarchs are still Predominant.- 7.2.2: Political Leaders are Acting Irresponsibly.- 7.3: Ethnic Federalism v. Federalism: Don’t Summon the Condition of Scylla & Charybdis.- 7.3.1 Methodological Issues.- 7.3.2: A Riddle of Positive Discrimination. | This book systematically analyzes why constitutions do not survive in Nepal, despite sixty years of constitutional history. The author discusses the epistemology of ethnic federalism in Nepal and examines the challenges of nation building and post-nation constitutionalism. The work addresses the connection between ethnic identity, right to self-determination, constitution making and state restructuring, offering possible ways forward for Nepal.Chapters consider lessons to be drawn from the past and examine reasons for the abolition of monarchy in Nepal. The book highlights the major problems that the first elected Constituent Assembly (CA) faced in promulgating a new constitution, before it was dissolved in 2012.The concept of right to self-determination and its complexities at the domestic level are all explored, along with ways forward to address the problem of constitutionalism, ethnic federalism and democracy. The author offers solutions as to how the second CA could address problems to promulgate a new constitution.The book elaborates on the role that constitutionalism plays in constitution making and the survival of a constitution.Scholars of politics and international studies, policy makers and those with an interest in law and constitution in Asia will all find this work of interest. | <p>Highlights the reasons for the failure of the Constituent Assembly in Nepal</p><p>Presents insights into managing the tension between constitutionalism and constitution making in Nepal</p><p>Offers epistemology of ethnic federalism in Nepal</p><p>Provides solutions for [NAME]'s constitutional future</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04605-1 | Social Sciences | Boening | [NAME], Aventura, FL, USA | The Arab Spring | Re-Balancing the Greater Euro-Mediterranean? |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 128 | Hard cover | Book | XVII, 128 p. 5 illus., 4 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | European Integration | SCW12073 | KCS | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Introduction—A Euro-Meditterranean Regional Security Complex?.- Sectors of Security.- Levels of Security–Intra-Regional Level.- .Levels of Security – Inter-Regional Level: Part A: Select State Actors.- Levels of Security–Inter-Regional Level: Part B: Intergovernmental Organizations: Global Government–Leading From Behind or Through Consensus?.-  Conclusions:  Adressing Regional Security Threats “Locally, “Regionally,” and “Globally”. | Beginning in 2010, there has been a consolidating cooperation among existing powers in the Euro-Mediterranean in face of the rapid de-stabilization of the Arab region. This fact alone accelerated the hesitant responses by the EU towards emerging hegemons, particularly Russia and China, who in-turn applied traditional mechanisms of increasing regional economic influence to bolster their political influence, but with the difference that a normative influence is missing, in contrast to the EU’s and US’ influence, which is strongly centered on universal norms pertaining to political, economic and social-cultural norms. This book examines the Arab Spring not only from its intra but also inter-regional geo-political and strategic implications by analyzing the Euro-Mediterranean region following the onset of the Arab Spring. It aims to connect the broader economic and political strands of power shifts that have taken place since the Arab Spring, making it of interests to political scientists and policy-makers concerned with the Mediterranean and Euro-Arab relations. | <p>Examines the Arab Spring within the context of Euro-Mediterranean region security</p><p>Investigates resources, economic constraints and opportunities in the Euro-Mediterranean region for long-term sustainable growth within the global macro-economic environment in the post financial crisis decade</p><p>Connects broader ideational, economic and political strands of power shifts taking place in the Euro-Mediterranean region since the Arab Spring</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8856-4 | Social Sciences | Bruhn | [NAME], Northern Arizona University, Flagstaff, AZ, USA; [NAME], University of Maryland, Princess Anne, MD, USA | The Sociology of Caregiving |  | Clinical Sociology: Research and Practice |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. | 0 | approx. | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Clinical Psychology | SCY12005 | MMJ | Social Sciences / Sociology | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | Planned | 2014-06-03 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. The Contemporary Challenges of Caregiving.- Chapter 2. Social Change and Caregiving.- Chapter 3. The Life Course Perspective.- Chapter 4. Caregiving Children with Special Healthcare Needs.- Chapter 5. Caregiving Adolescents and Young Adults with Disabilities.- Chapter 6. Caregiving at Life's Transitions: The Senior Years.- Chapter 7. Socioeconomic Status and Caregiving.- Chapter 8. Ethnic Variations in Caregiving.- Chapter 9. Outsourced and Specialized Caregiving.- Chapter 10. Caregiving at the End of Life.- Chapter 11. The Health of Caregivers.- Chapter 12. Legal and Ethical Issues in Caregiving.- Chapter 13. National Caregiving Policy Initiatives.- Chapter 14. Caregivers' Utilization of Social Networks and Social Media.- Index. | This volume conceptualizes caregiving as an emerging sociological issue involving complex and fluctuating roles. The authors contend that caregiving must be considered in the context of the life span with needs that vary according to age, developmental levels, mental health needs and physical health demands of both caregivers and care recipients. As the nature and functions of caregiving evolve it has become a critical and salient issue in the lives of individuals in all demographic, socioeconomic and ethnic categories. This volume frames caregiving as a sociological issue and addresses a number of central concerns, such as: - Caregiving is a life span experience associated with aging and the roles of spouses and adult children.   - Caregiving involves a complex of social system variables that influence the social support and services to caregivers and care recipients.   - The nature of the relationship among family caregivers, professional caregivers and the care recipient are embedded in their interaction and dynamics influenced by the internal and external variables that inhibit or facilitate the care situation.   - How can caregiving be integrated with a public health agenda?- What disparities or inequalities exist in caregiving and what are the barriers that sustain them?   - What community-based interventions need to be developed to improve caregiving? | <p>Provides an overview of the growing complex issues of caregiving in the 21st Century in the US</p><p>Highlights the dynamics of caregiving that characterizes high quality care</p><p>Discusses the development of a new national model of healthcare with respect to caregiving policies and remaining barriers to care</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04419-4 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Research Institute on Judicial Systems National Research Council, Bologna, Italy | Democracy and Judicial Reforms in South-East Europe | Between the EU and the Legacies of the Past | Contributions to Political Science |  | 1 | 2014 | 127 | Hard cover | Book | [NAME], 127 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Comparative Politics | [NAME] | JPB | [NAME] | SCR20000 | LB | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Introduction.- 1 Judicial Reforms in SEE Democratising Countries. Towards [NAME] for the Analysis.- 2 Smoother Judicial Reforms in Slovenia and Croatia: Does Legacy of the Past Matter?.- 3 The Successful Laggard in Judicial Reform: Romania Before and After the Accession.- 4 The Long and Disputed Judicial Reform Process in Serbia: Legacies of the Past and Predominant National Actors.- 5 EU Driven Judicial Reforms Between Legacies and National Actors' Strategies: Any Lessons [NAME]?. | The book analyzes the topic of judicial reforms in four countries of South-East Europe, focusing on two specific factors that have influenced the reforms in the past two decades: the role played by the European Union in light of the east Enlargement process and the legacies of the communist regimes. Specifically, the aim is to account for similarities and differences in the reform paths of Slovenia, Romania, Croatia, and Serbia. In each country, in fact, the influence of the EU policies has been differently mediated by national factors that, broadly conceived, may be considered as expressing the legacies of the past regimes. In some cases, these legacies challenged judicial reforms and inhibited the influence of the EU; in other cases, they were positively overcome by following the route suggested by the EU. Some explanatory factors for these differences will be proposed drawing from democratization studies, Europeanization literature, and comparative judicial systems. The book focuses on countries having different status vis-a` -vis the EU and differently involved, in term of timing, in the EU accession process: some of them are new member states entered in 2004 (Slovenia) or in 2007 (Romania); others were, until recently, acceding countries (Croatia) or candidates to the membership (Serbia). This comparison allows investigation of the power of EU conditionality in different phases of the EU enlargement process. | <p>Analyzes judicial reforms in post-communist countries in the context of the EU accession process</p><p>Applies theoretical approaches from policy analysis, European studies and democratization studies</p><p>Focuses on the actors of judicial reforms instead of looking only at the outcomes</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8892-2 | Social Sciences | Duff | [NAME], Monash University, Caulfield East, VIC, Australia | Assemblages of Health | Deleuze's Empiricism and the Ethology of Life |  |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. 15 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Public Health/Gesundheitswesen | SCH27002 | MBN | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Introduction: Assemblages of Health.- Chapter 2. The Concrete Richness of the Sensible.- Chapter 3. Health, Ethology, Life.- Chapter 4. The Assemblage in Recovery (Mental Health).- Chapter 5. Assemblages of Drugs, Spaces and Bodies.- Chapter 6. The Ethics of an Assemblage of Health.- Chapter 7. Conclusion: A Line of Becoming Well. | This book presents a review of Deleuze’s key methods and concepts in the course of exploring how these methods may be applied in contemporary studies of health and illness. Taken from a Deleuzian perspective, health and wellbeing will be characterized as a discontinuous process of affective and relational transitions.The book argues that health, conceived in terms of the quality of life, is advanced or facilitated in the provision of new affective sensitivities and new relational capacities. Following an assessment of Deleuze’s key ideas, the book will offer a series of case studies designed to illustrate how [NAME]’s ideas can be applied to select health problems. This analysis draws out the specific advantages of a Deleuzian approach to public health research, establishing grounds for more widespread engagement with Deleuze’s ideas across the health and social sciences. | <p>First systematic assessment of the significance of Deleuze’s work for research in Health Sciences</p><p>Provides an accessible introduction to Deleuze’s key ideas and concepts</p><p>Provides case studies illustrating the application of Deleuze’s ideas</p><p>Sets out new directions for health care policy and practice</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8717-8 | Social Sciences | Farris | [NAME], University of West Alabama, Livingston, AL, USA; [NAME], Lamar University, Beaumont, TX, USA; [NAME], University of New Orleans, New Orleans, LA, USA | Illuminating How Identities, Stereotypes and Inequalities Matter through Gender Studies |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 174 | Hard cover | Book | VI, 174 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Gender Studies | [NAME] | [NAME] | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-04-22 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Part I: Identities and Perceptions (Introduction by D’Lane R. Compton).- 1. Blogging My Academic Self: [NAME]. The Gendered Characteristics of Facebook Interaction : Nathalie Delise.- 3. Negotiating Gay Male Christian Identities: Brandi Woodell.- 4. Tomboys in the Work of [NAME]: [NAME]: Culture, [NAME], and Stigma (Introduction by [NAME] Farris).- 5. Violent Environment: Women and Frontier Coffey County, Kansas: 1855-1880 ([NAME], and Amanda Hedstrom.- 6. [NAME] in Television Advertisements: [NAME]. [NAME]: [NAME], from the Whispers of Her People: Manuel Medrano.- 8. The Social Construction and Resistance of Menstruation as a Public Spectacle: Ashly Patterson.- 9. Race, Gender, and Sexuality in Cyberspace: [NAME] Social Problems and Applications (Introduction by [NAME] 10. Punishing Abused Women: A Retrospective on a Ms. [NAME]: [NAME] Bartlow.- 11. Constructing Gay Male and [NAME] Families: [NAME] 12. Sex Differences in Adult Mortality: Some Evidence from Taiwan and the United States: Yu Ting Chang.- 13. [NAME] Place Attachment in New Orleans’ Upper 9th Ward: [NAME]. | This collection highlights and extends contemporary women's and gender studies by presenting theoretical analyses and innovative research conceptualizations, applications and methodologies via a diverse variety of popular-in-the-classroom topics, such as changing masculinities; comedic/dramatic portrayals of ethnicity and discrimination; stigma and differences within mainstream media gender stereotypes; intersections of gendered and sexual identities in social media and fundamental institutions.These topics emphasize relevant issues and nuances within popular culture, identities and perceptions and social problems and illustrate the breadth of gender studies and its applications, while the diverse methodologies like historical comparisons; ethnographic, demographic and statistical analyses, demonstrate its epistemology.Each chapter remains solidly founded in gender theory while making significant innovative contributions to the overall field. | <p>Highlights and extends contemporary women's and gender studies</p><p>Presents theoretical analyses and innovative research conceptualizations, applications and methodologies</p><p>Employs research conceptualizations and different methods by applying to different topics of gender</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54394-4 | Social Sciences | Forbes | [NAME], Wuhan University, Wuhan, China | Indonesia’s Delimited Maritime Boundaries |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 260 | Hard cover | Book | X, 260 p. 38 illus., 19 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | International Relations | SCX18040 | JPS | Geography (general) | SCJ00000 | RG | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Acknowledgments.- Foreword.- Preface.- Chapter 1: The Study in Context.- Chapter 2: Legal Framework: Rationale for Maritime Jurisdictional Claims.- Chapter 3: Indonesia's Delimited Maritime Boundaries.- Chapter 4: Indonesia's Potential Maritime Boundaries.- Chapter 5: Conclusion.- Appendix. | This book examines the delimited maritime boundaries of Indonesia with its neighbours. It features carefully drawn maps based on the geographical coordinates of the defined maritime boundaries; the reproduction of a complete set of the primary documents with direct relation to the boundaries; and a comprehensive narrative on the geography and the historical development of the archipelagic State. Indonesia has an immense maritime domain that encompasses much of the sea between Australia and the Asian mainland. In addition, Indonesia is itself made up largely of water: in excess of 17,000 islands, Indonesia’s archipelagic and territorial waters together form about three-fifths of the country’s sovereign territory. This book offers readers clear, accessible information on the maritime boundaries of the world’s largest archipelagic state. | <p>Examines and analyses the maritime boundaries of Indonesia, an archipelagic State</p><p>Includes a comprehensive set of primary documents relevant to the focus of this book</p><p>Features carefully drawn, accurate and informative maps produced by the author</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4939-0484-6 | Social Sciences | Freise | Matthias Freise, [NAME], [NAME], Germany; [NAME], Universität Münster, [NAME], Germany | Modernizing Democracy | Associations and Associating in the 21st Century |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 402 | Hard cover | Book | I, 402 p. 11 illus., 4 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Social Policy | SCW12197 | KCP | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-05-22 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Preface.- Chapter 1. Modernizing Democracy? Associations and Associating in the 21st Century.- Chapter 2. Social Life and Politics in Voluntary Organizations :An Historical Perspective.- Chapter 3. [NAME] revisited: Between the Centralization of Political Power, Civil Associations and Gender Politics in the European Union.- Chapter 4. [NAME] did not write about soccer clubs: Participation in voluntary associations and political involvement.- Chapter 5. Voluntary Associations and Social Capital: Inclusive and exclusive dimensions.- Chapter 6. Who Calls the Shots? The Real Normative Power of Civil Society.- Chapter 7. The Impact of Civil Society on Sustainable Development.- Chapter 8. Volunteering in a hybrid institutional and organizational environment: An emerging research agenda.- Chapter 9. Voluntary Involvement in German Welfare Organizations.- Chapter 10. Changes in work and human services: On the risks and chances they entail for volunteering.- Chapter 11. Residual and Emancipatory Value of Volunteering in the Czech Society.- Chapter 12. Two Decades of Participatory Democracy in Poland.- Chapter 13. The role of civil society organizations in the field of unemployment: for or by the unemployed?.- Chapter 14. Transnational mobility and associative life.- Chapter 15. Associating at the European level: Civil Society Networks in Brussels.- Chapter 16. Why Is There no Statute for a European Association?.- Chapter 17. Developments in the Third Sector – The Last Decade and a Cautious View into the Future.- Chapter 18. “Though we manage we are no corporation!” Patterns in volunteer management of German youth organisations.- Chapter 19. Governance logics in NGDO-Boards between political and economic challenges: Empirical results from Austria.- Chapter 20. Associating for Affordable Housing: Nonprofit Social Housing in Germany and the US.- Chapter 21. From Mainstreaming to Modernization? New Labour and the Third Sector in England.- Chapter 22. Towards a neoliberal Third sector? International lessons from recent developments in China.- Chapter 23. Social Investment: Franco-German Experiences.- Chapter 24. Opportunities and limits of cooperatives in times of socio-ecological transformation.- Chapter 25. Nonprofit Arts and Culture in the United States: Roles, Audiences and Participation.- Chapter 26. Major [NAME] in Germany: Facts and Opportunities.- Chapter 27. Aktive Bürgerschaft: Innovations for Civil Society in Germany. | Modernizing Democracy brings together scholars focusing the role of associations and associating in contemporary societies. Organizations and associations have been identified as the “meso level of society” and as the “basic elements of democracy”. They are important providers of welfare services and play an important role between the individual and political spheres. In recent years the environment of associations and associating has changed dramatically. Individualization, commercialization and globalization are challenging both democracy and the capability of associations to fulfill the functions attributed to them by social sciences. This change provides the central question of the volume: Is being part of an organization or association becoming an outdated model? And do associations still have the capacity of modernizing societies or are they just outdated remnants of post-democracy? The contributions to Modernizing Democracy will be organized into: Studying Association and Associating in the 21st Century, Associating in Times of Post-Democracy and Associations and the Challenge of Capitalist Development. The book will be attractive to third sector researchers as well as a broader academic community of political scientists, sociologists, economists, legal scientists and related disciplines. | <p>Addresses a relevant current topic not only of third sector research, but of social science</p><p>In general involves an international authorship including many of the distinguished experts and pioneers of third sector research</p><p>Honors the work of third sector researcher and ISTR president, [NAME] </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8674-4 | Social Sciences | Fusari | [NAME], ISAE Director of Research, Rome, Italy | Methodological Misconceptions in the Social Sciences | Rethinking Social Thought and Social Processes |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 309 | Hard cover | Book | XXVII, 309 p. 1 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Methodology of the Social Sciences | SCX17000 | JHBC | Social Structure, Social Inequality | SCX22010 | JFF | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Introduction.- Part I. Theory.- Chapter 1. Preliminary Considerations on the Method of Social Thought.- Chapter 2. The Core of the Methodological Question: Procedure, Rules and Classifications.- Chapter 3. Heterogeneity of Methods in Social Thought: Weakness or Strength - Is there a Synthesis.- Chapter 4. Social Development and Historical Processes.- Chapter 5. On the Dynamics of Societies: Is there a Universal Theory?.- Part II. Some Applications.- Chapter 6. About Anthropology.- Chapter 7. Problems of Political Theory and Action.- Chapter 8. The Foundations of Law: Juridical Objectivism versus [NAME] and [NAME] Positivism.- Chapter 9. Some Insight on Sociological Thought: Rationality, Relativism and Social Evolution in Boudon-Weber's Cognitive Method.- Chapter 10. Further Meditations on Ethics: Values in the Light of Religious Thought and its Opponents.​ | This book offers a systematic view of social analysis that will advance the communication of results between different academic disciplines. It overcomes misunderstandings that are due to the use of an unstructured variety of methodological traditions in the analysis of complex socioeconomic and political processes. The book focuses on the special features of human society: humans as subjects, non-repetitiveness and irreversibility of social actions and the peculiar relations between necessity and possibility in human action. It defines methodological criteria, procedures and rules that enable researchers to select and classify realistic hypotheses to derive general principles and basic organizational features. It then applies these criteria in critical reviews of major theories and interpretations of society and history, offering clarifications and alternative proposals with regard to crucial aspects of anthropological, political, juridical, sociological and religious thought. | <p>Offers a thorough and detailed critique of scientific methodology in the social sciences</p><p>Lines out a consistent methodological approach for the social sciences</p><p>Extends social analysis to the field of ethical structures</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4939-0279-8 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Bristol Archaeology and Anthropology, Bristol, UK; [NAME], London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine, London, UK | Applied Evolutionary Anthropology | Darwinian Approaches to Contemporary World Issues | Advances in the Evolutionary Analysis of Human Behaviour | 1 | 1 | 2014 | 299 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 299 p. 37 illus., 18 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Anthropology | SCX12000 | JHM | Evolutionary Biology | SCL21001 | PSAJ | Social Sciences / Anthropology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1- ​Introduction: Applying Evolutionary Anthropology to a Changing World.- Chapter 2- [NAME] and the Green Revolution.- Chapter 3- A comparison of the economic literature on microfinance and the evolutionary literature on cooperation.- Chapter 4- How development intervention drives population change in rural Africa: A case study of applied evolutionary anthropology.- Chapter 5- Family structure and health in the developing world: What can evolutionary anthropology contribute to population health science?.- Chapter 6- Declining breastfeeding rates among immigrant populations: A look through an evolutionary lens.- Chapter 7- The evolutionary demography of sex ratios in rural Bangladesh.- Chapter 8- Evolutionary anthropology, co-operation and warfare.- Chapter 9- Understanding and addressing cultural variation in costly antisocial punishment.- Chapter 10-Socioeconomic disparities in health behaviour: An evolutionary perspective.- Chapter 11- Nutrition in a changing world: How economic growth drives chronic diseases.- Chapter 12- The Evo-Eco approach to behaviour change. | As a species, we are currently experiencing dramatic shifts in our lifestyle, family structure, health, and global contact. Evolutionary Anthropology provides a powerful theoretical framework to study such changes, revealing how current environments and legacies of past selection shape human diversity. This book is the first major review of the emerging field of Applied Evolutionary Anthropology bringing together the work of an international group of evolutionary scientists, addressing many of the major public health and social issues of this century. Through a series of case studies that span both rural and urban situations in Africa, Asia, Europe and South America, each chapter addresses topics such as natural resource management, health service delivery, population growth and the emergence of new family structures, dietary, and co-operative behaviours. The research presented identifies the great, largely untapped, potential that Applied Evolutionary Anthropology holds to guide the design, implementation and evaluation of effective social and public health policy. This book will be of interest to policy-makers and applied researchers, along with academics and students across the biological and social sciences. | <p>Contextualizes evolutionary perspectives in the design and implementation of public policy</p><p>Integrates evolutionary theory and neighboring social sciences to address major 21st century issues</p><p>Each chapter includes a specific case study, focusing on a central feature of evolutionary anthropology</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04351-7 | Social Sciences | Grofman | [NAME], University of California, Irvine, [NAME], CA, USA; [NAME], European University Institute (Fiesole), Florence, Italy; [NAME], MIT, Cambridge, MA, USA | The Internet and Democracy in Global Perspective | Voters, Candidates, Parties, and Social Movements | Studies in Public Choice | 31 | 1 | 2014 | 146 | Hard cover | Book | IX, 146 p. 13 illus., 6 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | Political Communication | SCX18050 | JPA | Social Sciences / Political Science | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | ​Preface.- Acknowledgments.- Introduction.- Internet Voting in a Local Election in Canada.- Indirect Campaigning: Past, Present and Future of Voting Advice Applications.- Digital Media and the 2010 National Elections in Brazil.- Online Campaign Communications (Facebook, [NAME], and Websites) in the 2010 UK Elections.- Virtual Power Plays: Social Movements, Internet Communication Technology, and Political Parties.- On the Role of Texts, Tweets, and Status Updates in Nonviolent Revolutions.- Bibliography.- Index.​ | This volume provides an important update to our current understanding of politics and the internet in a variety of new contexts, both geographically and institutionally. The subject of e-democracy has morphed over the years from speculative and optimistic accounts of a future heightened direct citizen involvement in political decision-making and an increasingly withered state apparatus, to more prosaic investigations of party and governmental website content and micro level analyses of voters’ online activities. Rather than levelling the communications and participation playing field, most studies concluded that existing patterns of bias and power distribution were being repeated online, with the one exception of a genuine change in the potential for protest and e-activism. Across all of these accounts, the question remains whether the internet is a levelling communication tool that elevates the profile of marginalised players in the political system, or whether it is a medium that simply reinforces existing power and participatory biases. While employing case studies from various global perspectives, this book investigates the role of digital media and competitive advantage, campaigns and the effect of social media, online communication as way of fomenting nonviolent revolutions and the undeniable and important role of the internet on democracy around the world. | <p>Addresses the timely topic of the Internet and social media in elections and democracy</p><p>Features contributions from the world's leading experts</p><p>Includes case studies from around the world</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-658-05214-0 | Social Sciences | Hernandez | [NAME], Universität Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany | Nation-building and Identity Conflicts | Facilitating the Mediation Process in Southern Philippines |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 244 | Soft cover | Book | XVIII, 244 p. 4 illus. | 0 | final | 37.37 | 37.37 | 39.99 | 41.11 | 33.99 | 50 | English | Social Sciences | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | Political Communication | SCX18050 | JPA | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | A Theorization of the Concept of Identity and Identity Conflicts.- The Nation as a Subject of Scientific Studies.- Mediation.- Strategic Facilitation of the Mindanao Peace Process. | Ending identity conflicts through negotiated agreements is an intractable process that is embedded complexly in the nation-building process. [NAME] looks on the complexity of the nation-building process in the Philippines and how its social and political context constrains the achievement of a peace agreement that would withhold new challenges as the process unfolds. Mediation as one of the possible modes of intervention to resolve identity conflicts is taken as the self-evident instrument to end the 40 year old conflict between the Filipino society at large and the Bangsamoro. The analysis confirms that mediation and other types of intervention are contributing to the intractability of identity conflicts by bringing in further complexities in the negotiation process. The conceptualization of “stumbling blocks” may provide knowledge based resources to develop strategies to “facilitate” the mediation process that allows negotiating parties to cope with the complexity of the bargaining table. | <p>Study in the field of social sciences</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04210-7 | Social Sciences | Herren | [NAME], University of Basel, Basel, Switzerland | Networking the International System | Global Histories of International Organizations | Transcultural Research – Heidelberg Studies on Asia and Europe in a Global Context |  | 1 | 2014 | 200 | Soft cover | Book | X, 200 p. 9 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Cultural Studies | SCX22040 | JFC |  |  |  | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- Towards a Global History of International Organization.- Part 1: Constructing the Memory of International Organizations.- From the League of Nations to the United Nations: The Continuing Preservation and Development of the Geneva Archives.- Matsuoka Yosuke’s Miscalculation at Geneva: A Possible Reconsideration Using JACAR Data.- Part 2: Eurocentrism and Science Policy.- On the Concept of International Organization: Centralization, Hegemonism and Constitutionalism.- Activities and Discourses on International Cultural Relations in Modern Japan: The Making of KBS ([NAME] [NAME]), 1934–53.- International Control of Epidemic Diseases from a Historical and Cultural Perspective.- Part 3: International Organization as a Forum: Turning Local Concerns into Global Issues.- Sino-Japanese Controversies over the Textbook Problem and the League of Nations.- Beyond Empires’ Science: Inter-Imperial Pacific Science Network in the 1920s.- Networking through the Y: The Role of YMCA in China’s Search for New National Identity and Internationalization.- Part 4: Culture and Standardization: The Multifunctional and Contradictory Use of International Organizations.- Global Governance: From Organizations to Networks or Not?.- New Capitalism, UNESCO and the Re-enchantment of Culture.- Popular Culture and International Cooperation in the 1930s/CIAP and the League of Nations.- Avenues and Confines of Globalizing the Past: UNESCO’s International Commission for a “Scientific and Cultural History of Mankind” (1952–1969). | The book critically investigates the local impact of international organizations beyond a Western rationale and aims to overcome [NAME] patterns of analysis. Considering Asian and Western examples, the contributions originate from different disciplines and study areas and discuss a global approach, which has been a blind spot in scholarly research on international organizations until now. Using the 1930s as a historical reference, the contributions question role of international organizations during conflicts, war and crises, gaining insights into their function as peacekeeping forces in the 21st century. While chapter one discusses the historicity of international organizations and the availability of sources, the second chapter deliberates on Eurocentrism and science policy, considering the converging of newly created epistemic communities and old diplomatic elites. Chapter 3 sheds light on international organizations as platforms, expanding the field of research from the diversity of organizations to the patterns of global governance. The final chapter turns to the question of how international organizations invented and introduced new fields of action, pointing to the antithetic role of standardization, the preservation of cultural heritage and the difficulties in reaching a non-Western approach. | <p>Interference between Eurocentrism and global governance cover a blind spot in scholarly [NAME] international organizations cover an academic void</p><p>Historical reactions of international organizations to crises and war help us to understand their peacekeeping functions in the 21st century</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04584-9 | Social Sciences | Hustinx | [NAME], Universiteit Ghent, Ghent, Belgium; [NAME], Ersta Sköndal University College, Stockholm, Sweden; [NAME], Universitair [NAME], Antwerp, Belgium; [NAME], Universitair [NAME], Antwerp, Belgium | Religion and Volunteering | Complex, contested and ambiguous relationships | Nonprofit and Civil Society Studies |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 200 p. 6 illus. in color. | 0 | approx. | 134.99 | 134.99 | 144.44 | 148.49 | 120.5 | 177.5 | English | Social Sciences | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Culture - Religion | SCX22100 | [NAME] | Social Sciences / Sociology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | Planned | 2014-05-01 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1. Religion and volunteering: Complex, contested and ambiguous relationships.- Chapter 2. Christian calling and volunteering.- Chapter 3. If I am only for myself, who am I? Volunteering and righteousness in Judaism.- Chapter 4. Philanthropic virtue.- Chapter 5. Religiosity and formal volunteering in global perspective.- Chapter 6. A cross-national examination of motivation to volunteer: Religious context, national value patterns, and nonprofit regimes.- Chapter 7. Volunteering among church attendees in Australia: Individual and collective dimensions.- Chapter 8. Lost and found in secularization: A religious perspective on the meaning of volunteering.- Chapter 9. Making church happen: Architectural methods to transform Flanders’ parish churches into civic collectives.- Chapter 10. Restorative justice and volunteering in a secular age.- Chapter 11. Short-Term Mission Voluntarism and the Post-secular Imaginary.- Chapter 12. Religion and social solidarity: A pragmatist approach.- Chapter 13. “Your prayer moves God”: On the relation between voluntarism, the emergent Charismatic movement in Beirut and social capital.- Chapter 14. Faith-based organizations and civic engagement in Egypt: Can FBOs be agents for change?.- Chapter 15. ‘Go back to our values’: Restoring symbolic hegemony through promoting ‘volunteering’.- Chapter 16. Volunteering in religious communities: What does it bring to society? [NAME]. | Religion is considered a key predictor of volunteering: the more religious people are, the more likely they are to volunteer. This positive association enjoys significant support in current research; in fact, it could be considered the ‘default perspective’ on the relationship between both phenomena. In this book, the authors claim that, although the dominant approach is legitimate and essential, it nonetheless falls short in grasping the full complexity of the interaction between religion and volunteering. It needs to be recognized that there are tensions between religion and volunteering, and that these tensions are intensifying as a result of the changing meaning and role of religion in society. Therefore, the central aim and contribution of this book is to demonstrate that the relationship between religion and volunteering is not univocal but differentiated, ambiguous and sometimes provocative. By introducing the reader to a much wider landscape of perspectives, this volume offers a richer, more complex and variable understanding. Apart from the established positive causality, the authors examine tensions between religion and volunteering from the perspective of religious obligation, religious change, processes of secularization and notions of post-secularity. They further explore how actions that are considered altruistic, politically neutral and motivated by religious beliefs can be used for political reasons. This volume opens up the field to new perspectives on religious actors and on how religion and volunteering are enacted outside Western liberal and Christian societies. It emphasizes interdisciplinary perspectives, including theology, philosophy, sociology, political science, anthropology and architecture. | <p>Challenges standard interpretation of the relationship between religion and volunteering</p><p>Further defines the complex phenomenon of religion and volunteerism</p><p>Looks beyond Western world and religions</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-658-05254-6 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], McKinsey & Co., Inc., Frankfurt am Main, Germany | Management Ethics and Talmudic Dialectics | Navigating Corporate [NAME] with the Indivisible Hand |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 377 | Soft cover | Book | XIV, 377 p. 10 illus. | 0 | final | 56.07 | 56.07 | 59.99 | 61.68 | 50.99 | 75 | English | Social Sciences | Organizational Studies, Economic Sociology | SCX22020 | JHBL | Culture - Religion | SCX22100 | [NAME] | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | The Talmudic Work Ethic and the Yeshivah Culture.- Fraud, Corruption and Whistle-Blowing in the Talmud.- Talmudic Investor and Employment Relations.- A Talmudic Perspective on Wealth and Philanthropy. | [NAME] develops a talmudic perspective on management ethics. By analyzing the central ethical dilemmas of corporate managers in light of applicable traditions from the Oral Torah, this book offers a critical bridge between the contemporary business corporation and rabbinic Judaism’s foundational tradition. The issues studied thereby include organizational culture, fraud and corruption, whistle-blowing, investor and employment relations, executive compensation, corporate social responsibility and environmental sustainability. | Study in the field of social sciences | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-658-05266-9 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Oxford University, Oxford, UK | People Living with HIV in the USA and Germany | A Comparative Study of Biographical Experiences of Chronic Illness |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 243 | Soft cover | Book | XII, 243 p. | 0 | final | 46.72 | 46.72 | 49.99 | 51.39 | 42.99 | 62.5 | English | Social Sciences | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Financial Freedom and Autonomy.- Stigma: Appearance, Privacy, and Visibility.- Migration Experiences: Asylum Seeker Social Policy and Barriers to U.S. Travel.- Reversal of Agency: Denial and the Construction of Alternate Reality. | [NAME] illuminates the problematic issues in the life experiences of people living with HIV. She focuses on the challenges embedded in social policy such as access, cost, and availability of quality medical care as well as immigration policies, which can restrict the freedom of people to travel, work, and live in different nations and regions. Another focus are stigma, discrimination as well as existential struggles of identity, meaning, and reality. By engaging in a transnational comparison, the author identifies areas of strength and weakness in domestic U.S. policy as compared to social policies in Germany. | Study in the field of social sciences | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-658-04915-7 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], Istanbul Bilgi University, Istanbul, Turkey; E. Fuat Keyman, [NAME], Istanbul, Turkey; [NAME], Istanbul Bilgi University, Istanbul, Turkey; [NAME], Humboldt Universität zu Berlin, Berlin, Germany | Contemporary Turkey at a Glance | Interdisciplinary Perspectives on Local and Translocal Dynamics |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 208 | Soft cover | Book | 208 p. | 0 | approx. | 29.99 | 29.99 | 32.09 | 32.99 | 26.99 | 40 | English | Social Sciences | Cultural Studies | SCX22040 | JFC | Social Structure, Social Inequality | SCX22010 | JFF | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | Planned | 2014-04-23 00:00:00 |  |  | Appropriating the Past.- Challenging Authority: Public Contention and Identity Negotiation.- Translocal Dynamics | Turkey has witnessed significant social, cultural, and political change over the last decades. This transformation has manifested itself in all segments of society and resulted in the alteration of political ideologies and institutions. The twelve authors of this volume shed light on the complexities of a changing Turkey through an interdisciplinary perspective. Their application of novel conceptual approaches and methodologies make this book a unique contribution to the study of modern Turkey. | <p>In-depth focus on the most recent key issues in contemporary Turkish Studies</p><p>Presentation of innovative research approaches to the field of Turkish Studies</p><p>Snapshots of contemporary Turkish Studies in Europe from an interdisciplinary perspective</p> | Professionals | Standard (0) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04479-8 | Social Sciences | Manacorda | Stefano Manacorda, [NAME], Santa Maria Capua Vetere, Italy; [NAME], Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore, Milan, Italy; [NAME], Università Cattolica del Sacro Cuore, Milan, Italy | Preventing Corporate Corruption | The Anti-Bribery Compliance Model |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 399 | Hard cover | Book | I, 399 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Social Sciences | Criminology & Criminal Justice | SCX15000 | [NAME] | Business/Management Science, general | SCW23008 | KJ | Social Sciences / Criminology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Part I: Moving towards the ABC Model: A General Overview.- Towards an Anti-bribery [NAME] and Strategies for a “Hybrid Normativity”.- The Universal Approach of the United Nations Convention against Corruption.- The Private Sector Role in the Fight Against Corruption.- Public–Private Partnerships and Agency Problems: The Use of Incentives in Strategies to Combat Corruption.- Internal Investigations, Whistleblowing and Cooperation: The Struggle for Information in the Criminal Process.- Collective Action and Corruption.- Part II: The ABC Model.- The ABC Model.- A Draft of an Anti-Bribery Compliance Program Recommended to Corporations Operating in a Multinational Environment.- Part III: Background Analysis for the ABC Model: Compliance Programs in Practice.- The Anti-Corruption Compliance Program Benchmarking Assessment in the Oil and Gas Industry: Methodology and Achievements.- Empirical Features of International Bribery Practice: Evidence from FCPA Enforcement Actions.- Part IV: The ABC Model and International Legal Framework: Rules, Controls and Sanctions.- Corporate Anti-Bribery Self-Regulation and the International Legal Framework.- An Anti-Corruption Ethics and Compliance Program for Business: A Practical Guide.- The Role of the G20 and [NAME] in the Fight Against Corruption.- Emerging Control of and Sanctions against Corruption: The ICC.- Globalizing the Fight against Corruption.- The Fight Against Corruption: The World Bank Debarment Policy.- Part V: The ABC Model and Criminal Justice: The National Legal Context.- Compliance Programs and Criminal Law Responses: A Comparative Analysis.- An Analysis of Institutional Guidance and Case Law in the United States Pertaining to Compliance Programs.- Corporate Responsibility and Compliance Programs in Italian Case Law.- Corporate Responsibility and Compliance Programs in Australia.- Corporate Responsibility and Compliance Programs in Canada.- Corporate Responsibility and Compliance Programs in China.- Corporate Liability and Compliance Programs in France.- Corporate Responsibility and Compliance Programs in Switzerland.- Corporate Responsibility and Compliance Programs in the United Kingdom.- Appendix: Questionnaire: Anti-Corruption Compliance Program Benchmarking Assessment. | This book presents the results of a two-year international research project conducted for the United Nations Office on Drugs and Crime (UNDOC) to investigate and provide solutions for reducing bribery and corruption in corporations and institutions. It starts with an empirical case study on the effectiveness of a set of self-regulation rules adopted by multinational companies in the energy sector. Second, it explores the context and factors leading to corruption internationally (and the relationships between domestic criminal law and self-regulation). Third, it examines guidelines for the adoption of compliance programs developed by international institutions, to serve as models for the future. The principle result of the book is a three-pronged Anti-Bribery Corruption Model (so called ABC Model), endorsed by the United Nations, intended as a corruption prevention tool intended to be adopted by private corporations. This work provides a common, research-based standard for anti-bribery compliance programs, with international applications. This work will be of interest to researchers studying Criminology and Criminal Justice, particularly in the areas of organized crime and corruption, as well as related areas like Business Ethics and Comparative International Law. | Presents empirically-based model for combating bribery and corporate corruption<br>Provides clear examples of current international case laws<br>Useful guide for researchers and key practitioners interested in anti-bribery, corruption, trafficking and related issues | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04665-5 | Social Sciences | Pătruţ | [NAME], Vasile Alecsandri University of Bacau, Bacau, Romania; [NAME], Vasile Alecsandri University of Bacau, Bacau, Romania | Social Media in Politics | Case Studies on the Political Power of Social Media | Public Administration and Information Technology | 13 | 1 | 2014 | 760 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 760 p. 68 illus., 24 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Social Sciences | Political Communication | SCX18050 | JPA | Computer Appl. in Social and Behavioral Sciences | SCI23028 | J | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword.- Preface.-Part I: The Political Power of Social Media.- Part II: Using Social Media in Electoral Marketing.- Part III: Social Media in Mobilizating People for Riots and Revolutions. | This volume sets out to analyse the relation between social media and politics by investigating the power of the internet and more specifically social media, in the political and social discourse. The volume collects original research on the use of social media in political campaigns, electoral marketing, riots and social revolutions, presenting a range of case studies from across the world as well as theoretical and methodological contributions. Examples that explore the use of social media in electoral campaigns include, for instance, studies on the use of Face book in the 2012 US presidential campaign and in the 2011 Turkish general elections. The final section of the book debates the usage of [NAME] and other Web 2.0 tools in mobilizing people for riots and revolutions, presenting and analysing recent events in Istanbul and Egypt, among others. | <p>Analyses examples of the use of social media at three level of elections: local, general and presidential </p><p>Presents various case studies from all around the world </p><p>Studies current events in the politic international arena </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11643 | Business and Economics
 | 978-3-319-04683-9 | Social Sciences | Rowley | [NAME], George Mason University, Fairfax, VA, USA; [NAME], Shandong University of Finance, Jinan, Shandong, China | Britannia 1066-1884 | From [NAME] to the Birth of Freedom under Constitutional Monarchy, [NAME], and the Rule of Law | Studies in Public Choice | 30 | 1 | 2014 | 223 | Hard cover | Book | I, 223 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Political Theory | SCX18010 | JPA | Comparative Politics | [NAME] | JPB | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | ​The Modern Tools for Analytical History: Economics, Political Science, Public Choice, Philosophy, and the Law.- The Evolution of Absolutism in Medieval England: 1066-1485.- The Tudor Dynasty: Perfecting Absolutism in the Era of the Renaissance and the Reformation, 1485-1603.- The Stuart and the Cromwell Doom: The Hinge of Fate for Absolutist Autocrats, 1603-1688.- The Seventeenth Century Philosophical Divide: Unity versus Liberty.- The Demise of the Divine Right of Kings, the Decline of Monarchic Power, and the Rise of Parliament, 1689-1775.- Hugo [NAME], [NAME] and Cato’s Letters: Evolution of Philosophy from the Glorious Revolution to the American Revolution.- Freedoms Flourish under Constitutional Monarchy, Limited  Suffrage, Laissez-Faire Capitalism, Free Trade, and the Rule of Law, 1776-1884.- The Zenith of Classical Liberal Philosophy in Britannia: From the Scottish Enlightenment to [NAME] Mill.​ | This book offers an analytic history of Britannia (first England and Wales and then Great Britain) over eight hundred years of political turmoil, intermingled with economic stagnation, followed by the engine of the industrial revolution. The book draws on economics, political science, public choice, philosophy and the law to probe in depth into the evolution of Britannia from an impoverished feudal and then post-feudal autocracy into a constitutional monarchy with limited suffrage that provided the fulcrum for industrial and commercial success, making Britannia, by 1884, the richest nation, per capita, on the planet. The book challenges head-on the Whiggist liberal notion of Macaulay and Trevelyan that the path from oppression to freedom was one of unimpeded progress. Among its novel features, the book draws upon the dictator’s handbook, as modeled by [NAME] and [NAME] to evaluate the period of varying autocracy, 1066-1688. The book draws upon modern public choice theory and legal history to evaluate the fragile, corrupt constitutional monarchy that oversaw the initial phase of post-Glorious Revolution Britannia, 1689-1775. At each stage, the philosophical battle between those who sought order and unity and those who sought individual liberty is meticulously outlined. The book draws on the contributions of the Scottish Enlightenment (Hume, [NAME] and [NAME]) and of classical liberal philosophy ([NAME]) to explain the final vault of Britannia from a weak and corrupt to a robust and admired constitutional monarchy grounded on the rule of law, over the period 1776-1884. | <p>Analyses the eight hundred year history of political turmoil in Britannia </p><p>History of Britannia 1066-1884 application of analytical tools not readily available to historians </p><p>Focuses on relevant political and economic philosophy and freedom rather than equality as the mainstream of political ferment</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04926-7 | Social Sciences | Schrodt | [NAME], Vienna, Austria | Modern Turkey and the Armenian Genocide | An Argument About the Meaning of the Past | Contributions to Political Science |  | 1 | 2014 |  | Hard cover | Book | Approx. 400 p. | 0 | final | 129.99 | 129.99 | 139.09 | 142.99 | 117 | 173.5 | English | Social Sciences | International Relations | SCX18040 | JPS | Cultural Studies | SCX22040 | JFC | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Overview.- 1 Introduction.- 2 Theoretical Considerations.- 3 Research Design.- 4 The Arguments.- 5 Conclusions.- 6 Looking Forward.- 7 Appendices | A number of highly informative books have been written about what is often called the 'Armenian Genocide'. This book, written by a political scientist, offers a different approach: It doesn’t concentrate on the past; it concentrates on the present, and shows how this past event is perceived and discussed today. The idea is that the arguments deployed in this debate, those which allege that what happened amounts to genocide and those which deny this claim reveal something about cognitive structures of present agents, such as the Turkish government, as well as about the meaning and use of the term 'genocide'. Analyzing current positions and communication on this historical event thereby helps to illuminate present notions of identity, justice and interethnic coexistence. | <p>Presents a new approach to read and interpret this historical controversy</p><p>Re-evaluates the concept of genocide from constructivist perspective</p><p>Reflects on present notions of justice and interethnic coexistence</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-03927-5 | Social Sciences | Schunck | Reinhard Schunck, University of Bielefeld, Bielefeld, Germany | Transnational Activities and Immigrant Integration in Germany | Concurrent or Competitive Processes? | International Perspectives on Migration | 8 | 1 | 2014 | 301 | Hard cover | Book | X, 301 p. 25 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Migration | [NAME] | [NAME] | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1: Introduction.- 2: Immigrant Integration.- 3: Transnationalism.- 4: A Theory of Immigrant Integration and Transnational Activities.- 5: Methods.- 6: Transnational Activities and Immigrant Integration in Germany.- 7: Determinants of Transnational Involvement.- 8: Consequences of Transnational Involvement.- 9: Conclusion.- Appendix. | This book investigates both the causes and effects of transnational activities among immigrants in relation to their integration into the receiving society. It uses large scale, representative data about first and second generation immigrants in Germany. It develops a formal theoretical model, which explains both transnational involvement and paths of immigrant integration.Important questions are answered: What consequences does transnational involvement have on integration? Is transnational involvement a distinct form of integration? Is it an alternative to assimilation? Does it hinder or facilitate assimilation?Longitudinal analyses are presented which show that immigrant integration and transnational involvement do not necessarily oppose each other. The book shows that although low levels of integration may coincide with strong transnational ties, the relationship is not causal.This book shows how immigrant integration and transnational involvement are related to each other and how a joint examination of both processes may advance our understanding of the general dynamics of migration and integration. | <p>Ground-breaking quantitative assessment of immigrant integration and transnational activities </p><p>Delivers new empirical evidence on international migration</p><p>Integrative theoretical model advances our understanding of the general dynamics of migration and integration</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04929-8 | Social Sciences | Serenata | [NAME], Auburn University, Auburn, AL, USA | The ’Ndrangheta and [NAME] Unita | The History, Organization and Operations of Two Unknown Mafia Groups | Studies of Organized Crime | 12 | 1 | 2014 | 349 | Hard cover | Book | I, 349 p. 4 illus., 2 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Criminology & Criminal Justice | SCX15000 | [NAME] |  |  |  | Social Sciences / Criminology | Contributed volume | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-05-08 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction and Background.- Mafia and Daily Life.- ’Ndrangheta - A Multilevel System of Power and Academic Accumulation.- Origins and Development of ’Ndrangheta.- Women in the ’Ndrangheta amid Change and Continuity.- ’Ndrangheta- A Networked Organization.- The Sacra Corona Unita - Origins, Characteristics, and Strategies. | This book covers two lesser known but important members of the Italian Mafia: the ’Ndrangheta and the Sacra Corona Unita. Italian criminal organizations, in particular Mafia, are one of the most commonly researched organized crime groups, usually focusing on the Sicilian Mafia, Cosa Nostra, or the Neapolitan Mafia, [NAME]. However, Italy has other two other Mafias, one in Apulia, [NAME], and the other in Calabria, ’Ndrangheta. Although an extensive literature is available on Cosa Nostra and [NAME], less is known about the other two organizations, particularly their operations in the United States. Territory is one of the most important elements in the Mafia because the criminal organization operates its signoria territoriale, controlling every illegal activity in its sphere of action. This territorial power goes beyond the Italian boundaries reaching the United States of America and other non-European countries, with the mere aim of developing their drug/weapon deals and money laundering businesses. Mafia, therefore, is not a uniquely Italian phenomenon as it might appear, but a worldwide phenomenon, affecting many societies and economies. This unique volume is its interest into a field as yet completely provides new information about the ’Ndrangheta and [NAME] written by an interdisciplinary group of Italian scholars. It covers organizational, hierarchic, and operative aspects: that is, the role that they have in politics, in their own families, in business relations in Italy and abroad. It also highlights the particular role that Cosa Nostra and [NAME] had in their development. This work will be of interest to criminology researchers studying organized crime, corruption, money laundering and trafficking, as well as researchers from related fields, such as political science, economics, and international relations. | <p>Provides insight into two lesser-known mafia groups with international implications</p><p>Explores a methodology for studying these groups that is applicable for understanding other organized crime networks</p><p>Includes a full picture of the scope of Italian mafia reach within Italy, the United States, and globally</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-38-5 | Social Sciences | Smith | [NAME], Curtin University, Perth, WA, Australia; Marina Lommerse, Curtin University, Perth, WA, Australia; [NAME], Curtin University, Perth, WA, Australia | Perspectives on Social Sustainability and Interior Architecture | Life from the Inside |  |  | 2 | 2014 | 127 | Hard cover | Book | I, 127 p. 30 illus., 24 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Social Structure, Social Inequality | SCX22010 | JFF | Sustainable Development | SCU34000 | RNU | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Foreword by [NAME] Costello.- 1. An introduction to social sustainability and interior architecture, by [NAME], [NAME], Marina Lommerse, [NAME] Metcalfe.- Part I. Community Engagement and Interior Architecture .- 2. Working together: interior architecture creating with the community, by Marina Lommers.- 3. More than bricks and mortar: lessons in design and world citizenship, by [NAME] Beaverford.- Part II. Social Justice and Interior Architecture .- 4. Interiors can address Social Justice: fact or fiction? By [NAME] Smith.- 5. The importance of interior design professionals' engagement in policy development to effect change for underprivileged individuals, by Jill Pable and [NAME] 6. Interior design by expediency, by [NAME] and [NAME] 7. Inside the remote-area Aboriginal house, by [NAME] Memmott.- 8. Too ‘nice’ to be socially responsible: reflections of a Danish interior practitioner, by [NAME] Frandsen.- Part III. Cultural Heritage and Interior Architecture .- 9. Cultural Heritage practice through socially sustainable adaptive re-use of industrial buildings: a Western Australian narrative, by [NAME] Metcalfe.- 10. Ambiguity and permeability in historic Modern interiors: a challenge for Cultural Heritage and social sustainability, by Penny Sparke . | This book argues that interior architects have a responsibility to practice their profession in collaborative ways that address the needs of communities and of to be the agents of social justice and cultural heritage. The book is divided into three sections, based on three pivotal themes — community engagement, social justice and cultural heritage. Each section has chapters that put forward the principles of these themes, leading into a variety of fascinating case studies that illustrate how socially sustainable design is implemented in diverse communities across the world. The second section includes four concise case studies of community housing issues, including remote-area indigenous housing and housing for the homeless. The third section offers two extensively researched essays on design and cultural heritage — a case study of the development of a redundant industrial site and a historical study of gendered domestic interiors.The book appeals to a wider audience than the design community alone and challenges mainstream interior design/interior architecture practitioners nationally and internationally to take a leading role in the field of socially responsible design. The issues raised by the authors are relevant for individuals, communities, government and non-government organisations, professionals and students.“In the twenty-first century we seem to have entered into a new world of knowledge discovery, where many of the most exciting insights come not from the authority of a traditional discipline, but from the dialogue that happens at the hubs and intersections of thought — the arenas where different disciplines and approaches, different schools and habits of thinking, come together to collaborate and contend. This collection is a good example of this, and I hope the book will be widely read and its lessons learned and applied.”<br />Tim Costello, Officer of the Order of Australia, Chief Executive, World Vision Australia. | <p>Gives examples of socially responsible design from experienced interior practitioners and researchers</p><p>Challenges researchers and practitioners to rethink the interface between environments and people</p><p>Investigates anthropocentric and future-focused design for sustaining social and cultural capital and diversity</p><p>Exemplifies how interior architecture, informed by social justice, can meet fundamental human needs</p><p>Includes close conceptual analysis and critique combined with relevant intercultural case studies</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-81-322-1809-8 | Social Sciences | Tejada | [NAME], EPFL, Lausanne, Switzerland; Uttam Bhattacharya, Institute of Development Studies, Kolkata, India; Binod Khadria, Jawaharlal Nehru University, New Delhi, India; [NAME], International Labour Organization, Geneva, Switzerland | Indian Skilled Migration and Development | To Europe and Back | Dynamics of Asian Development |  | 1 | 2014 | 356 | Hard cover | Book | XII, 356 p. 27 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Migration | [NAME] | [NAME] | Population Economics | SCW12154 | KCP | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer India | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction [NAME], Uttam Bhattacharya, [NAME] 1: Conceptual framework.- Geographies of world knowledge. The role of scientists and scientific policies and practices [NAME] Bolay.- The dichotomy of the skilled and unskilled among NRIs and PIOs: [NAME] or boon for development in India? [NAME] of international mobility on migrants’ home countries: Analytical framework [NAME] Hercog.- Student migration at the tri-juncture of globalization – higher education, competition for talent and migration management Ana Mosneaga.- Investment-linked skilled mobility between India and the EU [NAME] and  Deeparghya Mukherjee.- Empirical evidence.- Methodology Umesh Bharte.-Institutional settings in selected European destination countries in comparison to institutional settings in the USA [NAME] and [NAME] Diasporic paths to development: An Indian perspective Umesh Bharte and [NAME] experiences and aspirations in the host countries with the Indian reality [NAME], [NAME] and Uttam Bhattacharya.- Return Migration and Development: Evidence from India’s Skilled Professionals Perveen Kumar, [NAME], Jayanta Nayek.- [NAME], Return and Development: Emerging Trends and Issues with special reference to India Jayanti Kumari and [NAME] in the host countries and return plans [NAME], [NAME] and Uttam Bhattacharya.- Scientific diasporas and backwards knowledge transfer [NAME], Jean-Claude Bolay, [NAME] migration: Expectations and realities of career choices among skilled return migrants in India Radha Roy Biswas.-Conclusions.- India: a paradigmatic exemplar to be used with precaution Jean-Baptiste Meyer and [NAME] of Indian human capital in the brain drain – brain gain debate [NAME], Binod Khadria, Uttam Bhattacharya and [NAME]. | This edited contribution explores strategies and measures for leveraging the potential of skilled diasporas and for advancing knowledge-based evidence on return skilled migration and its impact on development. By taking the example of Indian skilled migration, this study identifies ways of involving returned skilled migrants in home country development as well as proposes approaches to engage the diaspora in development. As high-skill immigration from India to mainland Europe is a rather recent phenomenon, the activities of Indian professionals in Europe are under-researched. The findings have wider application in contributing to the policy dialogue on migration and development, specifically to the advantage for developing and emerging economies. The book employs an interdisciplinary, two-fold approach: The first part of the research looks at how international exposure affects the current situation of skilled returnees in India. The second, European, part of the research examines migration policies, labour market regulations and other institutional settings that enable or hinder skilled Indians’ links with the country of origin. Structural differences between the host countries may facilitate different levels of learning opportunities; thus, this book identifies good practices to promote the involvement of Indian skilled diaspora in socio-economic development. In applying the framework of diaspora contributions as well as the return channel to study the impact on India, the book draws on qualitative and quantitative research methods consisting of policy analysis, in-depth interviews with key experts and skilled migrants and on data sets collected specifically for this study. | <p>Contributes to a growing area of concern on the link between skilled migration and development</p><p>Focuses on the under-researched area of skilled mobility between India and the EU</p><p>Provides important policy directives for both home and host countries to deal with developmental impacts of skilled migration</p><p>Addresses important questions related to the socio-economic effects of return migration  </p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | [PHONE]-10-1 | Social Sciences | Tiwari | [NAME], Faculty of Built Environment, Curtin University, Perth, WA, Australia; Marina Lommerse, Marina Lommerse Consultants, South Fremantle, WA, Australia; [NAME], Faculty of Built Environment, Curtin University, Perth, WA, Australia | M² Models and Methodologies for Community Engagement |  |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 284 | Hard cover | Book | XXV, 284 p. 81 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Social Structure, Social Inequality | SCX22010 | JFF | Landscape/Regional and Urban Planning | SCJ15000 | RP | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Singapore | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | 1 Navigating Community Engagement.- Part I: Narratives on Models, Methodologies and Methods.- 2 An Ethnographic and Collaborative Model of Inquiry: Activity Centre Project in India.- 3 Capacity Building and Community Development: a Community Dialogue on Equality in Rural Uganda.- 4 Urban Neighbourhood Regeneration and Community Participation: an Unresolved Issue in the Barcelona Experience.- 5 The Port Resolution Project: Developing Community Built and Managed Visitor Accommodation Typologies.- 6 Applying a Practical, Participatory Action Research Framework for Producing Knowledge, Action and Change in Communities: a Health Case Study from Gujarat, Western India.- 7 Inspired by Nature: Building Community Capacity Through Creative Leadership.- 8 Connections: Academics, Architects and Community Pro-Bono Projects.- 9 Fremantle on the Edge: a Community Collaboration.- 10 Transparency and Interdependence.- Part II: Unfolding Challenges and Removing Barriers in the Community Engagement Process: Opportunities for Transdisciplinary and Translocational Applications.- 11 Capturing the Diversity and Commonalities of Community Engagement.- 12 Joining Communities: A Role for Reflection.- 13 Reflections on Working with Communities and Community-based Projects in Bangladesh.- 14 Action Preparedness Tool for Community Engagement.- Part III: Community Engagement and Capacity Building: a Transdisciplinary Perspective.- 15 Transforming Community: Opportunities for Transdisciplinary Application. | How can we engage communities? What is empowerment? To what extent should the project process be participatory? How is an outsider-insider relationship handled? How do researchers negotiate with the hegemony of western cultural interpretations? How are organizational and contextual influences handled in a project? What leadership demands do such projects place on researchers? What is capacity building? What are creative leaders and creative communities? How does the researcher journey from their studio to the situation? M² Models and Methodologies for Community Engagement discusses key theoretical constructs — community engagement, capacity building, and community empowerment — in order to demonstrate how theory and practice are relevant to the development of forms of community involvement.The book maps the attributes of community based projects by moving beyond simply bringing people together from a variety of disciplines, and taking an approach which is transdisciplinary and applicable across cultures and genres. Here, all people — including the community — are ongoing contributors, and can freely move between their own and others’ discipline-specific arenas.M² differs from and extends on other works in this field of practice and research, in that its transdisciplinary, collaborative approach positions the community as a particular kind of discipline to create real change in diverse locations and fields of experience. The book is in itself a model of community engagement, as the researchers have formed a community of research and practice for change, and have developed a transformative model for community engagement that is greater than the sum of its parts – hence M².M² offers a valuable resource for students, researchers, academics, practitioners, policy developers and volunteers from the fields of architecture, interior architecture, health, planning, anthropology, education, home economics, communication, political studies and development studies. | <p>Clearly illustrates Models, Methodologies and Methods with more than 80 diagrams and images</p><p>The principles covered are applicable to all types of community engagement for community-based projects</p><p>First-hand exemplars from experienced practitioners and researchers</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54071-4 | Social Sciences | Vigoda-Gadot | [NAME], University of Haifa, School of Political Science, Haifa, Israel; [NAME], Ben-Gurion University of the Negev, [NAME], Israel | Managing Democracies in Turbulent Times | Trust, Performance, and [NAME] in Modern States |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 195 | Hard cover | Book | XVIII, 195 p. 17 illus. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Political Theory | SCX18010 | JPA | Public Administration | SCW27000 | JPP | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Preface.- Prologue: The Conflict Between Good Management and Open Democracy: A Crisis of Trust.- 1 The Transformation of the Modern State.- 2 The Relationship Between Citizens and Government in Modern States: Threats and Challenges.- 3 Managing the Democratic State: Caught Between Politics and Administration.- 4 The Bureaucracy-Democracy Paradox Revisited: A Challenge to Democracy in Turbulent Times.- 5 Management, Performance and Democracy in Turbulent Times: An Evidence-Based Analysis.- 6 Epilogue: The Road to Better Governance in Modern States.- Appendix.- Index. | This book discusses some of the main challenges that arise in the management of modern democracies, with a focus on the role of citizens and their perceptions of government. A theoretical and practical framework is suggested for dealing with some of the most urgent problems that governments face today: the balance between bureaucracy and democracy and between political and administrative concerns; the pressing economic concerns in a market-based, globalized knowledge society and the changes in the relationship of trust amongst the players. At the heart of the analysis is the idea that running governments effectively means settling the potential conflicts between all those who are involved in the governmental process and in the making of public policy and public actions. The authors suggest approaches for strengthening the trust in democratic institutions and cooperation between the main actors in the democratic sphere, without compromising on the need to ensure effective governance. | <p>Original empirical studies on public sector performance and trust with original comparative data</p><p>Includes discussion of the most relevant managerial problems facing modern states</p><p>Incorporates discussion of the main problems of modern democracies with special focus on legitimacy, participation and inequality</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-642-54057-8 | Social Sciences | Wang | [NAME], Yantai University School of Economics and Management, Yantai, China | Tamed Village “Democracy” | Elections, Governance and Clientelism in a Contemporary Chinese Village | Understanding China |  | 1 | 2014 | 177 | Hard cover | Book | XV, 177 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Political Science, general | SCX18000 | JPA | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Social Sciences / Political Science | Monograph | Springer [NAME] | In production | 2014-03-31 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction.- The Social and System Background of Villagers’ Self-Governance.- Villagers as Clients and “Locked-in” Voters.- Candidates, Patrons and Factions.- The Role of Local State Officials in Village Elections.- Village Self-Governance: a “Democratic” Style?.- The Local State’s Sustained Control of Village Governance.- Conclusion. | Wang's book offers an empirically rich and conceptually nuanced analysis of how local state agents maintain control over village self-governance in China. His careful analysis of primary documents enables him to explicate the formal mechanisms used by members of the local state to influence village affairs. Meanwhile, his rigorous and fascinating ethnographic data enable him to elucidate the manifold ways in which informal clientelist ties between local state officials and village elites permit the former to exert control. Overall, this excellent book powerfully demonstrates the need for scholars to go beyond attention to election processes when evaluating what village democracy means in a Chinese context. It is a must-read for all serious scholars of Chinese politics and society.—Rachel Murphy, University of OxfordGuohui Wang's highly original, in-depth case research vividly reveals the dynamics of contemporary Chinese village politics. By combining abundant empirical data with close observation as an 'insider,' his book illustrates the processes and consequences of transplanting 'democracy' into rural Chinese society. Particularly for those in the West who are keen on understanding the ongoing transformation of rural China, this book is a rich and revealing source.—Shukai Zhao, Development Research Center of the State Council, P.R. China | <p>An insider’s in-depth exploration of village politics in contemporary rural China, among the first books of its kind in English literature</p><p>Applies a clientelist perspective to explain the state-society relationship in Chinese politics</p><p>Accessible and interesting for both China researchers and general readers keen on understanding Chinese society and Chinese political culture</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-1-4939-0478-5 | Social Sciences | Wrobel | [NAME], University of Mississippi, University, MS, USA | The Bioarchaeology of Space and Place | Ideology, Power, and Meaning in Maya Mortuary Contexts |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 249 | Hard cover | Book | I, 249 p. 61 illus., 28 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Archaeology | SCX13000 | HD | Anthropology | SCX12000 | JHM | Social Sciences / Archaeology | Contributed volume | Springer New York | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Chapter 1: Introduction.- Chapter 2: Sedimenting Social Identity: The Practice of Pre-Columbian Maya Body Partibility.- Chapter 3: Cueva del Lazo: Child Sacrifice or Special Funerary Treatment? Discussion of a Late Classic Context from the Zoque region of Western Chiapas (Mexico).- Chapter 4: A Case Study of Reverential Cave Use from Je’reftheel, Central Belize.- Chapter 5: Isotopic Insights into Mortuary Treatment and Origin at Xunantunich, Belize.- Chapter 6: Odontometric Investigation of the Origin of Freestanding Shrine Ossuaries at Mayapan.- Chapter 7: Human Dedicatory Burials from Altun Ha, Belize: Exploring Residential History Through [NAME] and Tissue Isotopic Compositions.- Chapter 8: Danse Macabre: Death, Community and Kingdom at El Kinel, Guatemala.- Chapter 9: Mortuary Pathways and Ritual Meanings Related to Maya Human Bone Deposits in Subterranean Contexts.- Chapter 10: Mortuary Sealing Among the Maya. | The Bioarchaeology of Space and Place investigates variations in social identity among the ancient [NAME] by focusing on individuals and small groups identified archaeologically by their inclusion in specific, discrete mortuary contexts or by unusual mortuary treatments. Utilizing archaeological, biological and taphonomic data from these contexts, the studies employ a variety of methodological approaches to reconstruct aspects of individuals’ life-course and mortuary pathways. Following this, specific mortuary behaviors are discussed in relation to their local or regional cultural setting using relevant archaeological, ethnohistoric, and/or ethnographic data in an effort to interpret their meaning within the broader social, political and economic contexts in which they were carried out. This volume covers a number of topics that are currently being debated in Maya archaeology, including identification and discussion of the role and extent of human sacrifice in Maya culture, the use of ancestors for maintaining political power, the mortuary use of caves by both elites and non-elites, ethnic distinctions within urban areas and the extent of movement of people between communities. Importantly, the papers in this volume attempt to test and move beyond static, dichotic categories that are often employed in mortuary studies in an effort to better understand the complex ways in which the Maya conceptualized and manipulated social identity. This type of nuanced case-study approach that incorporates historical, archaeological and theoretical contextualization is becoming increasingly important in the field of bioarchaeology, providing valuable sources of data where small, diverse samples impede populational approaches. | <p>Uses well-conceived frameworks for integrating data from various fields (skeletal, archaeological, ethnohistoric, cultural etc)</p><p>Focuses on individuals and small groups rather than aggregate data in Mayan society</p><p>Each chapter contains a literature review</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-05307-3 | Social Sciences | Xenitidou | [NAME], University of Surrey, Guildford, UK; [NAME], Manchester Metropolitan University Business School, Manchester, UK | The Complexity of Social Norms |  | Computational Social Sciences |  | 1 | 2014 | 158 | Hard cover | Book | X, 158 p. 11 illus., 5 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Methodology of the Social Sciences | SCX17000 | JHBC | Socio- and Econophysics, Population and Evolutionary Models | SCP33030 | JHBC | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-06-25 00:00:00 |  |  | The Conundrum of Social Norms.- Part I: The Complex Roots of Social Norms.- Misperception is Reality: The “Reign of Error” about Peer Risk Behaviour Norms among Youth and Young Adults.- Norms and Beliefs: How Change Occurs.- Social norms from the perspective of embodied cognition.- It Takes Two to Tango: We-Intentionality and the Dynamics of Social Norms.- The Relational Foundation Of Norm Enforcement.- Part II: Methods and Epistemological Implications of Social Norm Complexity.- Norm Emergence in Regulatory Compliance.- Norm Dynamics Within the Mind.- Vulnerability of Social Norms to Incomplete Information.- Part III: Evaluating Complex Approaches to Norms.- The “Reign of Mystery”: Have We Missed Something Crucial in Our Experimental and Computational Work on Social Norms?.- Three Barriers to Understanding Norms: levels, dynamics and context. | This book explores the view that normative behaviour is part of a complex of social mechanisms, processes and narratives that are constantly shifting. From this perspective, norms are not a kind of self-contained social object or fact, but rather an interplay of many things that we label as norms when we ‘take a snapshot’ of them at a particular instant. Further, this book pursues the hypothesis that considering the dynamic aspects of these phenomena sheds new light on them.  The sort of issues that this perspective opens to exploration include:Of what is this complex we call a 'social norm' composed of?How do new social norms emerge and what kind of circumstances might facilitate such an appearance?How context-specific are the norms and patterns of normative behaviour that arise?How do the cognitive and the social aspects of norms interact over time?How do expectations, beliefs and individual rationality interact with social norm complexes to effect behaviour?How does our social embeddedness relate to social constraint upon behaviour?How might the socio-cognitive complexes that we call norms be usefully researched? | <p>Takes a fresh, fundamentally dynamic and complexity inspired approach to the study of social norms</p><p>Presents a new methodological and theoretical perspective to study normative behavior</p><p>Contributing authors provide a unique and varied perspective from departments such as philosophy, economics and political science</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-3-319-04402-6 | Social Sciences | [NAME] | [NAME], University of Ljubljana, Ljubljana, Slovenia | Critical Perspectives in Happiness Research | The Birth of Modern Happiness |  |  | 1 | 2014 | 278 | Hard cover | Book | I, 278 p. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Quality of Life Research | SCX23000 | JFF | Positive Psychology | SCY44000 | [NAME] | Social Sciences | Monograph | Springer International Publishing | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | Introduction: Towards a Critical Perspective in Happiness Research.- Chapter 1. Overview of Happiness Research.- Chapter 2. Happiness, Culture and Relations of Power.- Chapter 3. The Return to Happiness: A New Interdisciplinary Approach to Happiness Research.- Chapter 4. Middle Ages: The Time before Happiness.- Chapter 5. The Origins of Happiness in Renaissance and Reformation.- Chapter 6. The Birth of Modern Happiness.- Chapter 7. The Evolution of Happiness: Development of Happiness from its [NAME] to its Contemporary Manifestations.- Chapter 8. Conclusion: Modernization as the Collective Pursuit of Happiness. ​ | This book presents an interdisciplinary exploration of the origins of happiness in the modern Western culture and makes the argument that happiness is not universal but is instead a culturally and historically specific experience, characteristic only to the Western world. It begins with an overview of the main research approaches to happiness and then studies the important but elusive theme in the context of culture and relations of power. The second part of the book analyses the social, religious, ethical and political processes that lead to the emergence of the experience of happiness, including consumer culture in contemporary societies. It presents an analysis of the medieval Christian experience which concludes that the modern experience of happiness only emerged in the 17th and 18th century, when the ideal of human existence increasingly started to be pursued in the present life. In its conclusion, this book explores the concept of modernization as the collective pursuit of happiness. | <p>Explores the concept of modernization as the collective pursuit of happiness </p><p>Places the concept of happiness into a historical and cultural context</p><p>Analyses the relationship of modern consumer culture with happiness in contemporary western societies</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
 | 978-94-017-8758-1 | Social Sciences | Zhang | [NAME], Chinese Academy of Social Sciences, Beijing, People's Republic of China; [NAME], Carleton University, Ottawa, ON, Canada | Migration in China and Asia | Experience and Policy | International Perspectives on Migration | 10 | 1 | 2014 | 322 | Hard cover | Book | I, 322 p. 29 illus., 23 illus. in color. | 0 | final | 99.99 | 99.99 | 106.99 | 109.99 | 90 | 133.5 | English | Social Sciences | Migration | [NAME] | [NAME] | Sociology, general | SCX22000 | JHB | Social Sciences | Contributed volume | Springer Netherlands | In production | 2014-04-30 00:00:00 |  |  | 1. Introduction: [NAME], [NAME] Duncan.- I: Migration and its Impacts in China and Asia: 1: “Wind over Water”:Some Anthropological Thoughts on East Asian Migration: [NAME] 2: Flows of People and the Canada-China Relationship in the 21st Century: Kenny Zhang.- 3: International Migration and Economic Development in Northeast China - The Acquisition and Transfer of New Migrant Capital: Outi Luova.- 4: [NAME] in Hong Kong: The Paradoxes of Lives Lived on Hold :Gordon Mathews.- II: International Migration and Marriage: 5: [NAME]-cultural Consequences of International Marriages in Korea: Emergence of Multiculturalism?: Hyup Choi.- 6: Constructing “Home” Across National Boundaries: A Case of Pakistani-Japanese Marriage: Masako Kudo.- 7: Empowerment or exploitation? How international is international marriage migration?: [NAME] Ullah.- III: Migrant’s Education and Employment: 8: Immigration and Diversity: Exploring Immigrant Parents’ Contributions to Teacher Education: [NAME]: Intra-metropolitan Opportunity Structure and Immigrant Self-employment: [NAME] Liu.- IV: Chinese Migration in Other Countries.- 10: Chinese Migration to Japan, 1979-2010: Patterns and Policies: Chunfen Shao.- 11: Old and New Chinese Organizations in Suriname ([NAME] Fat.- 12: The Localisation Strategies of Chinese Immigrants in Belgium – A Typological Study: [NAME] Liuhuang.- 13: New Chinese Immigrants to New Zealand: a PRC Dimension: [NAME] V: Return Migration: 14: [NAME] in the Age of Globalization: A Critical Review of Theoretical Models: [NAME] Yueya.- 15: Transnational Migration in the Age of Globalization: Chinese Canadians in Beijing: [NAME]. | This book will enlarge our grasp of global migration phenomena, offering insights into the fascinating, at times startling, realities of human migration in Asia. The chapters presented in this volume offer variety in not only theme but in approach to migration in Southeast and East Asia. Particularly welcome for a volume on migration studies, a discipline that has long been dominated by economists, sociologists, and geographers, are the chapters that approach the subject from an anthropological or ethnological perspective. These chapters bring to our attention details of the lives of migrants and their communities that are often lost in studies of migration statistics, the economic aspects of migration, or aspects of urban geography with which we have become more familiar.Some chapters are more theoretical in nature and herein lie some of the most important reasons for studying migration involving Asian countries: migration studies have, until relatively recently, developed their theoretical insights on the basis of European migration to North America. Asian migration offers new theoretical challenges to migration scholars; its dynamism is such that predictions of what is to come are not for the risk averse. The empirical studies here provide fascinating details of the strategies used by asylum seekers, of marriage migration, of the role of homeland languages in education, of the workings of ethnic entrepreneurs, of the media’s role in sustaining Chinese communities, and on the incentive structures that are helping to shape return flows to China.For readers who are from Asian countries, this book will illuminate the changes that are taking place in your region as a result of migration. For readers from developed and other societies, it will provide new insights into migration involving this understudied part of the world, an area that supplies the lion’s share of immigrants to developed economies, and the area whose rapid economic development will soon make it their greatest competition for migrants, especially the highly skilled. | <p>Draws together the complicated threads of migration that exist in China and elsewhere in Asia</p><p>Offers insights into the realities of human migration in Asia</p><p>Offers variety in theme and approach to migration in Southeast and East Asia</p> | Science | Science (SC) | 0 | EBOP11648 | Humanities, Social Sciences and Law